ND5 Manual

TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS
AMPFET ND5
AM BROADCAST TRANSMITTER
5000 WATT
(THREE PRESET POWER LEVELS)
MONAURAL or AM STEREO
Original Issue ................. 15 January 1995

Change 1.15 March 1995
Copyright 1995 NAUTEL. All rights reserved

5000 WATT AM BROADCAST TRANSMITTER
AMPFET ND5
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
The list of effective pages lists the status of all pages in this manual. Original pages are identified by a zero in the Change
No. column. Pages subsequently changed are identified by the date of the change number. On a changed page, the text
affected by the latest change is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin opposite the changed material.
Original ............................................... 15 January 1995

Change 1................................................ 15 March 1995
Total number of printed sides in this manual is 233 as listed below:
CHANGE CHANGE
PAGE No. DATE PAGE No. DATE
Title 1 15 March 1995 2-3 0 15 January 1995

Title (Rear) - Blank 2-4 0 15 January 1995
Effective (1) 1 15 March 1995 2-5 0 15 January 1995
Effective (4) - Blank 2-8 0 15 January 1995
Safety (1) 0 15 January 1995 2-9 0 15 January 1995
Safety (4) - Blank 3-2 0 15 January 1995
Warranty (1) 0 15 January 1995 3-3 0 15 January 1995
Warranty (2) 0 15 January 1995 3-4 0 15 January 1995
Contents (1) 1 15 March 1995 3-5 0 15 January 1995
Contents (3) 0 15 January 1995 3-7 0 15 January 1995
Contents (12) - Blank 3-16 0 15 January 1995
1-1 1 15 March 1995 3-17 0 15 January 1995
1-2 0 15 January 1995 3-18 0 15 January 1995
1-3 0 15 January 1995 3-19 0 15 January 1995
1-4 0 15 January 1995 3-20 0 15 January 1995
1-5 0 15 January 1995 3-21 0 15 January 1995
1-6 1 15 March 1995 3-22 1 15 March 1995
1-7 0 15 January 1995 3-23 0 15 January 1995
1-8 - Blank 3-24 0 15 January 1995
2-1 0 15 January 1995 3-25 0 15 January 1995
2-2 0 15 January 1995 3-26 0 15 January 1995
Effective Pages (Page 1)

15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)
CHANGE CHANGE
3-27 0 15 January 1995 5-17 0 15 January 1995

3-28 0 15 January 1995 5-18 0 15 January 1995
3-29 0 15 January 1995 5-19 0 15 January 1995
3-30 0 15 January 1995 5-20 0 15 January 1995
3-31 0 15 January 1995 5-21 0 15 January 1995
3-32 - Blank 5-22 0 15 January 1995
4-1 0 15 January 1995 5-23 0 15 January 1995
4-2 0 15 January 1995 5-24 0 15 January 1995
4-3 0 15 January 1995 5-25 0 15 January 1995
4-4 0 15 January 1995 5-26 0 15 January 1995
4-5 0 15 January 1995 5-27 0 15 January 1995
4-6 0 15 January 1995 5-28 0 15 January 1995
4-7 0 15 January 1995 5-29 0 15 January 1995
4-8 0 15 January 1995 5-30 0 15 January 1995
4-9 0 15 January 1995 5-31 0 15 January 1995
4-10 0 15 January 1995 5-32 1 15 March 1995
4-11 0 15 January 1995 5-33 1 15 March 1995
4-12 0 15 January 1995 5-34 0 15 January 1995
4-13 0 15 January 1995 5-35 0 15 January 1995
4-14 0 15 January 1995 5-36 0 15 January 1995
4-15 0 15 January 1995 5-37 0 15 January 1995
4-16 0 15 January 1995 5-38 0 15 January 1995
4-17 0 15 January 1995 5-39 0 15 January 1995
4-18 0 15 January 1995 5-40 - Blank
4-19 0 15 January 1995 6-1 0 15 January 1995
4-20 0 15 January 1995 6-2 0 15 January 1995
4-21 0 15 January 1995 6-3 0 15 January 1995
4-22 0 15 January 1995 6-4 0 15 January 1995
4-23 0 15 January 1995 6-5 0 15 January 1995
4-24 0 15 January 1995 6-6 0 15 January 1995
4-25 0 15 January 1995 7-1 0 15 January 1995
4-26 - Blank 7-2 0 15 January 1995
5-1 0 15 January 1995 7-3 0 15 January 1995
5-2 0 15 January 1995 7-4 0 15 January 1995
5-3 0 15 January 1995 7-5 0 15 January 1995
5-4 0 15 January 1995 7-6 0 15 January 1995
5-5 1 15 March 1995 7-7 0 15 January 1995
5-6 0 15 January 1995 7-8 0 15 January 1995
5-7 0 15 January 1995 7-9 0 15 January 1995
5-8 0 15 January 1995 7-10 0 15 January 1995
5-9 0 15 January 1995 7-11 0 15 January 1995
5-10 0 15 January 1995 7-12 0 15 January 1995
5-11 0 15 January 1995 7-13 0 15 January 1995
5-12 0 15 January 1995 7-14 0 15 January 1995
5-13 0 15 January 1995 7-15 0 15 January 1995
5-14 0 15 January 1995 7-16 0 15 January 1995
5-15 1 15 March 1995 7-17 0 15 January 1995
5-16 0 15 January 1995 7-18 0 15 January 1995

15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)
CHANGE CHANGE
7-19 0 15 January 1995 SD-1 0 15 January 1995

7-21 0 15 January 1995 SD-3A 0 15 January 1995
7-22 0 15 January 1995 SD-3B 0 15 January 1995
7-26 1 15 March 1995 SD-7 0 15 January 1995
7-27 0 15 January 1995 SD-8 1 15 March 1995
7-28 0 15 January 1995 10-1 0 15 January 1995
7-29 0 15 January 1995 10-2 0 15 January 1995
7-30 0 15 January 1995 MD-1 0 15 January 1995
8-1 0 15 January 1995 MD-6A 0 15 January 1995
8-2 0 15 January 1995 MD-6B 0 15 January 1995
8-20 - Blank MD-24 0 15 January 1995
9-1 0 15 January 1995 MD-25A 0 15 January 1995
9-2 0 15 January 1995 MD-25B 0 15 January 1995
9-3 0 15 January 1995 MD-26 1 15 March 1995
9-4 - Blank

15 March 1995
5 000 WATT AM BROADCAST TRANSMITTER
AMPFET ND5
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION (MOUTH-TO-MOUTH)
(a) START MOUTH-TO-MOUTH BREATHING

IMMEDIATELY. SECONDS COUNT. Do not wait to
loosen clothing, warm the casualty, or apply stimulants. 1
(b) ASSESS RESPONSIVENESS OF CASUALTY. Do not
jar casualty or cause further physical injury (Figure 1)
(c) IF POSSIBLE, SEND A BYSTANDER TO GET

MEDICAL HELP. Do not leave casualty unattended
(Figure 2)
2
(d) CHECK CAROTID PULSE (Figure 3)
(e) LAY CASUALTY ON HIS/HER BACK and place any

available jacket or blanket under his/her shoulders.
(f) TILT THE HEAD BACK AND LIFT THE CHIN to open the
airway (Figure 4)
(g) PINCH CASUALTYS NOSE AND EXHALE TWO SLOW 3

BREATHS INTO CASUALTY (Figure 5)
(h) REMOVE YOUR MOUTH and check for breathing

(Figure 6)
(i) CONTINUE GIVING ONE BREATH EVERY FIVE

SECONDS without interruption. If any air is retained in 4
the stomach after exhalation by casualty, press gently on
stomach to expel air.
(j) IF CHEST DOES NOT RISE CHECK for obstruction in

casualtys mouth: clear foreign material using your finger,
tissues, etc. Use chin lift and recommence mouth-to-
mouth breathing.
(k) WHILE MOUTH-TO-MOUTH BREATHING IS 5

CONTINUED have someone else:
(a) Loosen casualtys clothing.
(b) Keep the casualty warm.
(l) DONT GIVE UP. Continue without interruption until the

casualty is revived, or until a doctor pronounces the
casualty dead. Four hours or more may be required.
6
(m) DO NOT PROVIDE ANYTHING ORALLY while victim is
unconscious.
Safety (Page 1)
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
GENERAL RULES FOR TREATMENT FOR BURNS, BLEEDING, AND SHOCK
1. After casualty has revived, treat for injuries and shock.
2. Reassure casualty.
3. Try to make him comfortable.
4. Keep him reasonably warm but do not apply heat.
5. If thirsty, liquids may be given but no alcohol (no liquids should be given in cases of severe burns).
6. Treat burns or wounds. Infection danger in treating burns or wounds is very great so ensure hands are
clean and do not handle affected areas more than necessary.
7. Do not apply salves, grease, etc. to burns.
8. Do not remove burned clothing which adheres to the skin or break blisters.
9. Cover the burn with a dry sterile dressing, piece of sheeting, etc.
10. Bandage lightly over blisters where care must be taken to cover and not to break.
11. If severe bleeding of wound, elevate affected area, except in the case of a fracture.
12. Expose wound and apply pressure.
13. Apply dressing, pad and bandage.
14. For burns and bleeding, immobilize injured part using splints if necessary and keep patient in restful
position during removal to hospital or expert medical attention.
15. In all cases, send for medical aid immediately.
Safety (Page 2)
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
ELECTRIC SHOCK - RESCUE METHODS
Electricity can damage the body in a number of ways. It may interfere with the proper functioning of the nervous
system and the heart action, it can subject the body to extreme heat and can cause severe muscular contractions.
The path that the current of electricity takes through the body is important. Currents which pass from hand to hand
or from hand to foot may pass directly through the heart and upset its normal functioning. This threat to life is
related to the amount of current or amperage that will flow through a victim's body. Very little current (as little as
10 milliamps) can result in severe shock or death.
Speed in the application of first aid measures is absolutely essential in cases of electrical injury. As soon as the
victim is freed safely from the source of the electrical current, if breathing has stopped, artificial respiration should
be commenced immediately. If the carotid pulse cannot be felt, external cardiac massage should be commenced
simultaneously. Resuscitation should be continued until the patient is breathing on his own or until medical aid
arrives. Survival rates can be quite high if cardio-pulmonary resuscitation is started within 3 to 4 minutes of the
injury being received.
ACT AT ONCE - DELAY OR INDECISION MAY BE FATAL
1. Turn OFF the electrical source.
2. Commence artificial respiration immediately.
3. Treat for burns, bleeding and shock.
REMOVING A CASUALTY FROM ELECTRICAL CONTACT
LOW VOLTAGE - 0 to 240 volts (household use)
Switch off the current, if possible and time permits. If the switch cannot be located immediately and the supply is
through a flexible cord or cable, the current may be shut off by removing the plug or even breaking the cable or
wrenching free. Never attempt to shut off current by cutting cord with a knife or scissors.
If the current cannot be shut off, the greatest care is necessary in removing the casualty. Household rubber gloves,
rubber or plastic hose (if there is no water in them), a dry unpainted stick or a clean dry rope can be used to free
victim.
HIGH VOLTAGE - 240 volts and up (industrial machines and power lines)
Do not touch any person or equipment in contact with a wire.
Use a dry unpainted pole, clean dry rope, dry rubber or plastic water hose to separate the casualty from the contact.
Keep as far away as possible.
Do not touch the casualty until he is free.
Safety (Page 3)
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
TOXIC HAZARD WARNING
There are devices used in this equipment containing BERYLLIUM OXIDE ceramic, which is non-hazardous during
normal device operation and under normal device failure conditions. These devices are specifically identified in the
equipment manuals parts list(s).
DO NOT cut, crush or grind devices because the resulting dust may be HAZARDOUS IF INHALED.
Unserviceable devices should be disposed of as harmful waste.
Safety (Page 4)
15 January 1995
ND5
WARRANTY
Nautel Limited/Nautel Maine Incorporated, hereinafter referred to as Nautel, guarantees all mechanical and
electrical parts of the equipment for a period of thirteen months from date of shipment.
1. A "Part Failure" shall be deemed to have occurred when the part has become defective, or does not have the
characteristics required for the specified equipment performance:
(a) When the equipment is operated within the design parameters, and
(b) When the equipment is installed and adjusted according to Nautel's prescribed procedures as stated in
the instruction manual.
2. Nautel shall provide replacements for all "Parts" at no cost to the Customer when they become defective
during the warranty period, and upon the return of the defective part.
3. In the event that a "Part" fails during the warranty period and causes damage to a sub-assembly that cannot
be readily repaired in the field, the entire sub-assembly so damaged may be returned to Nautel for repair.
The repairs will be made without charge to the Customer.
4. Where warranty replacements or repair are provided under items 2 or 3, Nautel will pay that part of the
shipping costs incurred in returning the part/assembly to the Customer.
5. Warranty replacement parts and repair, which are provided under items 2 or 3, shall be guaranteed for a
period of ninety days from date of shipment or until the end of the original warranty period, whichever occurs
later.
6. Nautel will not assume responsibility for any charges incurred by other than Nautel employees.
7. Nautel shall have the privilege of investigating whether failures have been caused by factors beyond its
control.
8. Nautel shall in no event be liable for any consequential damages arising from the use of this equipment.
9. When requesting a warranty repair/replacement, please provide complete and accurate information. Observe
the instructions regarding 'Equipment Being Returned to Nautel' on page two of this warranty and provide the
information requested.
10. When ordering spare/replacement parts; please provide complete and accurate information. Refer to the parts
list of this manual for ordering information. Provide as much of the information requested for 'Equipment
Being Returned to Nautel' on page two of this warranty as is practical. The information identified by an
asterisk is the minimum required.
ON-LINE PART QUOTES

Nautel provides an on-line website service (www.nautel.com/in-service.html) where requests for part quotes may
be submitted. Requests will normally be responded to within one working day.
Warranty (Page 1)
15 January 1995
ND5
FACTORY SUPPORT
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
Nautel's field service department provides telephone technical assistance on a 24 hour, seven days a week basis.
Requests by other media (facsimile or e-mail) will be responded to the next working day if received after Nautel's
normal working hours. Contact the appropriate field service centre from the following:
U.S.A. customers use: Nautel Maine Incorporated Telephone 207-947-8200 (24 hours)
201 Target Industrial Circle Facsimile 207-947-3693
Bangor, Maine 04401
All other customers use: Nautel Limited Telephone 902-823-3900 (24 hours)
Hackett's Cove, RR#1 Tantallon Facsimile 902-823-3183
Nova Scotia, Canada E-Mail support@nautel.com
B0J 3J0 Web www.nautel.com
MODULE EXCHANGE SERVICE

In order to provide Nautel customers with a fast and efficient service in the event of a problem, Nautel operates a
factory rebuilt, module exchange service which takes full advantage of the high degree of module redundancy in
Nautel equipment. This module exchange service is operated from Nautels factory in Bangor, Maine and
Hacketts Cove, Nova Scotia. These two locations allow us to provide a quick turn around service to keep our
customers on the air. During the transmitters warranty period, up to thirteen months from shipment, repair and
exchange of modules is at no charge to the customer. When the warranty has expired, a charge of 80% of the
list price for all exchanged modules is made. If the faulty module is returned to Nautel within 30 days, a credit is
issued reducing this charge by one half to 40% of the list price. U.S.A. customers are required to contact our
Bangor, Maine facility. Canadian and overseas customers should contact our Nova Scotia, Canada facility.
EQUIPMENT BEING RETURNED TO NAUTEL

All equipment being returned to Nautel and all requests for repairs or replacements should be marked 'field
return' and addressed to the appropriate Nautel facility.
Complete and accurate information regarding the equipment being returned will ensure prompt attention and will
expedite the dispatch of replacements. Refer to the nameplate on the transmitter and/or the appropriate
module/assembly to obtain name, type, part and serial number information. Refer to the parts list of this manual
or the appropriate service instruction manual for additional ordering information.
The following information should accompany each request:
* Model of Equipment
* Serial number of Equipment
* Name of Part/Assembly
Serial number of Part/Assembly
* Complete reference designation of Part/Assembly
* Nautel's part number of Part/Assembly
* OEM's part number of Part/Assembly
Number of hours in Use
Nature of defect
* Return shipping address
* Denotes minimum information required to order spare/replacement parts
Warranty (Page 2)
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 FACTORY SUPPORT ............................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF MANUAL ...................................................................... 1-1
1.3.1 FAMILY TREE ............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.4 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................... 1-1
1.5 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... 1-1
1.6 TECHNICAL SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.7 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT .............................................................. 1-1
1.8 GLOSSARY OF TERMS ........................................................................................... 1-1
2 THEORY OF OPERATION
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 TRANSMITTER DESCRIPTION ................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 CONTROL/MONITOR FUNCTION ............................................................................. 2-1
2.3.1 CONTROL/MONITOR PANEL ................................................................................... 2-1
2.3.1.1 DC Supply Meters ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3.1.2 Output Power Meters ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.3.2 CONTROL INTERFACE PWB .................................................................................... 2-1
2.3.2.1 Supply Voltage Monitor ......................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2.2 B- VDC Monitor..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2.3 RF Drive Level Monitor ......................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2.4 Reflected Power Monitor ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2.5 RF Current Monitor ............................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2.6 RF Drive Control ................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2.7 RF On/RF Off Select ............................................................................................ 2-4
2.3.2.8 Exciter A/B Select ................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.2.9 Automatic Exciter Changeover.............................................................................. 2-4
2.3.2.10 Preset Power Level Select .................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2.11 RF Power Level Trim ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.2.12 Battery Backup for Local Alarm Latches................................................................ 2-5
2.3.3 SAFETY INTERLOCK................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.4 REMOTE INTERFACE PWB ...................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 EXCITER STAGE ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 MONAURAL/THIRD PARTY AM STEREO.................................................................. 2-5
2.4.1.1 Exciter Drawer (Monaural) .................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.2 C-QUAM AM STEREO ............................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.2.1 Exciter Drawer (AM Stereo) .................................................................................. 2-6
2.4.3 SINGLE EXCITER ...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.3.1 Exciter Drawer (Single Exciter) ............................................................................. 2-7
2.4.4 EXCITER POWER SUPPLY ....................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.5 MODULATOR DRIVER PWB...................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.5.1 /01 Variations ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.4.5.2 /02 Variations ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.4.5.3 Both Variations ..................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.6 C-QUAM AM STEREO EXCITER PWB ...................................................................... 2-8
2.4.7 RF DRIVE PWB .......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.8 RF DRIVE AMPLIFIER ............................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.9 B-VDC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY ...................................................................... 2-9
Contents (Page 1)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page
2 THEORY OF OPERATION (Continued)

2.4.10 RF DRIVE TUNING/SPLITTING ................................................................................. 2-9
2.5 RF POWER STAGE ................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1 RELAY CONTROL PANEL ......................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1.1 Relay Control ........................................................................................................ 2-9
2.5.2 RF POWER MODULES .............................................................................................. 2-9
2.5.3 RF OUTPUT FILTER .................................................................................................. 2-9
2.5.3.1 RF Current Probe.................................................................................................. 2-9
2.5.3.2 Forward/Reflected Power Probe.......................................................................... 2-10
2.5.3.3 RF Voltage Probe ............................................................................................... 2-10
2.6 AC/DC POWER STAGE ........................................................................................... 2-10
2.6.1 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY ......................................................................................... 2-10
2.6.1.1 Low Voltage Power Supply.................................................................................. 2-10
3 INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION FOR USE

3.1 PLANNING AND SITE PREPARATION .................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 TRANSMITTER ROOM REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1.1 Transmitter Dimensions ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1.2 Maintenance Access Clearance ............................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1.3 Air Flushing........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.4 Cooling ................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1.5 Heating ................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1.6 Work Area ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2.1 Station Reference Ground ................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2.2 Ac Power Source ................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.2.3 Antenna Feed Cable ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.2.4 Antenna/RF Output Disconnect ............................................................................. 3-2
3.1.2.5 Antenna Tower ..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2.6 External Control/Monitor Wiring ........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 ELECTRICAL POWER .............................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3.1 Nominal Voltage .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3.2 Voltage Stability ................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3.3 Power Consumption ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3.4 External Switching ................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.4 ANTENNA SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.4.1 RF Feed Cable .................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.4.2 Static Drain Choke ............................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5 RF DRIVE SOURCE .................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.5.1 Internal Monaural RF Drive PWB .......................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5.2 External Monaural RF Generator .......................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5.3 Third Party AM Stereo Exciter............................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5.4 Nautel's C-QUAM AM Stereo Exciter .................................................................... 3-3
3.1.6 MODULATING AUDIO ............................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.6.1 Monaural Audio..................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.6.2 External AM Stereo Audio ..................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.6.3 Nautel's C-QUAM AM Stereo Audio ...................................................................... 3-4
3.1.7 SAFETY INTERLOCK ................................................................................................ 3-4
Contents (Page 2)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5

Section Page
3 INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION FOR USE (Continued)

3.1.8 REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS ................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.8.1 On/Off Control ...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.8.2 Preset Power Level Select ................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.8.3 Exciter A/B Select ................................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.8.4 Alarm Reset .......................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.9 OTHER REMOTE CONTROLS................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.9.1 RF Power Trim .................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.9.2 PWM Inhibit Control ............................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.10 RF PERFORMANCE MONITORING........................................................................... 3-6
3.1.10.1 Forward Power Level ........................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.10.2 Reflected Power Level ......................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.10.3 RF Drive Sample .................................................................................................. 3-6
3.1.10.4 RF Monitor Sample ............................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.11 REMOTE ALARM INDICATIONS ................................................................................ 3-6
3.1.11.1 RF Stress Current Alarm ....................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.11.2 High AC Power Source Voltage Alarm ................................................................. 3-6
3.1.11.3 Low AC Power Source Voltage Alarm ................................................................... 3-7
3.1.11.4 High B- Voltage Alarm ......................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.11.5 RF Drive Level Alarm ........................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.11.6 RF Drive Tuning Alarm ......................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.11.7 SWR Shutback Alarm ........................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.11.8 SWR Cutback Alarm ............................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.11.9 Interlock Open Alarm ............................................................................................ 3-7
3.1.12 REMOTE STATUS INDICATIONS .............................................................................. 3-7
3.1.12.1 Remote Status ...................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.12.2 RF On Status ........................................................................................................ 3-8
3.1.12.3 Exciter B Status .................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.12.4 Power Level Status ............................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.12.5 Transmitter Ready Status ..................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.13 PARTS SUPPLIED BY NAUTEL ................................................................................ 3-8
3.1.13.1 Parts Removed During Disassembly for Shipment ............................................... 3-8
3.1.13.2 Ancillary Parts ...................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.14 PARTS REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED BY NAUTEL ............................................. 3-8
3.1.14.1 Surge Protector Panel ........................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.15 TEST EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................. 3-8
3.2 NON-TECHNICAL PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES ...................................... 3-9
3.2.1 ACCEPTANCE OF SHIPMENT ................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.2 UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.3 ASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION....................................................................................... 3-9
3.2.3.1 Disassemby Required .......................................................................................... 3-9
3.2.3.2 Visual Inspection ................................................................................................. 3-10
3.2.3.3 Installation of RF Power Modules ........................................................................ 3-10
3.2.3.4 Installation of Power Transformer ....................................................................... 3-10
3.2.4 INSTALLATION OF EXTERNAL CONTROL/MONITOR WIRING ............................. 3-12
3.2.5 INSTALLATION OF AC POWER SOURCE WIRING ............................................... 3-13
3.2.6 INSTALLATION OF RF FEED CABLE ...................................................................... 3-13
3.2.6.1 Connection of 7/8 Inch EIA Flange Connector ..................................................... 3-13
Contents (Page 3)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5

Section Page
3 INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION FOR USE (Continued)

3.2.7 REFERENCE GROUND INTERCONNECTION ........................................................ 3-14
3.3 TECHNICAL PRE-COMMISSIONING....................................................................... 3-16
3.3.1 SELECTING PWR TRANSFORMER'S PRIMARY WINDING TAPS ........................ 3-16
3.3.2 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL RF DRIVE ........................................................................... 3-16
3.3.3 MODULATING AUDIO PASS BAND SELECTION ................................................... 3-17
3.3.4 c DEPENDENT SELECTIONS (RF DRIVE PWB) .................................................... 3-17
3.3.4.1 Carrier Oscillator Crystal ..................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.4.2 Frequency Divider Links ..................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.4.3 Divide-by-N Switch Settings ............................................................................... 3-18
3.3.5 c DEPENDENT SELECTIONS (C-QUAM AM STEREO EXCITER PWB) ................ 3-19
3.3.5.1 Carrier Oscillator Crystal ..................................................................................... 3-19
3.3.5.2 Divide-by-N Switch Settings ............................................................................... 3-19
3.3.6 MODULATOR DRIVER PWB'S PWM DIVIDER LINKS............................................. 3-19
3.3.6.1 Modulator Driver PWB Without PWM Oscillator ................................................. 3-19
3.3.6.2 Modulator Driver PWB With PWM Oscillator ...................................................... 3-19
3.3.7 RF DRIVE PATH (EXCITER A) ................................................................................. 3-19
3.3.7.1 RF Drive PWB as RF Drive Source .................................................................... 3-19
3.3.7.2 AM Stereo Exciter as RF Drive Source ............................................................... 3-19
3.3.8 CONTROL INTERFACE BATTERY .......................................................................... 3-20
3.3.9 REMOVAL OF METER SHORTING CLIPS .............................................................. 3-20
3.3.10 LOAD RESISTANCE CHECK FOR B- V0LTAGE POWER SUPPLY ........................ 3-20
3.4 COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES .......................................................................... 3-21
3.4.1 PRECAUTIONS TO BE OBSERVED ....................................................................... 3-21
3.4.2 PRELIMINARY SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.3 INITIAL TURN-ON .................................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.4 DC VOLTAGE CHECKS ........................................................................................... 3-23
3.4.4.1 Exciter Drawer's Dc Power Supplies ................................................................... 3-23
3.4.4.2 B- VDC Power Supply (No Load) ........................................................................ 3-23
3.4.5 RF DRIVE FREQUENCY/PREAMPLIFIER CHECKS ............................................... 3-24
3.4.5.1 Internal RF Drive Source .................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.5.2 External RF Drive Source ................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.5.3 AM Stereo RF Drive Source................................................................................ 3-25
3.4.6 RF DRIVE AMPLIFIER CHECKS .............................................................................. 3-26
3.4.6.1 RF Drive Level Detector Check........................................................................... 3-26
3.4.7 MOD DRIVE CHECKS ............................................................................................. 3-27
3.4.7.1 Mod Drive Check Pre-Requisites ........................................................................ 3-27
3.4.7.2 PWM (2c/N Input) ............................................................................................... 3-27
3.4.7.3 PWM (PWM Oscillator) ........................................................................................ 3-27
3.4.7.4 PWM Checks ...................................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.7.5 Completion of Mod Drive Checks ........................................................................ 3-29
3.4.8 INITIAL TURN-ON OF RF POWER MODULES ........................................................ 3-29
3.4.8.1 Charging of B- VDC Storage Capacitors ............................................................. 3-29
3.4.9 RF POWER AMPLIFIER CHECK.............................................................................. 3-30
3.4.10 B- VOLTAGE CHECK - FULL LOAD ........................................................................ 3-30
3.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTS/FINAL ADJUSTMENTS........................................................ 3-31
Contents (Page 4)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5

Section Page
4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE ................................................................ 4-1
4.2.1 TURN-OFF OF RF OUTPUT ...................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 COMPLETE SHUTDOWN .......................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............................................................................... 4-1
4.3.1 RF POWER MODULE CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............................................ 4-1
4.3.2 CONTROL/MONITOR PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ................................. 4-1
4.3.3 INTERFACE PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ................................................ 4-1
4.3.4 EXCITER DRAWER CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............................................... 4-1
4.3.5 RF OUTPUT FILTER CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............................................. 4-2
4.3.6 RF DRIVE DISTRIBUTION PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ......................... 4-2
4.3.7 RELAY CONTROL PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ...................................... 4-2
4.3.8 FUSE BLOCK ASSEMBLY CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ...................................... 4-2
4.3.9 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ................................... 4-2
4.4 PRE-START-UP CHECKS ......................................................................................... 4-2
4.5 TURNING ON THE TRANSMITTER ........................................................................... 4-2
4.6 RF POWER MODULE SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................... 4-2
4.7 MODULATION LEVELS ............................................................................................ 4-3
4.8 VERIFICATION OF PA FAILURE ALARMS ............................................................... 4-3
4.9 REMOVAL OF RF POWER MODULE ........................................................................ 4-3
4.10 OPERATION WITH DEFECTIVE OR MISSING RF POWER MODULES ................... 4-3
4.11 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS. ................................................................................... 4-4
4.12 READING FORWARD POWER METER .................................................................... 4-5
4.13 REMOTE OPERATION .............................................................................................. 4-5
4.14 ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTION.............................................................................. 4-5
4.14.1 PERSONAL DISCHARGING....................................................................................... 4-5
4.14.2 HANDLING/STORAGE ............................................................................................... 4-5
4.14.3 TOOLS/TEST EQUIPMENT........................................................................................ 4-5
4.14.4 STRESS CURRENT PROTECTION ........................................................................... 4-5
5 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

5.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 FUNCTIONAL TESTS ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.3.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3.2 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ................................................................................. 5-2
5.3.3 TEST PREREQUISITES ............................................................................................ 5-2
5.3.4 INITIAL TURN-ON ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.5 EXCITER DRAWER POWER SUPPLY CHECKS ....................................................... 5-4
5.3.6 B- VOLTAGE CHECK - NO LOAD .............................................................................. 5-5
5.3.7 RF DRIVE FREQUENCY/PREAMPLIFIER CHECKS .................................................. 5-5
5.3.7.1 Internal RF Drive Source ...................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.7.2 External RF Drive Source ..................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.7.3 AM Stereo RF Drive Source.................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.8 RF DRIVE AMPLIFIER CHECKS ................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.8.1 RF Drive Level Detector Check............................................................................. 5-8
Contents (Page 5)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5

Section Page
5 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT (Continued)

5.3.9 MOD DRIVE CHECKS ............................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.9.1 Mod Drive Check Pre-Requisites .......................................................................... 5-9
5.3.9.2 PWM (2c/N Input) ................................................................................................. 5-9
5.3.9.3 PWM (PWM Oscillator) ........................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.9.4 PWM Checks ...................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.9.5 Completion of Mod Drive Checks ........................................................................ 5-11
5.3.10 RF POWER AMPLIFIER CHECKS ........................................................................... 5-12
5.3.10.1 Forward Power Limiting ...................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.10.2 Setting Preset Power Levels ............................................................................... 5-13
5.3.11 MODULATION ENVELOPE/EMISSION LEVEL CHECKS......................................... 5-14
5.3.11.1 Modulation Envelope/Emission Level Check Prerequisites.................................. 5-14
5.3.11.2 Audio Gain/Modulation Control .......................................................................... 5-14
5.3.11.3 Audio Frequency Response ................................................................................ 5-15
5.3.11.4 Signal-To-Noise Ratio ........................................................................................ 5-15
5.3.11.5 Audio Distortion .................................................................................................. 5-16
5.3.11.6 Carrier Shift ....................................................................................................... 5-16
5.3.11.7 Completion of Modulation Envelope/Emission Level Checks ............................. 5-17
5.3.12 REMOTE CONTROL CHECK .................................................................................. 5-17
5.3.12.1 Remote Control Prerequisites ............................................................................. 5-17
5.3.12.2 Remote On/Off Control ...................................................................................... 5-17
5.3.12.3 Remote Selection of Active Exciter ..................................................................... 5-17
5.3.12.4 Remote Power Level Controls ............................................................................ 5-18
5.3.12.5 Remote Power Trim Control ............................................................................... 5-19
5.3.12.6 Remote PWM Inhibit Control .............................................................................. 5-19
5.3.13 PROTECTION CIRCUIT CHECKS............................................................................ 5-20
5.3.13.1 High B- VDC Detector ......................................................................................... 5-20
5.3.13.2 High AC Voltage Detector ................................................................................... 5-21
5.3.13.3 Low AC Voltage Detector .................................................................................... 5-21
5.3.13.4 Low RF Drive Level Detector ............................................................................. 5-22
5.3.13.5 Detuned RF Drive Detector ................................................................................. 5-23
5.3.13.6 High RF Current Detector ................................................................................... 5-24
5.3.13.7 High SWR Detector ............................................................................................ 5-25
5.3.13.8 Modulation Peak Limiting .................................................................................... 5-27
5.3.13.9 Check of Safety Interlock .................................................................................... 5-28
5.3.14 AUTO EXCITER CHANGEOVER.............................................................................. 5-29
5.3.15 REMOTE FORWARD POWER MONITOR ............................................................... 5-29
5.3.16 REMOTE REFLECTED POWER MONITOR............................................................. 5-29
5.4 SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ................................................................ 5-30
5.4.1 INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION (EXTERNAL AM STEREO RF DRIVE) ................... 5-30
5.4.2 RF VOLTAGE PROBE TUNING........................................................................................... 5-31
5.4.3 RF OUTPUT SPARK GAP ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................... 5-31
5.4.4 RF DRIVE TUNING .............................................................................................................. 5-32
5.4.4.1 Series Tuning.................................................................................................................. 5-32
5.4.4.2 Parallel Tuning ................................................................................................................ 5-33
5.4.5 HIGH B-VDC THRESHOLD ................................................................................................. 5-34
5.4.6 RF CURRENT LEVEL .......................................................................................................... 5-35
5.4.7 HIGH/LOW AC VOLTS THRESHOLD ................................................................................. 5-36
5.4.7.1 Pre-requisites for Ac Alarm Thresholds .......................................................................... 5-36
5.4.7.2 High AC Voltage Alarm Threshold .................................................................................. 5-38
5.4.7.3 Low AC Voltage Alarm Threshold .................................................................................. 5-38
5.4.7.4 Completion of AC Voltage Tests .................................................................................... 5-39
Contents (Page 6)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5

Section Page
6 MAINTENANCE
6.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE .................................................................................. 6-1
6.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................................................. 6-1
6.3.1 ON-AIR TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................... 6-1
6.3.1.1 Remote Trouble Shooting ..................................................................................... 6-1
6.3.1.2 Local Trouble Shooting ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.3.2 OFF-AIR TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................. 6-2
6.4 RF POWER MODULE FAULT ISOLATION ............................................................... 6-2
6.5 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES FOR RF POWER MODULE(S). ............................. 6-2
6.5.1 RF POWER MODULE REMOVAL .............................................................................. 6-3
6.5.2 RF POWER MODULE INSTALLATION ...................................................................... 6-3
6.6 REPLACEMENT OF EXCITER DRAWER PWB'S AND RF DRIVE AMPLIFIERS ...... 6-3
6.7 ISOLATION OF DEFECTIVE MOSFETS .................................................................. 6-4
6.8 MOSFET REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................... 6-5
6.9 VENTILATION FAN FILTERS .................................................................................... 6-6
6.9.1 RF POWER MODULE AIR FILTERS .......................................................................... 6-6
7 PARTS LIST
7.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 FAMILY TREE ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 MANUFACTURER'S INDEX ....................................................................................... 7-1
7.4 HOW TO LOCATE INFORMATION FOR A SPECIFIC PART ................................... 7-1
7.4.1 WHEN NAUTEL CONFIGURATION CONTROL NUMBER IS KNOWN ...................... 7-1
7.4.2 WHEN REF DES IS KNOWN .................................................................................... 7-1
7.5 REFERENCE DESIGNATION INDEXES ................................................................... 7-1
7.6 COLUMN CONTENT EXPLANATION ........................................................................ 7-1
7.6.1 USE ON CODE COLUMN .......................................................................................... 7-1
7.6.2 REF DES COLUMN ................................................................................................... 7-2
7.6.3 NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION COLUMN........................................................ 7-2
7.6.4 NAUTEL'S PART NO. COLUMN ................................................................................ 7-2
7.6.5 JAN/MIL/OEM PART NO. COLUMN ........................................................................... 7-2
7.6.6 OEM CODE COLUMN ................................................................................................ 7-2
8 WIRING INFORMATION
8.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 WIRING LISTS NOT PROVIDED .............................................................................. 8-1
8.3 PRINTED WIRING PATTERNS ................................................................................. 8-1
8.4 WIRE COLORS ......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.5 WIRING LISTS PROVIDED ....................................................................................... 8-1
9 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS
9.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 COMPONENT VALUES. ........................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS ................................................................................................ 9-1
9.4 LOGIC SYMBOLS ..................................................................................................... 9-1
9.5 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS .................................................................................. 9-1
9.6 IDENTIFICATION OF SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ....................................................... 9-1
Contents (Page 7)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5

Section Page
9 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS (Continued)

9.7 STRUCTURE OF SCHEMATICS ............................................................................... 9-1
9.8 LOCATING A PART/ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED ON A SCHEMATIC ........................... 9-2
9.9 LOCATING THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM(S) FOR A FUNCTIONAL BLOCK ............ 9-2
9.9.1 WHEN FIGURE NUMBER IDENTIFIED ..................................................................... 9-2
9.9.2 WHEN REFERENCE DESIGNATION ASSIGNED TO BLOCK ................................... 9-2
9.9.3 TITLE OF BLOCK ...................................................................................................... 9-2
10 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
10.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 LOCATING ASSEMBLY DETAIL DRAWINGS ......................................................... 10-1
10.3 CONTENT OF MECHANICAL DRAWINGS ............................................................. 10-1
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Number Title Page
1-1 AMPFET ND5- 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter ....................................................................... 1-5

3-1 External Input/Output Interface .............................................................................................. 3-15
4-1 Dc Input Current Versus RF Carrier Forward Power ................................................................. 4-7
5-1 Balanced Drive Input Waveform ............................................................................................. 5-6
5-2 RF Drive Amplifier Input Waveform ........................................................................................ 5-8
5-3 RF Drive Output Waveform .................................................................................................... 5-8
5-4 2c/N Frequency Waveform ................................................................................................... 5-9
5-5 PWM Frequency Waveform ................................................................................................... 5-9
5-6 PWM Ramp Integrator Waveform ......................................................................................... 5-10
5-7 Mod Drive Output Waveform ................................................................................................ 5-11
5-8 RF Output with Positive Peak Clipping .................................................................................. 5-28
5-9 Determination of Air Gap for Spark Gap A9E1 ....................................................................... 5-32
7-1A Family Tree - AMPFET ND5 AM Broadcast Transmitter (Monaural) (Sheet 1 of 2) .................. 7-6
7-1B Family Tree - AMPFET ND5 AM Broadcast Transmitter (Stereo) (Sheet 1 of 2) ...................... 7-7
7-1C Family Tree - AMPFET ND5 AM Broadcast Transmitter (Sheet 2 of 2) .................................... 7-8
SD-1 Electrical Schematic - AMPFET ND5 - 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter ................................ SD-1
SD-2 Electrical Schematic - 5kW Control/Monitor Functions .......................................................... SD-2
SD-3A Electrical Schematic - 5kW Exciter Stage (Monaural) ......................................................... SD-3A
SD-3B Electrical Schematic - 5kW Exciter Stage (Stereo) ............................................................. SD-3B
SD-4 Electrical Schematic - 5kW RF Power Stage ........................................................................ SD-4
SD-5 Electrical Schematic - 5kW AC/DC Power Stage .................................................................. SD-5
SD-6 Electrical Schematic - Exciter Drawer (NAE70) .................................................................... SD-6
SD-7 Electrical Schematic - Relay Control Panel (NAX103)........................................................... SD-7
SD-8 Electrical Schematic - 5kW RF Output Filter (NAF74) .......................................................... SD-8
Contents (Page 8)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Number Title Page
MD-1 Assembly Detail - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter - Front View .................... MD-1
MD-2 Assembly Detail - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter - Rear View .................... MD-2
MD-3 Assembly Detail - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel - Front View....................................... MD-3
MD-4 Assembly Detail - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel - Rear View ....................................... MD-4
MD-5 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Front View .......................................................... MD-5
MD-6A Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Monaural) - Top View ....................................... MD-6A
MD-6B Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Stereo) - Top View ........................................... MD-6B
MD-7 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Bottom View ....................................................... MD-7
MD-8 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Rear View .......................................................... MD-8
MD-9 Assembly Detail - NAX112 Circuit Breaker Panel.................................................................. MD-9
MD-10 Assembly Detail - NAC80 Interface Panel ........................................................................... MD-10
MD-11 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Top View ................................................ MD-11
MD-12 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Front View.............................................. MD-12
MD-13 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Side View ............................................... MD-13
MD-14 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Rear View .............................................. MD-14
MD-15 Assembly Detail - NAFP19 5kW Forward/Reflected Power Probe ....................................... MD-15
MD-16 Assembly Detail - NAFP43 5kW RF Voltage Probe ............................................................ MD-16
MD-17 Assembly Detail - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel - Front View .................................. MD-17
MD-18 Assembly Detail - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel - Rear View ................................... MD-18
MD-19 Assembly Detail - NAPC71 RF Drive Tuning PWB ............................................................. MD-19
MD-20 Assembly Detail - NAX103 Relay Control Panel - Front View .............................................. MD-20
MD-21 Assembly Detail - NAX103 Relay Control Panel - Rear View .............................................. MD-21
MD-22 Assembly Detail - NAPC49C Relay Control PWB ............................................................... MD-22
MD-23 Assembly Detail - 3-Phase Rectifier (QM02) ....................................................................... MD-23
MD-24 Assembly Detail - Fuse Block Assembly (P/N 175-8065-01) ............................................... MD-24
MD-25A Assembly Detail - 208 VAC Power Transformer (P/N 159-7090-03) ..................................MD-25A
MD-25B Assembly Detail - 360-505 VAC Power Transformer (P/N 159-7080-06) ...........................MD-25B
MD-26 Dimensional Information - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter .......................... MD-26
Contents (Page 9)
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
LIST OF TABLES
Number Title Page
1-1 Technical Summary ................................................................................................................. 1-2

1-2 Test Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-3 Special Tools ........................................................................................................................... 1-7
1-4 Glossary of Terms ................................................................................................................... 1-7
3-1 Primary Winding Tap Selection for Power Transformer ......................................................... 3-16
3-2 Low-Pass Filter Selector Switch Settings .............................................................................. 3-17
3-3 RF Drive PWB's Carrier Frequency Dependent Switch Settings and Link Connections ......... 3-18
3-4 Reference Switch Settings for Initial Turn-0n ......................................................................... 3-22
3-5 Exciter Drawer's Dc Voltage Readings ................................................................................... 3-23
4-1 PA Failures Versus RF Output ................................................................................................ 4-4
4-2 RF Power Module Controls and Indicators ............................................................................... 4-8
4-3 Control/Monitor Panel Controls and Indicators ....................................................................... 4-10
4-4 Interface Panel Controls and Indicators ................................................................................. 4-17
4-5 Exciter Drawer Controls and Indicators ................................................................................. 4-18
4-6 RF Output Filter Controls and Indicators ............................................................................... 4-21
4-7 RF Drive Distribution Panel Controls and Indicators............................................................... 4-22
4-8 Relay Control Panel Controls and Indicators .......................................................................... 4-23
4-9 Fuse Block Assembly Controls and Indicators ....................................................................... 4-24
4-10 Circuit Breaker Panel Controls and Indicators ........................................................................ 4-25
5-1 Reference Switch Settings for Functional Test ......................................................................... 5-3
5-2 Exciter Drawer's DC Voltage Readings .................................................................................... 5-4
5-3 RF Drive Series Tuning Inductor ............................................................................................ 5-33
7-1 Manufacturers' Code to Address Index .................................................................................... 7-3
7-2 Ref Des Index - AMPFET ND5 AM Broadcast Transmitter ....................................................... 7-9
7-3 Ref Des Index - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel .............................................................. 7-12
7-4 Ref Des Index - NAE70 Exciter Drawer.................................................................................. 7-13
7-5 Ref Des Index - NAX112 Circuit Breaker Panel Assembly .................................................... 7-15
7-6 Ref Des Index - NAC65 Interface Panel ................................................................................ 7-16
7-7 Ref Des Index - NAF74/01 5kW RF Output Filter (530-610kHz)............................................. 7-17
7-8 Ref Des Index - NAF74/02 5kW RF Output Filter (611-704kHz)............................................. 7-18
7-9 Ref Des Index - NAF74/03 5kW RF Output Filter (705-815kHz) ............................................ 7-19
7-10 Ref Des Index - NAF74/04 5kW RF Output Filter (816-947kHz) ............................................ 7-20
7-11 Ref Des Index - NAF74/05 5kW RF Output Filter (948-1098kHz) .......................................... 7-21
7-12 Ref Des Index - NAF74/06 5kW RF Output Filter (1099-1267kHz) ......................................... 7-22
7-13 Ref Des Index - NAF74/07 5kW RF Output Filter (1268-1469kHz) ......................................... 7-23
7-14 Ref Des Index - NAF74/08 5kW RF Output Filter (1470-1610kHz) ........................................ 7-24
7-15 Ref Des Index - NAF74/09 5kW RF Output Filter (1611-1710kHz) ........................................ 7-25
7-16 Ref Des Index - NAFP19 5kW Forward/Reflected Power Probe ............................................ 7-26
Contents (Page 10)

15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
LIST OF TABLES (Continued)
Number Title Page
7-17 Ref Des Index - NAFP43 5kW RF Voltage Probe ................................................................. 7-27
7-18 Ref Des Index - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel ............................................................ 7-28
7-19 Ref Des Index - NAPC71 RF Drive Tuning PWB ................................................................... 7-30
7-20 Ref Des Index - NAX103 Relay Control Panel........................................................................ 7-31
7-21 Ref Des Index - NAPC49C Relay Control PWB ..................................................................... 7-32
8-1 Wiring Lists Provided .............................................................................................................. 8-1
8-2 Wiring List - NAR206 5000 Watt AM Broadcast Transmitter .................................................... 8-2
8-3 Wiring List - 175-8050-01 Cable Duct Assembly ...................................................................... 8-7
8-4 Wiring List - NAC56 Control/Monitor Panel .............................................................................. 8-8
8-5 Wiring List - NAE70 Exciter Drawer ........................................................................................ 8-9
8-6 Wiring List - NAF74 Output Filter Assembly ........................................................................... 8-12
8-7 Wiring List - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel .................................................................. 8-13
8-8 Wiring List - NAX103 Relay Control Panel ............................................................................. 8-15
8-9 Connector Mating Information - Sorted By Floating Connector .............................................. 8-16
8-10 Connector Mating Information - Sorted By Fixed Connector .................................................. 8-18
9-1 List of Electrical Schematics .................................................................................................... 9-3
10-1 List of Mechanical Drawings .................................................................................................. 10-2
Contents (Page 11)

15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
1.1 The AMPFET ND5 AM broadcast PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
transmitter is a totally solid state, medium wave, 1.4 The AMPFET ND5 - 5000 watt AM
amplitude modulated, broadcast transmitter. It may broadcast transmitters are intended to be used in
be operated as a monaural or an AM stereo conventional AM broadcasting stations. Remote
transmitter. The exciter stage contains duplicated RF control facilities are incorporated to allow unattended
drive PWBs, modulator driver PWBs, RF drive operation at a transmitter site, remotely located from
amplifiers and exciter power supplies, which are station studios.
connected as an active and a reserve exciter. The
transmitter contains four RF power modules and an MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
AC/DC power supply. It operates at one preset 1.5 The AMPFET ND5 transmitter's modules/
frequency, in the AM broadcast frequency band, into assemblies are housed in one cabinet. Figures MD-1
a nominal 50 ohm, unbalanced, transmission line. thru MD-26 provide assembly detail and identify the
Typically the transmitter will operate continuously at location of all electrical parts. The mechanical
125 percent positive peak program modulation at drawings are presented in order of the reference
5500 watts. Remote control interfacing is a standard designation assigned to their assemblies. Refer to the
feature. list of drawings in table 10-1 to locate a specific
illustration.
FACTORY SUPPORT NOTE

1.2 Nautel provides after sales factory support. Some modules/assemblies may have an alpha suffix
Technical assistance is available on a 24 hour, seven on their designator (A, B, C, etc.). The suffix is
days a week basis. A factory service facility for assigned alphabetically and indicates the module
repair of modules/assemblies is also available. Refer contains minor component or circuit variations.
to the Factory Support portion of the Warranty Since a change that merits an alpha suffix change
pages at the front of this manual for additional will normally enhance the operation of the affected
information. module/assembly or compliment the operation of an
external circuit, it is not recommended that later
versions be interchanged with earlier versions. All
PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF MANUAL earlier versions can be replaced by later versions.
1.3 This Technical Instruction Manual
provides the information required to install, operate TECHNICAL SUMMARY
and maintain the transmitter. Detailed information 1.6 Table 1-1 - Technical Summary, contains a
for modules/assemblies, which are normally removed detailed technical summary.
from the transmitter for servicing, is not included.
Service Instruction Manual appendices provide SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
information for troubleshooting and maintaining 1.7 Table 1-3 lists the special tools required.
bench-repairable modules/assemblies used in the Table 1-2 - Test Equipment, lists the test equipment
transmitter. that is required to operate and maintain the AMPFET
ND5 transmitter.
1.3.1 FAMILY TREE: The family tree for this
transmitter is depicted in figure 7-1. It identifies the GLOSSARY OF TERMS
major assemblies and shows their hierarchical 1.8 Table 1-4 - Glossary of Terms, provides a
assembly relationship. It also identifies the reference list of all unique terms, abbreviations and acronyms
designation assigned to each assembly and where used in this publication.
their parts list is located.
Page 1-1
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 1-1 Technical Summary
Nautel Model Number ..................................................................................................................... AMPFET ND5
Configuration
(1) ...................................................................................................................... Four RF power modules
(2) ..................................................................................................... Active and Standby Exciter Circuits
RF Output Power
(1) .............................................................................................. Rated - 5000 watts (capable 5500 watts)
(2) ................................................................................................... Operating Range - 500 to 5500 watts
(3) .................................................................................... Three preset levels, selected locally or remotely
RF Frequency Range (supplied to one frequency as ordered) .................................................... 531kHz to 1710kHz
RF Terminating Impedance .................................................................................................... 50 ohms, unbalanced
RF Frequency Stability ................................................................................... 5Hz or 5ppm whichever is greater
RF Carrier Shift (100% Modulation) ..................................................................................................... 1%, or less
Type of Modulation
Standard ..................................................................................................................................... Monaural
Optional ................................................................................................................... C-QUAM AM Stereo
Audio Input Impedance

Monaural ..................................................................................................................... 600 ohms balanced
C-QUAM AM Stereo ................................................... Left and Right channels (Both 600 ohms balanced)
Audio Frequency Response

Monaural ....................................................................................... Within 1.0 dB from 30Hz to 10,000Hz
C-QUAM AM Stereo ..................................................................... Within 1.0 dB from 50Hz to 10,000Hz
Audio Input Level (Monaural) ..................................................................... 0dBm to +12dBm (+10dBm preferred)
Audio Input Level (C-QUAM AM Stereo)

Left Channel.......................................... +10dBm to produce 50% envelope modulation (Right channel off)
Right Channel.......................................... +10dBm to produce 50% envelope modulation (Left channel off)
Audio Frequency Distortion

Monaural .......................................................... Better than 0.8% (THD) at 95% modulation 30-10,000Hz
C-QUAM AM Stereo ....................... Less than 1.5% at 50% single channel modulation (50Hz - 10,000Hz)
Reduced antenna bandwidth may degrade specification
Audio Inter-modulation Distortion ....................................................................... 1.0% or less, 60/7000Hz 1:1 ratio
Modulation Capability
Monaural ................................................................................................... 125% positive peak modulation
C-QUAM AM Stereo (L+R Envelope) ........................................................ 125% positive peak modulation
Page 1-2
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 1-1 Technical Summary (Continued)
Incidental Phase Modulation (IPM)

Monaural ............................................................ Better than -36dB relative to 95% modulation at 1000Hz
C-QUAM AM Stereo .................................................. L-R modulation better than -36dB relative to 100%,
when L+R envelope modulation is 95% at 1000Hz
RF Harmonics/Spurious Outputs .......................................................................... -80dB or better relative to carrier

Meets or exceeds FCC, DOC and CCIR requirements,
when preceded by external NRSC compatible audio filtering
Noise and Hum (Unweighted)

Monaural ............................................................................... -60dB or better relative to 100% modulation
C-QUAM AM Stereo ................................................... -60dB or better relative to 100% (L+R) modulation
Metering
(1) ........................................................................................................... Forward/reflected output power
(2) ........................................................................... Total DC input current/voltage to RF power modules
Remote Control
(1) ......................................................................................................................... RF power stage on/off
(2) .................................................................................................... 1 of 3 preset RF output power levels
(3) ................................................................................................................................ External interlock
(4) .......................................................................................................................... RF output power trim
(5) ............................................................................................................ Instantaneous RF power off/on
(6) ........................................................................................................................... Exciter A/B selection
Remote Monitoring
(1) ............................................................................................................................ Forward power level
(2) ........................................................................................................................... Reflected power level
(3) .................................................................................. RF Monitor output (station modulation monitor)
(4) ........................................................................................................... RF power stage ON/OFF status
(5) .................................................................................................................. Local/remote control status
(6) ................................................................................................................................ Power level status
(7) ................................................................................................................................... Exciter B status
(8) .................................................................................................................................. RF Ready status
(9) ........................................................................................................................... RF Drive level alarm
(10) ..................................................................................................................................... High B- alarm
(11) .................................................................................................................................... High AC alarm
(12) .....................................................................................................................................Low AC alarm
(13) ........................................................................................................................RF Drive Tuning alarm
(14) .................................................................................................. SWR Shutback (RF power off) alarm
(15) ............................................................................................ SWR Cutback (RF power reduced) alarm
(16) ................................................................................................................................ RF Current alarm
(17) ........................................................................................................................... Interlock Open alarm
(18) ............................................................................................................. Frequency Monitor (RF drive)
Page 1-3
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 1-1 Technical Summary (Continued)
AC Power Source
(1) ............................................................................................... 120/208 volts, 3 phase 50/60Hz, 4-wire
Permissible AC Power Supply Variations

Voltage............................................................................................................................................. 10%
Frequency........................................................................................................................................... 5%
Power Consumption
0% modulation .............................................................................................................................. 6.65kW
100% modulation .......................................................................................................................... 10.0kW
Overall Efficiency ................................................................................................................................ 75% typical
Environmental Limits
Temperature (derate 3C per 500m/2C per 1000 ft above sea level) .................................. -10C to +50C
Relative Humidity.......................................................................................................................... 0 - 95%
Altitude ............................................................................................................ 0 - 13,000 feet (0 - 4000m)
Transmitter Dimensions
Height ....................................................................................................................... 73.5 inches (186 cm)
Width .......................................................................................................................... 24.0 inches (61 cm)
Depth .......................................................................................................................... 31.5 inches (80 cm)
Weight ............................................................................................................................ 670 pounds (305 kg)
NOTE: Technical specifications established at 5.0kW RF output power into a 50 ohm load.
Page 1-4
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Figure 1-1 AMPFET ND5 - 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter
Page 1-5
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 1-2 Test Equipment
NOMENCLATURE PART, MODEL, OR TYPE NUMBER APPLICATION

(EQUIVALENTS MAY BE USED)
Dummy Load 50 ohms, 10 000 Watts (minimum) 'off-air' testing

VSWR 1.1
Digital Multimeter 3 1/2 digit, AC and DC volts (10M ohms testing and maintenance
input), ohms and amps, 0.5% accuracy,
Beckman 3010
Frequency Counter 5ppm up to 10MHz measure carrier frequency

Fluke Model 1900A
Oscilloscope Tektronix Model T922 testing and maintenance
RF Drive Tuning Nautel P/N 165-1031-01 Used to tune RF drive shunt

Adapter inductor in RF power modules.
Modulation Monitor -100% to +125% to set up audio level

TFT Model 375
OR
Modulation Monitor 50-ohm input impedance to set up audio level

(AM Stereo) -100% to +125% modulation
Motorola Model 1410
Audio Signal Generator 10Hz to 10kHz, 600 ohms, simulates modulating audio input
0 to +12dBm during testing and maintenance
Hewlett Packard model 651B
Distortion Analyzer 20Hz to 20kHz measures audio distortion during

Marconi Model TF231 testing and maintenance
Function Generator sine, square and triangular waveform signal source for module
with dc offset
Hewlett Packard model 3310A
15VDC Power Supply 15 volts, 1 amp DC power source for module tests
24 VDC Power Supply 24 volts, 1 amp DC power source for module tests
100VDC Power Supply 0-100 volts, 0.5 amp DC power source for module tests
Page 1-6
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 1-3 Special Tools
NOMENCLATURE PART, MODEL, OR TYPE NUMBER APPLICATION

(EQUIVALENTS MAY BE USED)
Tuning Tool HAG38* Setting carrier frequency.

Adjust output levels.
Torque Wrench Capable of torquing to five inch-pounds Installing power MOSFETS

(0.665 Newton-Meters)
Contact Ejection Tool AMP P/N 305183 Remove pin/socket contacts

(Nautel P/N HAS39) from AMP style connectors.
* - Manufactured by, or available from, Nautel
Table 1-4 Glossary of Terms
TERM DESCRIPTION
AMPFET NAUTEL's nomenclature for this fully solid-state series of

broadcast transmitters.
Integral Modular Reserve (IMR) Identical modules operating in an overall system design such
that failure of individual modules results in a power reduction
only and not a complete system shutdown.
Modular Redundancy Identical modules operating in an overall system design such

that failure of one module does not affect the output of the
system.
PWM Pulse width modulation.
Power Level Cutback Cycle A cycle within the internal control of the system, which, when
activated, results in the modulator drive being reduced to
effectively zero until the fault has been removed following
which the level returns to normal.
Page 1-7
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 2
THEORY OF OPERATION
GENERAL 2.3.1.2 Output Power Meters: The reflected

2.1 The theory of operation for the subject power input (P10-10), from the fwd/refl power
transmitter is presented in this section. Unique probe, is passed thru the control interface PWB and
circuits are explained. applied to the REFLECTED POWER meter. The
Forward power input (P10-1), is applied to the
FORWARD POWER meter. Meter sensitivity is
TRANSMITTER DESCRIPTION increased by pressing READ LOWER SCALE switch
2.2 The transmitter operates at one fixed S2 and reading the lower scale when the forward
frequency between 531kHz and 1710kHz and power is less than 1750 watts. The forward power
provides up to 5500 watts of RF output power. The meter calibration PWB provides adjustment for the
transmitter may be operated locally where it and the FORWARD POWER meter readings.
studio are co-located or remotely when the
transmitter and studio are at different sites. For 2.3.2 CONTROL INTERFACE PWB: The
technical performance details, refer to table 1-1 - control interface PWB controls the RF drive,
Technical Summary. The transmitter comprises four modulator drive and RF power amplifier stages.
major functional blocks (see figure SD-1); AC/DC Refer to its service instruction manual for detailed
power stage, control/monitor function, exciter stage circuit information. Its primary functions are:
and RF power stage.
- Produces a DC voltage as the gain control
output that ultimately determines the forward
CONTROL/MONITOR FUNCTION power (RF carrier) level of the RF output. This
2.3 See figure SD-2. The control/monitor voltage is used as the reference voltage for a
function comprises the control/monitor panel, control variable pulse width modulation (PWM)
interface PWB and remote interface PWB. generator.
2.3.1 CONTROL/MONITOR PANEL: The - Monitors critical parameters and causes the
control/monitor panel provides local controls and gain control voltage to be turned off (shutback)
analog meters to display RF power and critical DC or reduced (cutback) when defined fault
voltage and current levels. It contains two printed threshold limits are exceeded
wiring boards; the control interface PWB and the
forward power meter calibration PWB. The control - Identifies the out-of-tolerance parameter, when
interface PWB is mounted on the rear of the panel. the carrier level is shutback/cutback by
Its routinely monitored indicators and switches providing a visual indication for local
protrude through and are accessible/viewed from the monitoring or an electrical status output for
front of the panel. The control/monitor panel also remote monitoring.
contains the local/remote CONTROL switch, which
determines if control of the transmitter is local; using - Selects which exciter (A or B) will provide the
integral switches in the transmitter, or from a remote RF drive and variable pulse width modulator
location. drive to the RF power stage.
2.3.1.1 DC Supply Meters: The current (+) (P10- - Determines the on/off status of the RF power
7) and current (-) (P10-8) inputs are provided from stage.
taps of a precision current shunt resistor in the
AC/DC power supply, and applied to the DC SUPPLY
CURRENT meter. The B-VDC (A) input (P10-12)
from the low voltage power supply, is applied to the
DC SUPPLY VOLTS meter.
Page 2-1
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.3.2.1 Supply Voltage Monitor: The 24 VDC ref resume. The high B-VDC alarm output will return to
input (P3-3) is an unregulated DC voltage which is an open collector but the HIGH B- ALARM lamp will
directly proportional to the AC power source voltage. remain on as a historical maintenance aid. It will
It is compared to adjustable fault thresholds that remain on until the ALARM RESET switch is activated
provide an operating range window (normally plus or or until an exciter change is initiated.
minus ten percent). If the voltage is not maintained 2.3.2.3 RF Drive Level Monitor: The RF drive
within this window, the gain control output will be level input (P3-10) is a DC voltage that is
clamped to 0.0 VDC and a 15.0 VDC shutback representative of the amplitude of the RF drive being
output (P4-1) will be applied to the exciter drawer to applied to the RF power amplifiers. When the RF
inhibit the modulator drive. The transmitter's RF drive level input falls below 36.0 VDC, the gain
output will be instantly shutback (turned off) and it control output will be clamped to 0.0 VDC and a
will remain shutback until the AC power source 15.0 VDC shutback output (P4-1) will be applied to
voltage is restored to a voltage within the operating the exciter drawer to inhibit the modulator drive. The
window. transmitter's RF output will be instantly shutback
2.3.2.1.1 When the 24 VDC ref input falls to the low (turned off). The LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp will
AC threshold, the LOW AC PWR ALARM lamp will turn on and a 15 VDC low RF drive alarm (P3-5)
turn on and a 15 VDC low AC alarm (P3-8) output output will be applied to the remote interface PWB
will be applied to the remote interface PWB for for external monitoring. When the RF drive is
external monitoring. When normal operation is restored, normal operation will resume. The low RF
resumed, the low AC alarm output will return to an drive alarm output will return to an open collector
open collector but the LOW AC PWR ALARM lamp but the LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp will remain on
will remain on as a historical maintenance aid. It will as a historical maintenance aid. It will remain on
remain on until the ALARM RESET switch is activated until the ALARM RESET switch is activated or until
or until an exciter change is initiated. an exciter change is initiated.
2.3.2.4 Reflected Power Monitor: The reflected
2.3.2.1.2 When the 24 VDC ref input exceeds the power input (P6) is a DC voltage which is
high AC threshold, the HIGH AC PWR ALARM lamp proportional to the reflected power sensed at the
will turn on and a 15 VDC high AC alarm (P3-7) transmitter's output. When the reflected power
output will be applied to the remote interface PWB exceeds a nominal 800 watts, the reflected power
for external monitoring. When normal operation is input will be more than 5.3 VDC and it will exceed
resumed, the high AC alarm output will return to an the high SWR fault threshold. The gain control
open collector but the HIGH AC PWR ALARM lamp output will be clamped to 0.0 VDC and a 15.0 VDC
will remain on as a historical maintenance aid. It will shutback output (P4-1) will be applied to the exciter
remain on until the ALARM RESET switch is activated drawer to inhibit the modulator drive. A clock pulse
or until an exciter change is initiated. (maximum of one per second) will also be applied to
an alarm count/cutback circuit. The RF output will
2.3.2.2 B- VDC Monitor: The B- VDC input (P3- be instantly shutback (turned off). The SWR
9) is representative of the negative DC voltage that is SHUTBACK ALARM lamp will turn on and a 15 VDC
applied to the RF power amplifiers as their high SWR shutback alarm (P3-4) output will be applied to
current voltage source. When it goes more negative remote interface PWB for external monitoring.
than -85.0 VDC, the gain control output will be
clamped to 0.0 VDC and a 15.0 VDC shutback 2.3.2.4.1 Turning off the RF output will result in the
output (P4-1) will be applied to the exciter drawer to reflected power input being reduced to 0.0 VDC.
inhibit the modulator drive. The transmitter's RF The gain control output will be restored to its pre-
output will be instantly shutback (turned off). The shutback level, the shutback output will return to an
HIGH B- ALARM lamp will turn on and a 15 VDC
open collector and the RF output will be restored at
high B-VDC alarm (P3-6) output will be applied to an exponential rate over a 250 millisecond period. If
the remote interface PWB for external monitoring. the high SWR fault threshold is exceeded before the
When the B- DC voltage is restored to a level that is preset power level is reached, the shutback cycle will
less negative than -85 VDC, normal operation will be repeated.
Page 2-2
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.3.2.4.2 If four or more shutback cycle clock pulses restored at an exponential rate over a 250 millisecond
are applied within any 20 second period, the SWR period. If the high RF current fault threshold is
CUTBACK ALARM lamp will turn on and a 15 VDC exceeded before the preset power level is reached, the
cutback alarm (P4-10) output will be applied to the shutback cycle will be repeated. If more than three
remote interface PWB for external monitoring. The shutback cycles are initiated in any twenty second
gain control output will be cutback (reduced) by one period, the alarm count/cutback circuit will affect the
increment (approx 10%) for each count in excess of RF output as described in paragraph 2.3.2.4.2.
three until the carrier level is cutback (reduced) to a
level that results in an acceptable reflected power. 2.3.2.5.2 When the RF current sample input returns
The alarm count/cutback counter will automatically to a level that is less than the high RF current fault
reset 20 seconds after the first clock count, provided threshold, the high RF current alarm output will
a count of nine has not been attained. When it is return to an open collector but the HIGH RF
reset, the SWR cutback alarm output will return to an CURRENT ALARM lamp will remain on as a historical
open collector but the SWR CUTBACK ALARM lamp maintenance aid. It will remain on until the ALARM
will remain on as a historical maintenance aid. At the RESET switch is activated or until an exciter change
ninth clock pulse, the gain control output will be is initiated.
clamped to 0.0 VDC and a 15.0 VDC shutback 2.3.2.6 RF Drive Control: An RF drive control
output will be applied to the exciter drawer to inhibit circuit provides a 24 VDC RF drive enable (A or B)
the modulator drive. The RF output will be shutback output to turn on the appropriate RF drive amplifier
(turned off) until the counter is reset by the in the exciter stage and a 24 VDC relay control (A or
application of an alarm reset command (locally or B) output to enable a relay that routes the RF drive
remotely) or until an exciter change is initiated. from the exciter stage's active exciter to the RF
power stage.
2.3.2.4.3 When the reflected power input returns to
or is maintained at a level which is less than the high 2.3.2.6.1 The application of an open collector RF
reflected power fault threshold, the SWR shutback inhibit input (P2-2), a positive voltage tune alarm
alarm output will return to an open collector but the input (P1-2), the presence of a high B-VDC alarm or
SWR SHUTBACK ALARM lamp will remain on as a an exciter change will cause the RF drive enable
historical maintenance aid. It will remain on until the output to change to an open collector, turn off the RF
ALARM RESET switch is activated or until an exciter drive amplifier and inhibit its RF drive output.
change is initiated. 2.3.2.6.2 If the RF drive was turned off because of a
2.3.2.5 RF Current Monitor: The RF current positive voltage tune alarm input, the RF drive will
sample input (P7) is an RF voltage that is be inhibited, the RF DRIVE DETUNE ALARM lamp will
proportional to the total RF current being applied to turn on and a 15 VDC detuned RF drive (P4-11)
the RF output filter by the RF power amplifiers. output will be applied to the remote interface PWB
When it exceeds a high RF current fault threshold, for external monitoring. The RF drive will be
the gain control output will be clamped to 0.0 VDC inhibited, the RF DRIVE DETUNE ALARM lamp will
and a 15.0 VDC shutback output (P4-1) is applied to remain on and the detuned RF drive output (P4-11)
the exciter drawer to inhibit the modulator drive. A will be 15 VDC until the RF drive control circuit is
clock pulse will also be applied to the alarm manually reset by actuating the RF TUNING RESET
count/cutback circuit. The RF output will be switch on the control interface PWB.
instantly shutback (turned off). The HIGH RF
CURRENT ALARM lamp will turn on and a 15 VDC - An open collector RF inhibit signal is produced
high RF current alarm (P3-1) output will be applied by the exciter drawer's active RF drive PWB
to the remote interface PWB for external monitoring. when its output is inadequate.
2.3.2.5.1 Turning off the RF output will result in the - A positive voltage in excess of 1.0 VDC is
RF current sample input being reduced to 0.0 VDC. produced as the tune alarm signal, by the
The gain control output will be restored to its pre- exciter stage's active RF drive amplifier when
shutback level, the shutback output will return to an its output impedance is not correct.
open collector and the transmitter's RF output will be
Page 2-3
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.3.2.7 RF On/RF Off Select: A bistable relay 2.3.2.8.3 When the relay is latched in its 'B' state,
(K1) controls distribution of the AC/DC power the EXCITER B lamp will be on. A 24 VDC RF drive
supply's unregulated 24 VDC. When the relay is enable (B) output (P2-5) will be applied to the
latched in its 'on' state, the RF ON lamp will be turned exciter stage's 'B' RF drive amplifier and turn it on.
on and 24 VDC will be applied thru P5-1 to the A 24 VDC relay control (B) output (P1-8) will be
interlock circuit as the 24 VDC (RF on) output. applied to the exciter stage as the energizing voltage
When the relay is latched 'off', the RF ON lamp will for a relay that connects the output of the 'B' RF
be off and the 24 VDC (RF on) output will be an drive amplifier to the RF drive tuning/splitter circuit.
open circuit (0.0 VDC). The control source for the A 24 VDC exciter 'B' select output (P1-9) will be
relay's 'on' state is dependent on the control/ monitor applied to the remote interface PWB and exciter
panel's CONTROL switch setting. Its 'off' state can be stage. A relay in the exciter drawer will energize and
selected locally or remotely when the CONTROL enable exciter 'B' as the active exciter. The exciter B
switch is set to REMOTE. status output (TB2-2 of remote interface PWB) will
be a current sink to ground.
2.3.2.8 Exciter A/B Select: A bistable relay (K2)
determines which exciter (A/B) is the active exciter. 2.3.2.9 Automatic Exciter Changeover: The user
can enable an automatic exciter changeover circuit by
2.3.2.8.1 The appropriate 24 VDC RF drive enable placing the control interface PWB's MAIN EXCITER
output (A) (P1-1) or (B) (P2-5) will only be applied SELECT switch to the A/B selection that corresponds
to the exciter stage if the following conditions are to the active (main) exciter. If a low RF drive is
'true'. If they are not true, the RF drive enable detected, the changeover circuit will automatically
outputs will be an open collector. select the reserve (standby) exciter.
- the RF drive tuning is satisfactory and a 2.3.2.10 Preset Power Level Select: Two bistable
detuned RF drive alarm is not present. relays (K3/K4), that have their contacts connected as
binary counters, determine which one of four preset
- a current-sink-to-ground RF inhibit (P2-2) power levels are selected.
command is not being applied.
2.3.2.10.1 The resultant binary number causes:
- the B- voltage is not more negative than -85
VDC and a high B- VDC alarm condition is not - one of four voltages to be selected as the source
present. voltage for the gain control (P1-10) output.
- an exciter change is not in progress. - the OUTPUT POWER lamp (HIGH, LOW 1,
LOW 2 or AUTO) that is associated with the
2.3.2.8.2 When the relay is latched in its 'A' state, the selected voltage source to turn on.
EXCITER A lamp will be on. A 24 VDC RF drive
enable (A) output (P1-1) will be applied to the - 15 VDC to be applied to the appropriate power
exciter stage's 'A' RF drive amplifier and turn it on. status [high (P2-1), low 1 (P2-4), (low 2 (P2-8)
A 24 VDC relay control (A) output (P1-7) will be or auto (P2-9)] output for remote monitoring.
applied to the exciter stage as the control voltage for
relays that select exciter A's RF drive source (see 2.3.2.10.2 The voltage sources for the High, Low 1
paragraph 2.4.1). The exciter 'B' select output (P1- and Low 2 selections are provided by precisely
9) to the exciter stage and the remote interface PWB adjusted voltage dividers on the control interface
will be an open circuit. Exciter 'A', which is the PWB. The voltage source for the auto selection is
default selection, will be enabled as the active exciter provided by an optional power level controller. An
and the exciter B status output (TB2-2 of remote optional power level controller can not be used,
interface PWB will be an open collector. therefore auto power cannot be selected if the
optional C-QUAM AM stereo PWB is installed as
the RF drive source for the 'A' exciter.
Page 2-4
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.3.2.10.3 The status of the bistable relays also 2.3.4 REMOTE INTERFACE PWB: The
determines which one of three preset impedances remote interface PWB contains the customer
(High, Low 1 or Low 2) is inserted between the RF interface terminal blocks for transmitter remote
volts sample input (P8) and the RF monitor output control and remote alarm/status monitoring. Radio
(P9). This impedance is preset (adjusted) during frequency interference (RFI) filtering is provided on
testing to apply a fixed RF voltage (normally 3.0 all input/output lines to ensure transmitter operation
VAC) as the RF monitor output regardless of which is not interrupted due to RF pick-up on control lines.
preset power level is selected. The current sinks for remote monitoring are also
provided on the remote interface PWB. Refer to the
2.3.2.11 RF Power Level Trim: The power remote interface PWB service instruction manual for
increase (P1-4) and power decrease (P1-3) inputs detailed information.
control a sixteen bit binary up/down counter that
causes the voltage of the gain control output (P1-10)
to change approximately 0.15 VDC at each count EXCITER STAGE (see figure SD-3A/B)
change. The counter is preset to a count of eight 2.4 The exciter stage provides the RF drive
when the RF power stage is turned on. This value is (c) and the variable pulse width mod drive (pwm)
used when setting the preset forward power levels. for the RF power stage. It is controlled by
Any count change will increase or decrease this commands from the control/monitor function, the
preset level and will cause the RF power level to AC/DC power stage and the RF power stage. It also
increase or decrease proportionally. contains monitoring circuits that provide control
signals for protection circuits in the control/ monitor
2.3.2.12 Battery Backup for Local Alarm Latches: function. They include an RF inhibit which is
A 9 volt battery provides backup power for the high present when there is no RF drive, a tune alarm
B-VDC, high AC, low AC, low RF drive, SWR which is present when the output of the RF drive
shutback, SWR cutback and high RF current alarm amplifier is mistuned and an RF drive level which is
latching circuits. In the event of a power failure, the a DC voltage that is proportional to the peak-to- peak
battery voltage will ensure any alarm that was amplitude of the RF drive being applied to the RF
latched, prior to the failure, will still be latched when power stage.
power is restored. The local ALARM lamps will not
be on during a failure since the battery does not 2.4.1 MONAURAL/THIRD PARTY AM
provide backup power for them. STEREO (see figure SD-3A) An exciter stage
which is configured for monaural or third party AM
2.3.3 SAFETY INTERLOCK: The 24 VDC stereo operation has an exciter drawer (A6), two RF
(RF on) output at P5-1, is applied through the remote drive amplifiers (A12A2/A12A3), one B-VDC
interface PWB, through the normally closed external switching power supply (A12A1) and an RF drive
interlock switches, through the remote interface PWB tuning PWB (A12A4). It does not contain the
(P14-9); where it emerges as the 24 VDC (RF optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB (A8A3).
enable) output. If the external interlock switches are Duplicated modules are interconnected (in
all closed, 24 VDC will be applied to the control conjunction with duplicated modules in the exciter
interface PWB (P5-3) and to the AC/DC power drawer) to form 'A' and 'B' exciters. Either one may
supply. If any external interlock switch is open, the be selected as the main exciter. The 600 ohm
24 VDC (RF enable) output will be an open circuit balanced audio from the control/monitor function
and 24 VDC will not be applied to the control will be applied to the 'A' and 'B' exciters thru relay
interface PWB (P5-3) or to the AC/DC power K1 of the interface panel. This relay will always be
supply. The INTERLOCK OPEN ALARM lamp will be de-energized, regardless of the relay control (A)
on and 24 VDC will be applied to the remote input status, since one input to its coil (P35-3) is an
interface PWB as the interlock open alarm (P5-4) open circuit (not connected).
output.
Page 2-5
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.4.1.1 Exciter Drawer (Monaural) (see figure

SD-6): Monaural or third party AM stereo exciter 2.4.2.1 Exciter Drawer (AM Stereo) (see figure
drawers have two RF drive PWBs (A3/A4), two SD-6): C-QUAM AM stereo exciter drawers have
modulator driver PWBs that accept 2c/N inputs one RF drive PWB (A4), one modulator driver PWB
(A5/A6) and two DC power supplies (A1/A2). that has an integral PWM oscillator (A5), one
Duplicated modules are interconnected to form 'A' modulator driver PWB that accepts a 2c/N input
and 'B' exciters. The status of relays K1, K2 and K3 (A6) and two DC power supplies (A1/A2).
determine which exciter is enabled (active). 2c/N Duplicated modules are interconnected to form 'A'
for both modulator driver PWB's is supplied by their and 'B' exciters. The status of relays K1, K2 and K3
associated RF drive PWB. determine which exciter is enabled (active). The
2.4.1.1.1 When the exciter select input is an open frequency of exciter A's pulse width modulation
circuit, K1 will be de-energized, the 'A' power supply (PWM) is derived from the output of an integral
will be turned on and if applicable, the external RF oscillator (2PWM) on its modulator driver PWB. The
drive will be applied to the 'A' RF drive PWB. Since frequency of exciter B's pulse width modulation
the 'B' exciter's power supply is not turned on, there (PWM) is derived from the 2c/N signal being applied
will not be any 24 VDC(B) and relays K2 and K3 to its modulator driver PWB, from its associated RF
will be de-energized. Exciter 'A' will be enabled drive PWB.
(active).
2.4.2.1.1 When the exciter select input is an open
2.4.1.1.2 When the exciter select input is 24 VDC, circuit, K1 will be de-energized and the 'A' power
K1 will be energized and the 'B' power supply will be supply will be turned on. Since the 'B' power supply
on. If applicable the external RF drive will be applied is off, there will not be any 24 VDC(B) and relays
to the 'B' RF drive PWB. The 'B' power supply's 24 K2/K3 will be de-energized. Exciter 'A' will be
VDC(B) output will energize relays K2 and K3 and enabled (active).
exciter 'B' will be enabled (active).
2.4.2 C-QUAM AM STEREO (see figure SD- 2.4.2.1.2 When the exciter select input is 24 VDC,
3B): An exciter stage configured for C-QUAM AM K1 will be energized and the 'B' power supply will be
stereo operation when exciter 'A' is selected; has an turned on. If applicable the external RF drive will be
exciter drawer (A6), one C-QUAM AM stereo applied to the 'B' RF drive PWB. The 'B' power
exciter PWB (A8A3), two RF drive amplifiers supply's 24 VDC(B) output will energize relays K2
(A12A2/A12A3), one B-VDC switching power and K3 and the 'B' exciter will be enabled (active).
supply (A12A1) and an RF drive tuning PWB
(A12A4). Duplicated modules are interconnected (in 2.4.3 SINGLE EXCITER (see figure SD-3):
conjunction with duplicated modules in the exciter An exciter stage configured for single exciter
drawer) to form 'A' and 'B' exciters. The C-QUAM operation has an exciter drawer (A6), one RF drive
AM stereo exciter PWB is the RF drive source for amplifier (A12A2), one B-VDC switching power
exciter 'A' and the exciter drawer's RF drive PWB is supply (A12A1) and an RF drive tuning PWB
the RF drive source for exciter 'B'. Either one may (A12A4). It does not contain the optional C-QUAM
be selected as the main exciter. The audio for the AM stereo exciter PWB (A8A3). The modules
active exciter is selected by the state of relay K1 on (including the modules in the exciter drawer) are
the interface panel. When the 'A' exciter is active, K1 interconnected to form a single exciter which is
will be energized by the application of a 24 VDC identified as the 'A' exciter. The exciter select input
relay control (A) input. The low impedance, must be an open circuit, indicating exciter 'B' has not
unbalanced, L+R audio output of the C-QUAM AM been selected, for the 'A' exciter to be enabled
stereo exciter PWB will be exciter A's modulating (active).
audio input. When the 'B' exciter is active, K1 will
be de-energized [the relay control (A) input will be
an open circuit] and the 600 ohm balanced audio
from the control/monitor function will be exciter B's
modulating audio input.
Page 2-6
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.4.3.1 Exciter Drawer (Single Exciter) (see altered to compensate for B-VDC changes of up to
figure SD-6): Exciter drawers for a single exciter, 10%, and then applied to the variable pulse width
have one RF drive PWB (A3), one modulator driver generator.
PWB that accepts a 2c/N input (A5) and one DC
power supply (A1). The status of relays K1, K2 and 2.4.5.3.3 When a balanced audio is applied to J2-
K3 determine if the exciter is enabled (active). K1 6/7/8, common noise is cancelled by a common mode
must be de-energized (open circuit as exciter select balance circuit (any noise present on an unbalanced
input) for the DC power supply to be turned on and if audio input will be passed). A portion of the audio,
applicable, the external RF drive to be applied to the determined by the setting of a GAIN control
RF drive PWB. Since there is no 'B' exciter, there potentiometer, is processed by a low pass filter (one
will not be any 24 VDC(B). Relays K2 and K3 will of four high frequency roll-off points can be selected)
always be de-energized. and applied to the carrier level control circuit for
summing with (superimposing on) the gain control
2.4.4 EXCITER POWER SUPPLY (see figure input.
SD-6): The exciter power supply converts the 24
VDC (RF on) (TB1-2) and B- VDC (exciter) (TB1-4) 2.4.5.3.4 The positive half cycles of the modulating
power supply voltages to the 15 VDC (TB2-3) and - audio may be limited by a protection circuit that
15 VDC (TB2-1) outputs respectively. Refer to the monitors the RF current sample applied to J2-3. The
exciter power supply service instruction manual for RF current sample, which is a sample of the RF
detailed information. current being applied to the RF output filter by the
RF power amplifiers, is monitored for duration
2.4.5 MODULATOR DRIVER PWB (see (frequency) and amplitude of the modulation peaks.
figure SD-6): There are two modulator driver PWB When the modulation envelope's duration/ peak
variations. approaches the stress current limit of the RF power
amplifier, the audio is inhibited for the remaining
2.4.5.1 /01 Variations: /01 variations derive their
portion of offending positive half-cycles.
pulse width modulation frequency (PWM) from a
2c/N input (provided by an associated RF drive
2.4.5.3.5 The gain of the carrier level control circuit
PWB). Their PWM dividers are user set to divide by
is controlled by the amplitude of the B-VDC sample
four when c is 1280kHz and higher or to divide by
applied to J1-3. The amplitude of the carrier level
two when c is less than 1280kHz.
control's output, which is the amplified gain control
2.4.5.2 /02 Variations: /02 variations derive their reference voltage with superimposed audio, will
pulse width modulation frequency (PWM) from a inversely follow changes in amplitude of the B-VDC
2PWM oscillator PWB. Their PWM dividers are sample. The forward power level and the modulation
factory set to divide by two and the oscillator percentage will be maintained at the preset level with
frequency is adjusted for the required PWM. B-VDC changes of up to 10%.
2.4.5.3.6 The mod drive output (output of the
2.4.5.3 Both Variations: The remaining circuits of variable pulse width generator) is a rectangular
both variations are identical.
waveform at the PWM repetition rate. Its on/off time
2.4.5.3.1 The PWM output of the PWM divider is is determined by the amplitude of the carrier level
converted to a sawtooth waveform, at the PWM reference voltage (output of the carrier level control
repetition rate, by an integrator and applied to a circuit). When there is no modulating audio, and the
variable pulse width generator. gain control reference voltage represents the rated RF
power level of the transmitter, the on/off ratio will be
2.4.5.3.2 The gain control input (at J1-1) is an 40/60. The on ratio will follow changes in the carrier
adjustable DC voltage which ultimately determines level reference voltage's amplitude when modulating
the forward power level of the transmitter's RF audio is present. It will increase during positive half
output (see paragraph 2.3.2.10.1). It is applied to a cycles (modulation envelope peaks) and it will
carrier level control circuit where it is summed with decrease during negative half cycles (modulation
the low-pass filtered modulating audio, amplitude envelope valleys).
Page 2-7
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.4.5.3.7 A protection circuit, within the variable 2.4.6.2 The RF drive may be a conventional
pulse width generator's circuit, monitors its output. (monaural) unmodulated carrier or it may be a phase
When pulses are not present, indicating a failure has modulated (AM stereo) carrier that contains the L-R
occurred, the protection circuit removes the DC audio and pilot frequency information. Its frequency
return from the mod drive relay's coil. The mod drive is the assigned carrier frequency (c), which is a
relay, which is connect as a fail-safe device, will de- derivative of an integral crystal oscillator that
energize and open circuit the mod drive output. operates at four times the carrier frequency (4c).
Adjustment/element selections provide the delays,
2.4.5.3.8 The shutback input at J1-5 will normally be symmetry and balancing required for optimum AM
an open collector and will have no influence on the stereo performance. The PA volts input (sample of
mod drive output. When it switches to 15 VDC (the the B-VDC, complete with modulating audio), being
protection circuits of the control/monitor function applied to the final amplifiers; is used by the
have detected an RF related malfunction that could compensation circuits to minimize incidental phase
over stress the RF power amplifiers) the variable modulation introduced by the RF power amplifier
pulse width generator will be instantly disabled and stages.
its output will be clamped to ground (no RF output). Refer to C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's service
Since it is no longer producing pulses, its protection instruction manual for detailed information.
circuit will de-energize the mod drive relay and the
mod drive output will be an open circuit. 2.4.7 RF DRIVE PWB (see figure SD-6): The
RF drive PWB produces an internally generated RF
2.4.5.3.9 The mod drive enable input at J1-7 drive for the transmitter or accepts an externally
provides the energizing voltage for the mod drive generated RF drive. Incidental phase modulation
relay, which is connected as a fail-safe device (de- (IPM) adjustment and a programmable 2c/N divider
energized when mod drive output is to be inhibited). are also contained within the RF drive's circuits. The
When the mod drive output is to be enabled, the mod PA volts input (J1-7) is monitored by the IPM
drive enable input will be 15 VDC and the mod drive correction circuit, which compensates for any
relay will be energized (provided the variable pulse incidental phase modulation caused by the RF power
width generator's protection circuit has not disabled stages. The RF drive output (J1-2), when present, is
the relay by removing its DC return). The variable a 15.0 VDC peak-to-peak square wave at the carrier
pulse width modulation mod drive output is be
frequency (c). When the RF drive output is present,
applied to J1-9.
the RF inhibit output will be a current sink to ground.
When no RF drive output is present, the RF inhibit
2.4.6 C-QUAM AM STEREO EXCITER output will be an open collector. The N divider
PWB (see figure SD-3): When a C-QUAM AM circuit accepts an RF signal at twice the carrier
stereo exciter PWB is installed, it is the low level RF
frequency (2c) and generates a zero to 15.0 VDC
drive source for exciter A. It produces a low
2c/N output (J2). Refer to the RF drive PWB
impedance unbalanced L+R audio as the amplitude
service instruction manual for detailed information.
modulating audio source for exciter A's modulator
driver. It also produces an RF inhibit output which
2.4.8 RF DRIVE AMPLIFIER (see figure SD-
ultimately controls the on/off state of the active RF
3): The RF drive amplifier buffers the RF drive
drive amplifier. The RF inhibit output is a current
signal and provides an amplified RF drive for the RF
sink to ground when the RF drive level is satisfactory
power modules. The amplitude of the RF drive,
or an open collector when it is not.
which is determined by the output voltage of the B-
VDC switching power supply, is adjusted to
2.4.6.1 The balanced left and right stereo audio
compensate for losses in the RF drive cabling.
inputs are processed to provide left plus right (L+R)
Monitoring circuits generate a tune alarm, nominally
audio information and left minus right (L-R) audio
1.0 VDC, when the RF drive is being operated into a
information. An unbalanced L+R audio is applied to
load that is not properly tuned Refer to the RF drive
exciter A's modulator driver as its amplitude
amplifier service instruction manual for detailed
modulation audio input.
information.
Page 2-8
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.4.9 B-VDC SWITCHING POWER (S1) is turned off, the B-VDC input on the contacts of
SUPPLY (see figure SD-3): The B- VDC switching relay K1 will be inhibited. Relay control's associated
power supply provides an adjustable, regulated B- field effect transistors Q3 and Q4 will be turned on.
VDC for both RF drive amplifiers. Its B-VDC ADJ Transistor Q3 clamps the mod drive (A) output to
potentiometer is adjusted to set its regulated B- VDC ground and transistor Q4 applies a ground on the RF
output to the level that will result in an 84.0 volt, relay control (A) output. When relay control's
peak-to-peak RF drive voltage being applied to the associated RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch
RF power modules. Refer to the B- VDC switching (S1) is turned on, the B-VDC (A) output will be
power supply service instruction manual for detailed applied to its associated RF power module. The
information. associated RF power module's charging capacitors
will begin charging, thru resistor R1 and thermistor
2.4.10 RF DRIVE TUNING/SPLITTING (see RT1, towards the B-VDC level. When the voltage at
figure SD-3): The RF drive tuning and splitting J2-3 reaches a nominal -65.0 VDC, transistor A1Q2
circuit consists of RF TUNE inductor A12L1 the will turn on, cause A1Q1 to turn on and energize
series tuning components on the RF drive tuning relay K1. The high current B-VDC input is then
PWB. The RF drive output of the active RF drive applied to the associated RF power module's charging
amplifier is passed through a series tuned circuit and capacitor to complete the charge and maintain the B-
applied to a 2:1 auto transformer. The resultant sine VDC level. At the same time A1Q3 and A1Q4 will
wave signal is then applied to the RF power modules turn off and remove the inhibiting ground from the
in the RF power stage, as their RF drive. A peak mod drive (A) and RF relay control (A) outputs.
detector provides a positive DC voltage as the RF
drive level output. It is applied to a protection circuit 2.5.2 RF POWER MODULES (see figure SD-
on the control interface PWB. The RF drive level 4): RF power modules A2 thru A5 each provide up
output is adjusted to be 39 VDC when the RF drive to 1375 watts RF carrier power. The outputs of the
is 84 volts peak-to-peak. When the RF drive level RF power modules are applied to the RF output filter
falls below 36 VDC, an RF shutback command is where they are combined and filtered to produce the
generated. The RF output is instantly turned off and transmitter's RF output. Refer to RF power module
local/remote alarms are turned on (refer to paragraph service instruction manual for detailed information.
2.3.2.3). 2.5.3 RF OUTPUT FILTER (see figure SD-8):
The RF output filter combines the RF power module
outputs, removes the unwanted harmonics, and
RF POWER STAGE provides the transmitter's final RF output. The RF
2.5 See figure SD-4. The RF power stage output filter contains current and voltage probes to
comprises the relay control panel, four RF power monitor the critical parameters in the filter.
modules, the RF output filter and four relays. When
a ground is applied on an RF relay control output (A 2.5.3.1 RF Current Probe (see figure SD-8):
thru D), the associated relay (A10K1, A10K2, The RF current probe monitors the RF current
A11K1, A11K2) is energized and the appropriate RF applied to the RF output filter by four RF power
signal is clamped to ground. modules and produces an RF voltage which is
proportional to the applied RF current. The output is
2.5.1 RELAY CONTROL PANEL (see figure paralleled and applied to J5/J6 as RF current sample
SD-7): The relay control panel contains identical outputs. The RF current sample (A) output is
relay control printed wiring board. Each relay applied to modulator driver PWB's mod level
control circuit will either inhibit or apply the mod detector/comparator circuit. The RF current sample
drive and B-VDC operating voltage to its associated (B) output is applied to control interface PWB's high
RF power module. RF current detector circuit. This circuit produces a
2.5.1.1 Relay Control: When the transmitter is high RF current alarm and causes the transmitter's
turned on, the 24 VDC (RF On) input will be applied RF output to be shutback (turned off) when the RF
to the relay control PWB. When relay control's current exceeds a threshold that represents the
associated RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch maximum stress current the RF power modules.
Page 2-9
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2.5.3.2 Forward/Reflected Power Probe (see 2.6.1 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY (see figure
figure SD-8): A voltage, representing the current SD-5): The 3-phase AC power source is applied to
level of the RF output is coupled to the centre-tapped the primary windings of step-down power
secondary winding of the forward/reflected power transformer T1 thru circuit breaker A7CB1. Primary
probe's current transformer (T1). A voltage winding taps accommodate variations in the mean
representing the RF output's voltage level, is applied level of the AC voltage. The 55 volts AC phase-to-
to the centre tap from the RF voltage probe. When phase output on the secondary windings is rectified,
the transmitter is terminated into a 50 ohm resistive filtered and applied to the B-VDC (Ref A) and B-VDC
load, the voltages (current and voltage) across one (F) outputs (nominally -72.0 volts DC). It is also
half of T1's secondary winding will be in phase and applied to low voltage power supply A12. A
of equal amplitude. The voltages across the other separate output on the secondary winding, a centre-
half of T1's secondary winding will be of equal tapped 36 VAC (18.0-0-18.0) output is also applied
amplitude but they will be 180 degrees out-of-phase. to low voltage power supply A12.
The in-phase voltages are summed and half-wave
rectified by CR3. The RF component of the resultant 2.6.1.1 Low Voltage Power Supply: The low
DC voltage is filtered by L1/C1/L3 and a DC voltage voltage AC phase-to-phase input is applied to U1,
that is proportional to the RF output level is applied where it is rectified, filtered and applied to the 24
to J2 as the forward power output. The out-of-phase VDC (Unswitched) output. It is also applied to the
voltages are summed and half-wave rectified by CR1. 24 VDC (RF On) outputs through the contacts of
The RF component of any resultant DC voltage is relay K1. When 24 VDC is applied to the 24 VDC
filtered by L2/C2/L4 and a DC voltage that is (RF Enable) input (Rf On), K1 energizes and the 24
proportional to the reflected power level is applied to VDC (RF On) and 24 VDC (Power Modules) outputs
J3 as the reflected power output. are applied to their destinations. An unfiltered +24
VDC is applied thru rectifier diodes CR1 thru CR6,
2.5.3.3 RF Voltage Probe (see figure SD-8): The and applied to the 24 VDC (Ref) output which is
voltage probe is a capacitive voltage divider which is applied to control interface PWB A1A1.
precisely tuned to provide an RF voltage, for
application to the forward/reflected power probe, that 2.6.1.2 Current shunt resistor R2 provides a DC
is 1/31 of the RF output voltage. It also provides an voltage, as the current (+) and current (-) outputs,
RF voltage sample at J1 which is ultimately used for which represents the total current being drawn by the
monitoring purposes by the station modulation RF power modules. These outputs are applied to
monitor. IMPD ADJ inductor L1 is adjusted to control/monitor panel A1.
provide low impedance for the voltage probe outputs.
RATIO ADJ capacitor C2 is adjusted to provide 2.6.1.3 Inductor L1, in conjunction with the
precisely 1/31 of the RF output voltage. storage capacitors in RF power modules, smooths
and filters the 120Hz ripple on the B-VDC outputs.
AC/DC POWER STAGE

2.6 See figures SD-5. The AC/DC power stage
converts the 3-phase AC power source voltage to the
negative DC voltage (B- VDC) required by the
transmitter's RF power amplifier stage. The AC/DC
power stage also provides the unregulated +24 VDC
required by the transmitter's RF drive/mod drive and
control circuitry.
Page 2-10
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION FOR USE
PLANNING AND SITE PREPARATION NOTE

3.1 Transmitter sites should be prepared to A simple method of determining waste heat being
receive the transmitter prior to its delivery and/or generated is to determine the average RF output
installation. The following must be taken into power, divide the average RF output power (in
consideration when preparing new sites. They should watts) by three and then convert the quotient to
be used as the evaluating criteria at existing sites. It British thermal units (BTU's) by multiplying it by
is recommended that all requirements be incorporated 3.413.
to ensure optimum reliability and performance is As an example: At 5000 watts carrier power with
obtained. 50% modulation, average power output is 5625
watts. This represents an average long term output
NOTE power based on typical processed program material.
Frequent reference is made to terminals on the At 75% overall efficiency, the waste heat generated
remote interface PWB (A8A1). It is located on the is 1875 watts, which equals 6400 BTU's per hour.
interface panel which is behind the control/monitor
panel. Refer to figure MD-10 to locate the remote 3.1.1.5 Heating: The transmitter room must
interface PWB and then to its service instruction contain a heating system that will ensure its ambient
manual for its assembly detail.
air temperature does not go below 0C.
3.1.1 TRANSMITTER ROOM
3.1.1.6 Work Area: It is recommended that a
REQUIREMENTS: The following transmitter
suitable work area with an adequate table surface be
room requirements must be addressed when the
provided adjacent to the transmitter to permit bench
transmitter site is being finalized.
adjustment/repair of modules.
3.1.1.1 Transmitter Dimensions: Refer to figure
3.1.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION:
MD-26 for transmitter dimensions. These Extremely high voltage/current transients are
dimensions identify floor space requirements and will produced when a lightning strike occurs. These
assist in determining cable lengths and routing. transients, which are probably the most significant
hazard to any solid state transmitter, may be passed
3.1.1.2 Transmitter Clearances: It is to the transmitter through the wiring connecting it to
recommended a clearance of at least four feet be its power source and its antenna system. It is
maintained on all sides of the transmitter. imperative that all practical precautions be taken to
protect the transmitter from this phenomenon. Refer
3.1.1.3 Air Flushing: A fan in each RF power to Nautel's Lightning Protection for Radio
module draws cooling air through louvres in the Transmitter Stations booklet for recommendations
cabinet's rear door; circulates it through the module and for specific protection techniques. The following
and exhausts it as a horizontal, low velocity stream requirements are considered to be essential.
through openings in the module's front panel. A
room air exchange rate of 400 CFM should achieve
3.1.2.1 Station Reference Ground: The site must
an acceptable intake/exhaust temperature rise.
contain a station reference ground, as defined in
Nautel's Lightning Protection for Radio
3.1.1.4 Cooling: The transmitter room's ambient
Transmitter Stations booklet. This ground must
air temperature must not exceed 50C. For air
provide a continuous, low impedance path to the
conditioning requirements, it can be assumed that
earth. The transmitter cabinet's designated reference
75% of the power being consumed, from the DC
ground point, the shield of the coaxial feed cable and
power source, is applied to the antenna system as the
the ground connection of the power source's surge
RF output and 25% is converted to waste heat.
protection devices must be connected directly to the
station reference ground.
Page 3-1
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.1.2.2 AC Power Source: All conductors from 3.1.2.6 External Control/Monitor Wiring: All
the AC power source should be protected by bi- external/control wiring, that may be subjected to
directional surge protection devices that are lightning induced transients, should be interfaced to
connected between each conductor and the station the station reference ground by surge protection
reference ground. A surge protector panel, that devices where they enter the building. In addition, all
contains suitably rated varistors is available from conductors and their shields should pass through a
Nautel for this purpose. In addition, the DC power ferrite toroid which is positioned between its surge
conductors should pass through a ferrite toroid. The protection device and the transmitter. This toroid
inductance formed by this toroid will be transparent will be transparent to control/monitor signals, but
to the AC voltages, but will present an impedance to will present an impedance to lightning induced
transients originating in the power source. If used, transients.
the surge protector panel should be installed in close 3.1.3 ELECTRICAL POWER: The
proximity to the station reference ground. transmitter is configured during manufacture to
operate from one of a variety of 50/60Hz AC power
NOTE sources. The option selected is specified by the
The AC power source usually presents the lowest purchaser. Refer to table 1-1 for an itemized listing
impedance path to ground potential and will of standard voltage options. The AC power source
normally carry most of the lightning induced current must meet all of the following requirements:
away from the transmitter site.
3.1.3.1 Nominal Voltage: The power transformer's
When lightning hits the power source, a significant
primary winding contains tap options to
amount of induced current may flow towards the
accommodate voltages that differ from the ideal
transmitter. In this instance, the objective is to
voltage. There are up to six taps on three-phase
route the current around the transmitter, instead of
transformers (5% increments). The appropriate tap
through it, to the best ground available.
is selected during installation to provide the optimum
nominal voltage for the transmitter.
3.1.2.3 Antenna Feed Cable: The shield of the
antenna feed's coaxial cable should be connected
3.1.3.2 Voltage Stability: The AC power source's
directly to the station reference ground where it enters
nominal voltage must be stable to within plus or
the building. In addition, the centre conductor and
minus five percent under all loading conditions. The
the shield of the feed cable should pass through a
transmitter contains circuitry that maintains the RF
ferrite toroid which is positioned between the shield
output at the preset carrier level for voltage
ground, at the building entrance and the shield
variations within this range.
termination, at the transmitter reference ground. This
toroid will be transparent to the RF signal, but will 3.1.3.3 Power Consumption: When a transmitter
present an impedance to transients originating in the is operating at 5000 watts, with 100% modulation by
antenna. a continuous sine wave, power consumption is 10
kilowatts. When operating at 5000 watts, with no
3.1.2.4 Antenna/RF Output Disconnect: A modulation, power consumption is 6.65 kilowatts.
switching circuit that disconnects the antenna from Actual power consumption for a specific station will
the transmitter's RF output when the transmitter is depend on the programming format and the level of
turned off should be incorporated into the RF feed/ audio processing. It is recommended the AC power
antenna design. This switching circuit will prevent source have a 25% over capacity (minimum rating of
lightning induced transients from entering the 13kVA) to ensure adequate regulation.
transmitter when its solid state devices are most 3.1.3.4 External Switching: It is recommended
susceptible to electrostatic failure. that all voltage carrying conductors from the AC
3.1.2.5 Antenna Tower: The antenna tower is the power source be controlled by an external switching
most likely target for lightning strikes. It is box that is located in close proximity to the
imperative that it contain lightning protection devices, transmitter. This switch box should be clearly
such as air-gap spark balls, as the first line of defense marked TRANSMITTER EMERGENCY ON/OFF
against lightning strikes. SWITCH.
Page 3-2
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.1.4 ANTENNA SYSTEM: It is recommended - Carrier frequency of 5Hz or five parts per
that the antenna system meets (as a minimum) the million (ppm) whichever is greater, when it is
standards specified in EIA Standard TR-101-A, not being modulated.
paragraph 8(b) with a normal impedance of 50 j0
ohms at the carrier frequency. The transmitter will - RF drive level of between 5.0 and 12.0 volts
function while operating into a maximum VSWR of peak-to-peak (sine wave or square wave).
1.5:1, or with sideband VSWR's of up to 2:1 when
the carrier frequency impedance is 50 j0 ohms, but - 50-ohm impedance matching at the carrier
overall system performance will be degraded. frequency.
3.1.4.1 RF Feed Cable: The feed cable 3.1.5.3 Third Party AM Stereo Exciter: When
interconnecting the transmitter and the antenna an exciter (A and/or B) is configured for an
system should be a suitably rated coaxial cable. externally produced, AM stereo RF drive, the crystal
Unless otherwise requested, the transmitter's RF oscillator in its associated RF drive PWB is replaced
output connector is a 7/8 inch EIA flange. The RF by an external monaural RF generator as the
feed cable's transmitter end must be terminated by an originating source of the RF drive. Refer to the RF
appropriate mating connector. drive PWB's service instruction manual and
paragraphs 3.3.2 and 3.3.4 of this manual for
3.1.4.2 Static Drain Choke: A static drain choke additional information. The external AM stereo
having a reactance of 2000 ohms or greater at the generator must provide:
carrier frequency should be connected between the
conductor of the RF feed cable and ground. This - Carrier frequency of 5Hz or five parts per
choke is necessary to drain DC voltages which may million (ppm) whichever is greater, when it is
build up on the antenna tower system (ie: static not being modulated.
electricity). - RF drive level of between 5.0 and 12.0 volts
peak-to-peak (sine wave or square wave).
3.1.5 RF DRIVE SOURCE: The RF drive for
exciter A can be derived from one of four sources, - 50-ohm impedance matching at the carrier
while the RF drive for exciter B can only be derived frequency.
from one of three sources. - Phase-modulated RF signal, containing the left
minus right channel information.
3.1.5.1 Internal Monaural RF Drive PWB:
When an exciter (A and/or B) is configured for an NOTE
internally produced, monaural RF drive, the integral If both exciter PWBs (A and B) are configured for
crystal oscillator of its associated RF drive PWB is AM stereo operation, it is recommended the RF
the RF drive source. Refer to the RF drive PWB drive signal source be duplicated (active and
service instruction manual and paragraphs 3.3.2 and reserve). An automatic changeover circuit should
3.3.4 of this manual for additional information. be incorporated to activate and select the reserve
source when the original active source fails.
3.1.5.2 External Monaural RF Generator: When
an exciter (A and/or B) is configured for an 3.1.5.4 Nautel's C-QUAM AM Stereo Exciter:
externally produced, monaural RF drive, the integral When exciter A is configured to use the RF drive
crystal oscillator of its associated RF drive PWB is produced by Nautel's C-QUAM AM stereo exciter
replaced by an external monaural RF generator as the PWB, the optional C-QUAM AM exciter PWB is
originating source of the RF drive. Refer to the RF installed, on the interface panel, and the standard RF
drive PWB's service instruction manual and drive PWB for exciter A (normally located in the
paragraphs 3.3.2 and 3.3.4 of this manual for exciter drawer) is removed. This RF drive source is
additional information. The external RF generator normally configured for AM stereo but it can produce
must provide: a monaural RF drive if desired. Refer to the C-
QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's service instruction
manual for detailed information.
Page 3-3
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.1.6 MODULATING AUDIO: Modulating 3.1.6.3.2 The left and right audio channels must
audio must be applied from an external source. The provide:
transmitter does not have any audio processing
capability, therefore, any processing must be - Balanced 600 ohms.
completed before the modulating audio is applied,
noting the audio may be processed to provide a - When left audio only is applied (right audio
higher percentage of positive modulation than inhibited), its level must be precisely 10dBm
negative modulation. Electrical inter-connection when a modulation depth of 50% is expected.
should be made using suitably rated twisted shielded
pair(s) of conductors. - When right audio only is applied (left audio
inhibited), its level must be precisely 10dBm
3.1.6.1 Monaural Audio: Modulating audio for when a modulation depth of 50% is expected.
monaural RF drives (internal or external) is
connected between TB1-15 (AUDIO +), TB1-17 3.1.7 SAFETY INTERLOCK: The external
(AUDIO -) and TB1-16 (shield) of the remote safety interlock circuit is connected between TB1-13
interface PWB. The monaural audio must provide: and TB1-14 of the remote interface PWB. It must
present a short circuit (low impedance) between the
- Balanced 600 ohms. terminals when the interlock circuit is intact and it is
safe to enable the RF output. It must present an open
- Output level between 0dB and +12 dB (factory circuit when one or more of the interlock switches
set to 10dB) for 100% modulation. have been activated and the RF output is required to
be inhibited. Any number of serial interlock switches
3.1.6.2 External AM Stereo Audio: Modulating may be installed, provided an open circuit is
audio for third party (external) AM stereo RF drives presented if any interlock switch is activated.
is applied to the AM stereo generator and the
resultant left plus right (L+R) audio is connected NOTE
between the TB1-15 (AUDIO +), TB1-17 (AUDIO -) The interlock circuit provides the path for the
and TB1-16 (shield) of the remote interface PWB. master on/off circuit's 24 VDC power source. If
The L+R audio must provide: wiring for the interlock circuit is lengthy, unwanted
transients may be induced on this voltage. When
- Balanced 600 ohms. this occurs, a user supplied relay, that has its
energized/ de-energized state controlled by the
- Output level between 0dB and +12dB (factory external interlock switches, should be installed in
set to 10dB) for 100% modulation. close proximity to the remote interface PWB. The
relay should be connected as a fail-safe relay
3.1.6.3 Nautel's C-QUAM AM Stereo Audio: (energized when the interlock circuit is intact, de-
Modulating audio for Nautel's AM stereo exciter energized when it is opened) with its normally open
must be left and right audio channels. Both channels contacts interconnecting the two interlock terminals.
must have identical characteristics to obtain best AM
stereo performance. Electrical connection is made The transmitter's RF stage may be inhibited for
directly to terminals of TB1 on the C-QUAM AM approximately one second after the integrity of the
stereo exciter PWB. The left channel connects to external interlock has been restored.
TB1-3(+), TB1-5(-) and TB1-4(shield). The right
channel connects to TB1-10(+), TB1-8(-) and TB1-
9(shield).
3.1.6.3.1 Refer to the C-QUAM AM stereo exciter

PWB's service instruction manual for detailed
information.
Page 3-4
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.1.8 REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS: The 3.1.9 OTHER REMOTE CONTROLS:

on/off status, active exciter (RF/mod drive source), Additional controlling inputs can be connected, at the
preset RF power level and alarm reset can be user's discretion. Since the DC return for these
controlled from a remote location, using switching control inputs is the main chassis ground, they will
circuits that comply with the following. influence the transmitter's RF output regardless of the
transmitter's CONTROL switch setting. The
NOTE controlling electrical connections are made to a
Remote controls must apply a DC return from the terminal of TB1 on remote interface PWB 1A2.
REMOTE COMMON terminals (TB1-19/TB2-19) on
the remote interface PWB. Since this DC return is 3.1.9.1 RF Power Trim: This circuit must be the
not present when the CONTROL switch is set to equivalent of a single pole, three position (on/off/on)
LOCAL, the remote controls only have influence switch. Each on position must be spring-loaded to
when it is set to REMOTE. Electrical remote control return to off, when the toggle is released. It must
connections are made to TB1. apply a ground potential, from one on-position, to the
remote interface PWB's POWER INCR terminal (TB1-
3.1.8.1 On/Off Control: The remote on/off control 9) when an incremental increase in RF power is
circuit must be the equivalent of a single pole, three required or to its POWER DECR terminal (TB1-10),
position (on/off/on) switch. Each on positions must from the second on-position, when a decrease is
be spring-loaded to return to off when the toggle is required.
released. It must be connected to apply a remote
common (from TB1-19/TB2-19), from one on- NOTE
position, to the RF ON terminal (TB1-1) when the When the remote power trim is reset (set to the
transmitter is to be turned on and from the other on centre of its range), it has a 10% control of the
position to the RF OFF terminal (TB1-2) when it is to preset RF carrier level, in 1.4% increments.
be turned off.
3.1.8.2 Preset Power Level Select: The remote 3.1.9.2 PWM Inhibit Control: The external
preset power level select circuit should be the PWM (pulse width modulation) inhibit switching
equivalent of three (four if optional remote power circuit must be the equivalent of a single pole, single
level control is used) normally open/held closed throw (on/off) switch. It must be connected to apply
spring-loaded switches. They must be connected to a ground potential, from its on-position, to the PWM
INHIBIT terminal (TB1-11) when the transmitter's RF
apply a remote common (from TB1-19/TB2-19) to
the POWER SELECT terminal [HIGH (TB1-5), LOW 1 output, is to be inhibited.
(TB1-6), LOW 2 (TB1-7) or AUTO (TB1-8] that
selects the desired power level. NOTE
The external PWM inhibit input is intended to be
3.1.8.3 Exciter A/B Select: The remote exciter used in conjunction with antenna switching
select circuit must be the equivalent of a single pole, circuitry, to ensure RF output current is not flowing
three position (on/off/on) switch. Each on position during opening/closing of contacts in the
must be spring-loaded to return to off when the toggle transmitter's RF output feed cable. The antenna
is released. It must be connected to apply a remote switching circuits must apply a ground to the PWM
INHIBIT terminal prior to contact opening
common (from TB1-19/TB2-19) to the EXCITER
SELECT terminal [A (TB1-3) or B (TB1-4)] that
(disconnecting the RF load) and must maintain this
selects the desired exciter. ground until contact closure has occurred and an
appropriate impedance has been connected to the
transmitter's RF output. A residual RF leak of
3.1.8.4 Alarm Reset: The external alarm reset
approximately 10.0 watts is present when the RF
circuit must be the equivalent of a normally open/held
output is inhibited. The RF output will be instantly
closed spring-loaded switch. It must be connected to
restored to its original level when the ground
apply a remote common potential (from TB1-
potential is removed from the PWM INHIBIT
19/TB2-19) to the ALARM RESET terminal (TB1-12)
terminal.
when alarm retention circuits and/or the SWR
protection circuit's counter are to be reset.
Page 3-5
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.1.10 RF PERFORMANCE MONITORING: 3.1.11 REMOTE ALARM INDICATIONS:

The transmitter provides outputs that are Outputs that indicate stress thresholds for critical
representative of the RF drive, forward power level, parameters have been exceeded are available on
the reflected power level and the RF output for terminals of the remote interface PWB. These
external monitoring. These outputs are available on outputs are provided for external monitoring. Each
the remote interface PWB (the forward and reflected alarm output contains a switching transistor that
power level outputs from terminals of TB2 and the provides an open collector during normal operation
RF drive/RF monitor outputs from coaxial BNC (non-alarm condition) and a current-sink-to-ground
connectors. when an alarm condition exists. Each external
monitoring circuit must present an impedance,
3.1.10.1 Forward Power Level: A buffered DC between the switching transistor and a positive DC
voltage that is representative of the forward power voltage source, that will result in not more than 40
level is available at the BFRD FWD PWR terminal milliamperes flowing through the transistor when it is
(TB2-16). This voltage is a non-linear (square law) turned on. Each alarm circuit's positive voltage
function of the forward power level and will be 12.5 source must not exceed 24 VDC. Each of the alarm
0.5 volts DC at 5000 watts. outputs is protected against transients and/or
overvoltage by a 56 volt zener diode.
3.1.10.2 Reflected Power Level: A buffered DC
voltage that is representative of the reflected power NOTE
level is available at the BFRD REFL PWR terminal In most cases the RF output is shutback (turned off)
(TB2-18). This voltage is a non-linear (square law) when an alarm condition is sensed. When the cause
function of the reflected power level and will be 4.0 of the alarm has been removed, the RF output will
0.5 volts DC at 875 watts. be restored at an exponential rate, over a nominal
200 millisecond period.
3.1.10.3 RF Drive Sample: A sample of the RF
drive is provided at the FREQUENCY MONITOR BNC 3.1.11.1 RF Stress Current Alarm: The High RF
coaxial connector (J9). The Freq Monitor output is Current Alarm output is applied to ALARM - RF CUR
intended to be used during maintenance, to monitor terminal TB2-7. During non-alarm conditions, it is
the frequency of the RF drive. It should be a nominal an open collector. When the RF output current
1.0 0.5 volts RMS, into a 50 ohm load. exceeds a factory set threshold, which represents the
maximum current the RF power modules can provide
3.1.10.4 RF Monitor Sample: A true sample of the without being over-stressed, the High RF Current
RF output, including its modulation envelope, is Alarm output will be a current-sink-to-ground. The
provided at the remote interface PWB's RF MONITOR RF output will be shutback (turned off).
BNC coaxial connector (J4). The RF Monitor output
is intended to be applied to a station modulation 3.1.11.2 High AC Power Source Voltage Alarm:
monitor with a 50-ohm input impedance. It may also The High AC Alarm output is applied to ALARM -
be monitored by an oscilloscope during maintenance HIGH AC terminal TB2-8. During non-alarm
procedures. The RF Monitor voltage output can be conditions, it is an open collector. When the AC
set for an 8.5 peak-to-peak volts (3.0 volts RMS) power source's voltage is more than 10% above its
reference output, at each preset power level, provided normal, nominal voltage, the High AC Alarm output
will be a current-sink-to-ground. The RF output will
- the preset High power level is between be shutback (turned off).
5500 and 3500 watts.
- both preset Low power levels are between 5500

and 1000 watts.
Page 3-6
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.1.11.3 Low AC Power Source Voltage Alarm: 3.1.11.8 SWR Cutback Alarm: The SWR Cutback
The Low AC Alarm output is applied to ALARM - Alarm output is applied to ALARM - SWR CUTBACK
LOW AC terminal TB2-9. During non-alarm terminal TB2-14. During non-alarm conditions, the
conditions, it is an open collector. When the AC output is an open collector. When the alarm counter,
power source's voltage is more than 10% below its which counts SWR shutbacks (see paragraph
normal, nominal voltage, the Low AC Alarm output 3.1.11.7) and high RF current shutbacks (see
will be a current-sink-to-ground. The RF output will paragraph 3.1.11.1), has exceeded three counts, the
be shutback (turned off). SWR Cutback Alarm output will be a current-sink-to-
ground. The RF output will be cutback (reduced) by
3.1.11.4 High B- Voltage Alarm: The High B- an amount that is proportional to the amount the
Alarm output is applied to ALARM - HIGH B- terminal alarm counter's count exceeds three. The RF output
TB2-10. During non-alarm conditions, it is an open will be shutback (turned off) when the count is nine.
collector. When the B- voltage goes more negative
than a nominal -85.0 VDC, the High B- Alarm 3.1.11.9 Interlock Open Alarm: The Interlock
output will be a current-sink-to-ground. The RF Open Alarm output is applied to INTLK OPEN
output will be shutback (turned off). ALARM terminal TB2-21. When the interlock circuit
is intact (non-alarm condition), the output is an open
3.1.11.5 RF Drive Level Alarm: The Low RF collector. When the interlock is open, the Interlock
Drive Alarm output is applied to ALARM - DRIVE Open Alarm output will be a current-sink-to-ground.
LEVEL terminal TB2-11. During non-alarm The RF output will be turned off by removing 24
conditions, it is an open collector. When the RF VDC from transmitter's control circuits.
drive level falls below a preset failure threshold
(nominally 77 volts peak-to-peak), the Low RF Drive 3.1.12 REMOTE STATUS INDICATIONS:
Alarm will be a current-sink-to-ground. The RF Outputs that indicate the status of operator controlled
output will be shutback (turned off). circuits are available for external monitoring at
terminals of TB2 on the remote interface PWB. Each
3.1.11.6 RF Drive Tuning Alarm: The Detuned status output contains a switching transistor that
RF Drive Alarm output is applied to ALARM - DRIVE provides an open collector when its circuit is passive
TUNING terminal TB2-12. During non-alarm (not-true condition) and a current-sink-to-ground
conditions, it is an open collector. When the RF when a true (circuit active) condition exists. Each
drive is detuned by a change in the RF drive monitoring circuit must present an impedance,
frequency or a detuning of tuned RF drive circuits, between the transistor and a positive DC voltage
the Detuned RF Drive Alarm output will be a source, that will result in not more than 40
current-sink-to-ground. The RF output will be milliamperes flowing through the transistor when it is
shutback (turned off). turned on. The positive voltage source must not
exceed 24 VDC. Each of the status outputs is
3.1.11.7 SWR Shutback Alarm: The SWR protected against transients and/or overvoltage by a
Shutback Alarm output is applied to ALARM - SWR 56 volt zener diode.
SHUTBACK terminal TB2-13. During non-alarm
conditions, it is an open collector. When the reflected 3.1.12.1 Remote Status: The Remote Status output
power exceeds 800 watts (1.5:1 relative to 5500 is applied to REMOTE STATUS terminal TB2-15.
watts at 100% modulation or 14dB return loss), the When the transmitter's CONTROL switch is set to
SWR Shutback Alarm output will be a current-sink- LOCAL and the remote control functions have no
to-ground. The RF output will be shutback (turned influence on the transmitter's on/off status, active
off). RF/mod drive source (exciter A or B) or preset RF
power levels, the Remote Status output is an open
collector. When the transmitter's CONTROL switch is
set to REMOTE and the remote control functions are
controlling transmitter operation, the Remote Status
output is a current sink to ground.
Page 3-7
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.1.12.2 RF On Status: The RF On Status output is 3.1.13.2 Ancillary Parts: An ancillary parts kit is
applied to STATUS - RF ON terminal TB2-1. When provided with each transmitter. These parts are
the transmitter is turned off, the RF On Status output provided to ensure initial installation is not delayed
is an open collector. When the transmitter is turned because of lost or damaged hardware. They are not
on, but not necessarily producing an RF output, the intended to be maintenance spares. Detailed
RF On Status output is a current sink to ground. information about these parts is not included in this
manual. The ancillary parts kit contents is itemized
3.1.12.3 Exciter B Status: The Exciter B Status in its packing list.
output is applied to STATUS - EXCTR B terminal
TB2-2. When exciter A is selected, the Exciter B 3.1.14 PARTS REQUIRED BUT NOT
Status output is an open collector. When exciter B is SUPPLIED BY NAUTEL: Some parts and
selected, the Exciter B Status output is a current sink materials required to complete an installation are not
to ground. supplied with the transmitter or are not provided by
Nautel. The user must supply these parts. Each
3.1.12.4 Power Level Status: The Pwr Level Status installation will dictate the parts required, and will
outputs are applied to STATUS - POWER terminals normally include the following:
[HIGH(TB2-3), LOW 1(TB2-4), LOW 2 (TB2-5) and
AUTO (TB2-6)]. When a power level is not selected, - A suitable 50-ohm RF output coaxial cable,
its Pwr Level Status output is an open collector. terminated by a 7/8 inch EIA connector at the
When selected, a Pwr Level Status output is a current transmitter end, is required.
sink to ground.
- All external control/monitor wiring, including
3.1.12.5 Transmitter Ready Status: The RF Ready their associated terminating devices and conduit
Status output is applied to RF READY terminal TB2- clamps must be provided by the user.
20. When the AC/DC power supply is not producing
an unregulated 24 VDC, and the transmitter control - All electrical power cables, including conduit,
functions are not operable, the RF Ready Status terminating devices and conduit clamps must be
output is an open collector. When the AC/DC power provided by the user.
supply is producing an unregulated 24 VDC, and the
transmitter control functions are operable (locally or 3.1.14.1 Surge Protector Panel: A surge protector
remotely as appropriate), the RF Ready Status output panel, that is rated for the AC power source to be
is a current sink to ground. applied to the transmitter, is available from Nautel.
The surge protector panel will help protect the
3.1.13 PARTS SUPPLIED BY NAUTEL: The transmitter against lightning induced voltage
following parts/materials are supplied by or are transients on the AC power source and/or the antenna
available from Nautel. system.
3.1.13.1 Parts Removed During Disassembly For 3.1.15 TEST EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL
Shipment: All the parts that were removed during TOOLS: The test equipment required to install and
disassembly for shipment and are required to maintain the transmitter is listed in table 1-2 and the
reassemble the transmitter are provided. An itemized special tools are listed in table 1-3.
listing of the parts is not provided in this manual, as
the extent of disassembly is determined by the method
of shipment. Detailed packing lists will be included
with each transmitter shipment.
Page 3-8
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
NON-TECHNICAL PRE-COMMISSIONING 3.2.3.1 Disassembly Required: Disassemble to

3.2 On delivery of the transmitter, the following the extent necessary to install the AC/DC power
non-technical procedures should be observed and supply and to perform a visual inspection:
completed.
NOTE
NOTE Do not disassemble to a greater extent than is
Non-technical procedures are defined as being those necessary to complete the following procedures. All
procedures that do not require technical knowledge attaching hardware or parts removed during
of transmitter circuits or their operation to disassembly must be retained for reuse.
complete. (a) Remove meter shorting clips from terminals of
control/monitor panel's meters. Ensure nuts on
3.2.1 ACCEPTANCE OF SHIPMENT: All meter terminals are firmly tightened.
shipments should be inspected for transit damage
prior to acceptance. (b) Remove four screws securing exciter drawer to
cabinet, extend drawer on its slides. Remove
its top cover by turning fastening screws one
quarter turn counter clockwise.
Sufficient manpower or mechanical assistance (c) Remove meter shorting clip from terminals of
should be on hand prior to removing the exciter drawer's TEST meter. Ensure nuts on
transmitter cabinet from its packing crate. The meter terminals are firmly tightened.
crate may weigh in excess of 275 kilograms (600
pounds) (d) Remove each cabinet side panel:
- remove one screw from top of panel
3.2.2 UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS: The - lift vertically approximately one inch
degree of unpacking is dictated by the method of - disconnect ground wire (#191 or #192)
packaging for shipment. Transmitters that are not - carefully lift panel away from the cabinet
shipped by electronic equipment moving specialists
may be packed in wooden crates, with the number of (e) Remove hinged rear door
crates determined by the extent of disassembly for - disconnect door-to-cabinet gnd wire (#193)
shipment. Instructions accompany any crate that - release door's spring-loaded hinge pin
requires special unpacking information. Packing lists - carefully lift away the door.
provide detailed listings of shipment contents.
(f) Remove circuit breaker panel from the front of
NOTE the cabinet; by removing eight screws, carefully
Normally, the transmitter will be partially lifting away the panel and then swinging it to
disassembled for shipment. As a minimum, the RF the side on its attached wiring.
power modules and power transformer will be
removed. The extent of any additional disassembly (g) Remove relay control panel from the cabinet
will be dictated by the shipping method, site rear; by removing four screws, lifting away the
information provided by the user and the handling panel and then swinging it to the side on its
equipment of the mover. attached wiring. Disconnect mod drive coaxial
cable (P32) from J1 of the relay control panel's
3.2.3 ASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION: Locate relay control PWB.
the partially disassembled transmitter cabinet in its
final location and complete its reassembly as follows: (h) Remove RF drive distribution panel from the
It is assumed that the shipment has been compared to cabinet rear; by removing four screws,
a packing/shipping list and everything required for carefully lifting away panel and then swinging
installation has been identified and accounted for. it upwards on its attached wiring. Ensure it is
high enough to allow access to cabinet interior
and secure it using a suitable tyrap.
Page 3-9
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.2.3.2 Visual Inspection: It is recommended a (j) Inspect the three-phase rectifier assembly for
visual inspection be performed on the cabinet interior, obvious damage. Verify all attaching hardware
to its removable modules/assemblies and printed is firmly tightened.
wiring boards prior to completing the installation.
Inspect for the following: (k) Inspect the power transformer for obvious
damage. Verify all attaching hardware is
(a) Verify nuts on terminals of meters are firmly firmly tightened.
tightened. 3.2.3.3 Installation of RF Power Modules: Install
the RF power modules (A2 thru A4), as follows
(b) Verify pointers of all meters are indicating zero. (refer to figure MD-1 as an aid in locating and
identifying a specific RF power module):
(c) Check for and remove any packing materials,
including tape or tyraps securing wiring that NOTE
was disconnected for shipment, noting wiring The flat washers and locking nuts required to secure
associated with the AC/DC power supply is the RF power modules in their trays are in a plastic
tyrapped in the lower portion of the cabinet. bag which is secured to one of the cable troughs at
the rear of the RF power module trays.
(d) Check for obvious damage and missing parts.
(a) Install the four RF power modules, ensuring the
(e) Check electrical wiring for broken or frayed retaining/ground stud of each module passes
insulation, loose or improper connections and through the slot of its support tray.
broken, shorted or pinched conductors.
(b) Secure each power module by installing and
(f) Verify all hardware is firmly tightened. firmly tightening a #10 flat washer and a #10
locking nut to the retaining/ground stud
(g) Check for and remove any unwanted foreign protruding through its support tray.
objects from the interior of the cabinets, paying
particular attention for floating conductive (c) Complete the electrical interconnection of the
materials such as strands of wire, metal RF power modules by connecting:
slivers/filings and loose hardware. - P28 to J1 of RF power module A2.
- A10P1 to J2 of RF power module A2.
(h) Visually inspect each RF power module for - P29 to J1 of RF power module A3.
obvious damage and listen for loose or free - A10P2 to J2 of RF power module A3.
floating objects while rotating the module. - P30 to J1 of RF power module A4.
Verify hardware on underside of module is - A11P1 to J2 of RF power module A4.
firmly tightened. - P31 to J1 of RF power module A5.
- A11P2 to J2 of RF power module A5.
NOTE
If disassembly of an RF power module is necessary, 3.2.3.4 Installation of Power Transformer:
refer to its service instruction manual for details. Install the power transformer in the bottom of the
cabinet, as follows:
(i) Inspect the exciter drawer for obvious damage.
Verify all of its attaching hardware is firmly
tightened.
NOTE The power transformer weighs approximately 91

The exciter drawer's printed wiring board kg (200 lbs). Do not attempt to move the assembly
assemblies rely on physical contact with their unless sufficient manpower or mechanical
mounting standoffs for secondary grounds. Ensure assistance is available to move it into position
all screws securing these assemblies are firmly without damaging the cabinet or causing injury to
tightened. personnel.
Page 3-10
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
NOTE (e) Locate three grey, 16AWG wires (#143, #144

If the AC power source voltage is known, the power and #145) from fuse holders on the circuit
transformer's preliminary primary winding taps breaker panel. Connect #143 to A1, #144 to
should be selected (see paragraph 3.3.1), before the A2 and #145 to A3 of the power transformer.
transformer is installed in the cabinet. Use attaching hardware in the holes of its 'A'
terminals.
(a) Position the power transformer directly in front
of the cabinet, with transformer taps facing the (f) Locate one black, 6AWG (#150) which
transmitter's right-hand side, when viewed from originates at the cabinet's vertical support
the front (see figure MD-1). member and connect it to the transformer's
ground stud (refer to figure MD-25 as an aid in
NOTE locating the stud). Secure using nut installed on
A lifting bracket which will accommodate a lifting ground stud.
device that is two inches thick by four inches wide
(2x4) is fastened to the top of the transformer. The (g) Install the RF drive distribution panel [removed
most economical lifting device is a 2x4 piece of in paragraph 3.2.3.1(h)] and secure using four
lumber that is long enough to extend through the screws retained during its removal.
cabinet with sufficient length to permit lifting from
both sides. (h) Install the relay control panel [removed in
paragraph 3.2.3.1(g)] and secure using four
(b) Carefully lift or slide the power transformer screws retained during its removal. Connect
into the cabinet. Ensure mounting holes in base mod drive coaxial cable (P32) to J1 of the relay
of the power transformer are aligned with control panel's relay control PWB.
predrilled holes in the cabinet's bottom plate
and the base is aligned with positioning (i) Install the circuit breaker panel [(removed in
reference marks. The power transformer paragraph 3.2.3.1(f)] and secure using eight
terminals must still be facing the cabinet's right- painted screws retained during its removal.
hand side.
NOTE
NOTE If circuit breaker panel's wiring was disconnected
If desired or if local codes dictate the need for rigid during its removal, reconnect the wiring as follows:
fastening, secure power transformer to the cabinet
bottom using locally obtained attaching hardware. - wire #137 (8 AWG black) to CB1-A1.
- wire #138 (8 AWG black) to CB1-B1.
(c) Locate three black, 8AWG wires (#140, #141 - wire #139 (8 AWG black) to CB1-C1.
and #142 which originate at terminals of circuit - wire #140 (8 AWG black) to CB1-A2.
breaker CB1 on the circuit breaker panel and - wire #141 (8 AWG black) to CB1-B2.
one black 8AWG wire (#149) which originates - wire #142 (8 AWG black) to CB1-C2.
at terminal 4 (neutral) of the DC power source - wire #143 (16 AWG grey) to XF1-Center.
terminal strip (TB1). Connect #149 to H0, - wire #144 (16 AWG grey) to XF2-Center.
#140 to H1, #141 to H2 and #142 to H3 of - wire #145 (16 AWG grey) to XF3-Center.
power transformer. Use attaching hardware in - wire #146 (16 AWG grey) to XF1-Side.
mounting holes of its 'H' terminals. - wire #147 (16 AWG grey) to XF2-Side.
- wire #148 (16 AWG grey) to XF3-Side.
(d) Locate three black, 8AWG wires (#160, #161
and #162) which originate terminals of 3-phase
rectifier. Connect #160 to X1, #161 to X2 and
#162 to X3 of the power transformer. Use
attaching hardware in mounting holes of its 'X'
terminals.
Page 3-11
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.2.4 INSTALLATION OF EXTERNAL NOTE

CONTROL/MONITOR WIRING: Connect Open, uninsulated, #6-screw, crimp lugs, for
wiring from the modulating audio source, remote installation on 18 to 22 AWG conductors; are
control/ monitoring devices, and when used, the provided in the ancillary parts kit.
external RF drive source; to terminating points on the
exciter panel's remote interface PWB, as follows: (e) If the monaural audio input provides 125%
positive/100% negative modulation, connect the
NOTE positive input to TB1-15 and the negative input
Monaural audio, remote control/monitor wiring to TB1-17 of the remote interface PWB.
terminates on the remote interface PWB. AM stereo
audio wiring terminates on the C-QUAM AM stereo NOTE
exciter PWB. Refer to figure MD-10 as an aid to Connection of the audio cable's shield is dependent
locating these PWBs and then to their service on the presence or absence of ground loops. In
instruction manual(s) to locate the terminals. some installations, it may be necessary to connect
the shield at one end only. In these cases, connect
(a) Route monaural audio, control and monitor the end that provides the best results.
wires; thru a convenient cable entry hole in the
cabinet, to the vicinity of the remote interface (f) If Nautel's AM stereo option is installed,
PWB. If applicable, route AM stereo left and connect the left and right audio to TB1 of the
right audio wires to the vicinity of the C- C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB. The phase
QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB. Ensure all relationship of the left and right audio is crucial
wires, including their shields pass thru a ferrite to C-QUAM AM stereo operation. The correct
toroid (a minimum of two turns). There are polarization must be maintained when
two toroids located on the top, left-hand side of connections are made:
the interface panel.
NOTE - Connect left audio's positive input to TB1-5,
The user must knock out an appropriate sized cable negative input to TB1-3 and shield to TB1-4.
entry hole where the control/monitor cables enter.
A 0.25 inch pilot hole has been pre-drilled in the - Connect right audio's positive input to TB1-10,
preferred location at the top, front of the transmitter negative input to TB1-8 and shield to TB1-9.
cabinet. See figure MD-26 as a guide to locating
the pilot hole. (g) Connect remaining control/monitor wiring to
the terminals of TB1 and TB2 on the remote
Where practical, it is recommended all external interface PWB as identified in figure 3-1.
wiring be installed in a metal conduit and the metal Ensure securing screws are firmly tightened.
conduit be rigidly attached to the cabinet.
NOTE
(b) Using figure 3-1 as a guide, determine the DC return for remote control circuits connected to
specific destination of each wire. TB1-1 thru TB1-8 and TB1-12 must be obtained
from TB1-19 or TB2-19.
(c) Coaxial cables that terminate at J1 (STEREO),
J4 (RF MONITOR) and J9 (FREQUENCY DC return for control circuits connected to TB1-9
MONITOR), of the remote interface PWB;
thru TB1-11 must be obtained from TB2-17 or by
should be cut to the required length and connecting directly to any convenient chassis
terminated by a BNC coaxial connector. ground.
(d) Wires that will be connected to a terminal on The DC return (-ve) for remote monitoring circuit's
the interface PWB should be cut to the required DC power source must be obtained from TB2-17 or
length and terminated by a terminal lug that by connecting directly to any convenient chassis
will accept a #6 screw and is the appropriate ground.
size for the conductor.
Page 3-12
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.2.5 INSTALLATION OF AC POWER 3.2.6 INSTALLATION OF RF FEED

SOURCE WIRING: Connect the wiring from the CABLE: Connect an RF feed coaxial cable, that has
AC power source to the appropriate terminals of AC been cut to required length, to the transmitter's RF
power terminal block TB1. Refer to figure MD-1 as output; noting RF feed cable termination point is
an aid in locating TB1. located at the top of RF output filter (refer to figure
MD-26 for location and dimensional information).
NOTE When the transmitter's RF output termination device
An appropriate sized cable entry hole must be is a 7/8 inch EIA flange connector, connect the feed
punched where the power cable enters the cabinet. cable as detailed in paragraph 3.2.6.1.
A 0.25 inch pilot hole has been pre-drilled in the
preferred location at the top, rear of the transmitter
(see figure MD-26). It is recommended the DC
WARNING
power source wiring be installed in a metal conduit
and the conduit be rigidly attached at the entry hole. Hazardous static and RF voltages can be present
on the antenna system when the transmitter is not
(a) Route the AC power source wires through the operating directly into it. Do not handle RF feed
selected cable entry hole to the vicinity of terminal cables while connected directly to the antenna
TB1. system.
NOTE
The transmitter's RF output should be applied to a
dummy load during commissioning procedures. If
Any connection to TB1-4 other than the neutral of the RF feed cable is not connected to a switching
a Wye configured DC power source will cause the circuit that permits antenna/dummy load selection,
MAIN POWER circuit breaker to activate (open). In ensure the RF feed cable for the dummy load is
particular, do not connect the neutral (ground) connected to the RF output until otherwise specified
wire of any Delta configured AC power source to during the commissioning procedures.
TB1-4.
3.2.6.1 Connection of 7/8 Inch EIA Flange
(b) When the AC power source is three phase, four Connector: When the transmitter's RF output
wire (all voltages), cut each conductor to the connection is a 7/8 inch EIA flange connector,
required length, install a 1/4 inch terminal lug connect the RF feed cable as follows:
on each conductor and fasten them to the
terminals of TB1 as follows: (a) Verify the RF feed cable is the required length
and has been terminated by a 7/8 inch EIA
TB1-1 - Line () 1 flange connector that includes the inner
TB1-2 - Line () 2 connector.
TB1-3 - Line () 3
TB1-4 - Neutral (b) Gain access to the interior of the RF output
TB1-5 - Ground filter, by:
NOTE - Opening control/monitor panel A1 and secure it

Closed, uninsulated, 1/4 inch, crimp lugs, for in its fully open position.
installation on 2 or 4 AWG conductors; are
provided in the ancillary parts kit. - Removing two 1/4 x 20 screws securing the
right-hand side of hinged interface panel A8,
(c) Ensure all of the terminal block's attaching noting one is at the top and the other is at the
hardware is firmly tightened. bottom, and then swinging the interface panel to
its fully open position.
NOTE
Final selection of the power transformer's primary NOTE
winding taps is completed during technical pre- The interface panel is located immediately behind
commissioning procedures (refer to paragraph 3.3). the control/monitor panel.
Page 3-13
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
- Removing RF output filter A9's front access (h) Visually inspect the interior of the RF output
panel by removing fourteen hex head 6-32 x 0.5 filter, and then install its front panel using the
inch screws and fourteen external tooth lock fourteen hex head 6-32 x 0.5 inch screws and
washers and then carefully lifting away the fourteen external tooth lock washers hardware
panel. retained during its removal.
(c) In the RF output filter, locate the pair of teflon

wires which originate at the top of capacitor C5
and are terminated by a cup connector (J7) and
ensure it will not be pinched or otherwise Ensure RF output filter A9's access panel
damaged when the feed cable's 7/8 inch EIA retaining screws are firmly tightened. If they are
flange connector is secured over the RF output not, eddy currents, that may affect filter tuning and
opening on the top of the RF output filter. that will generate excessive heat, will result.
(d) Remove the 1/4-20 nuts and 1/4 inch washers (i) Close hinged interface panel A8 and secure
from the four 7/8 inch EIA flange mounting using the two 1/4 x 20 screws and 1/4 inch
studs on the top of RF output filter A9 (see washers that originally secured it in its closed
figure MD-11). position.
(e) Install the RF feed cable's 7/8 inch EIA flange 3.2.7 REFERENCE GROUND INTER-
connector on the RF output filter's flange CONNECTION: Connect a continuous, low-
mounting studs and secure using the 1/4-20 impedance conductor (0 AWG copper wire, two-inch
nuts and 1/4 inch washers removed in step (d). copper strap or equivalent), as described in Nautel's
Ensure nuts are firmly tightened. 'Lightning Protection for Radio Transmitter Stations'
booklet, between the station reference ground and one
(f) Install the RF output cup connector (J7) located of the transmitter's reference ground bolts, noting
in step (c) on the bullet of the EIA flange there are two reference ground connection points on
connector installed in step (e). Ensure they are the transmitter. The bottom entry reference ground
fully mated. connection is located at the bottom, left side of the
cabinet (see figure MD-2). The top entry reference
(g) Check the gap of the RF output filter's surge ground connection is located behind the RF output
arrestor (E1) as detailed in paragraph 5.4.3 termination point on the top of the RF output filter
before installing the front panel. (see figure MD-11).
Page 3-14
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Figure 3-1 External Input/Output Interface
Page 3-15
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
TECHNICAL PRE*COMMISSIONING (a) Determine fully loaded, mean, RMS, phase-to-

3.3 Prior to applying DC power and turning on phase voltage of the AC power source and
transmitter, some circuits must be customized to the record this voltage for future reference.
station's power source and operating requirements.
The following should be completed. (b) Verify the power transformer is rated for the
voltage determined in step (a) by noting voltage
NOTE rating on its nameplate.
Technical pre-commissioning procedures require
technical decisions and customization of electrical (c) Enter the appropriate nominal AC voltage
circuits. They should be incorporated by the station column of table 3-1 with the mean, RMS,
engineer or a competent electronic technician. phase-to-phase voltage obtained in step (a) and
determine which power transformer primary
Reference is made to RF drive PWBs (A6A3 and winding taps should be used.
A6A4) and modulator driver PWBs (A6A5 and
A6A6) in the following procedures. These printed (d) Gain access to transformer's primary winding
circuit boards are located in the exciter drawer. taps by removing the circuit breaker panel.
Refer to figure MD-1 to locate the exciter drawer, to
figure MD-6 to locate the specified PWB and then to (e) Connect the moveable wire from each of the
the appropriate PWB service instruction manual for power transformer's input terminals (H1, H2
its assembly detail. and H3) to the tap of its associated primary
winding identified in step (c), noting the tap for
3.3.1 SELECTING PWR TRANSFORMER'S all three primary windings must be the same
PRIMARY WINDING TAPS: Determine the DC (A, B, C, D, E or F).
power source's nominal, loaded, RMS voltage and
then select/connect the appropriate primary winding 3.3.2 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL RF DRIVE:
taps of the power transformer, as follows: Connect or verify the RF drive source links on RF
drive PWBs installed in the exciter drawer are
connected as desired.
WARNING
NOTE
Ensure AC power source is switched off at the If Nautel's C-QUAM AM stereo PWB is installed, on
service entrance. If this precaution is not the interface panel, as exciter A's RF drive source,
observed, voltages that may cause serious injury or RF drive PWB A3 will not be installed in the exciter
death will be present on circuit breaker and drawer and there will only be one RF drive PWB
transformer terminals. (A4).
Table 3-1 Primary Winding Tap Selection for Power Transformer T1

NOMINAL AC VOLTAGE PRIMARY WINDING TAPS
(RMS - PHASE-TO-PHASE)
230 VOLTS 380 VOLTS 415 VOLTS 480 VOLTS H1 H2 H3
193 (197.5) 202 - - 469 (481.0) 493 1-A 2-A 3-A

203 (208.0) 213 - 443 (455.5) 468 443 (455.5) 468 1-B 2-B 3-B
214 (219.0) 224 - 323 (432.5) 442 - 1-C 2-C 3-C
225 (230.0) 236 397 (409.5) 422 397 (409.5) 422 - 1-D 2-D 3-D
237 (242.5) 248 371 (383.5) 396 - - 1-E 2-E 3-E
- 351 (360.5) 370 - - 1-F 2-F 3-F
Page 3-16
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 3-2 Low-Pass Filter Selector Switch Settings
HIGH FREQUENCY ROLL-OFF (-1.0 dB) FILTER SELECTOR SWITCH SETTINGS
RF DRIVE PWB S1-1 S1-2
16.5kHz OPEN OPEN

10.0kHz OPEN CLOSED
6.6kHz CLOSED OPEN
5.5kHz CLOSED CLOSED
NOTE NOTE
Do not remove oscillator crystal from RF drive A 3-pole Butterworth filter that can be altered
PWB's that are configured for external RF drive. towards a pseudo-Bessel response is used as the
The oscillator's output is used to obtain the 2c/N low-pass filter.
output which ultimately determines the pulse width
modulation frequency (pwm) The decision to select a lower roll-off frequency will
be dictated by complex factors. They may include;
If the external RF drive (monaural or AM stereo) is an antenna with sideband limitations, square wave
not duplicated and connected to changeover when a overshoot, and the processing the audio is subjected
failure occurs, it is recommended one RF drive PWB to. In some instances, AM Stereo stations may wish
be connected to use its crystal oscillator as its RF to reduce/eliminate pass band influence. Nautel's
drive source. This will ensure continued operation field service department will provide advice and
in the event of an external RF drive source failure. recommendations based on the installation.
(a) On RF drive PWB's that utilize an external RF (a) Set or verify the low-pass filter selector switch,
drive (monaural or AM stereo) source, link or on both modulator driver PWB's, has been set
verify terminal C is linked to terminal A. to provide desired high-frequency roll off.
(b) On RF drive PWB's that utilize the integral (b) Refer to table 3-2 to determine the roll-off
crystal oscillator as the RF drive source, link or frequencies that can be selected and the settings
verify terminal C is linked to terminal B. of the low-pass filter selector switch that are
required to obtain them. Record the roll-off
(c) If installed, record RF drive source link frequency and the filter selector switch settings
connection for exciter A's RF drive PWB for future reference.
(A6A3).
3.3.4 c DEPENDENT SELECTIONS (RF
(d) Record RF drive source link connection for DRIVE PWB): Verify the carrier frequency (c)
exciter B's RF drive PWB (A6A4). dependent link connections and switch settings of RF
drive PWB's installed in the exciter drawer have been
3.3.3 MODULATING AUDIO PASS BAND properly connected/set as follows:
SELECTION: The low-pass filter switch, on both
of the exciter drawer's modulator driver PWB's, is set
during manufacture, for a -1.0dB roll-off at highest
frequency listed in table 3-2. This selection will be
adequate for most installations.
Page 3-17
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 3-3 RF Drive PWB's Carrier Frequency Dependent Switch Settings and Link Connections
SELECT N SWITCH 2
c/N
c LINKS SETTINGS (kHz)
(kHz) N
CONNECT CONNECT S1-4 S1-3 S1-2 S1-1

F TO J TO (8) (4) (2) (1) MIN MAX
531 - 559 D (/4) H (/4) 6 (0110) 0 1 1 0 177.00 186.33
560 - 749 D (/4) H (/4) 8 (1000) 1 0 0 0 140.00 187.25
750 - 909 D (/4) H (/4) 10 (1010) 1 0 1 0 150.00 181.80
910 - 999 D (/4) H (/4) 12 (1100) 1 1 0 0 151.67 166.50
1000 - 1099 E (/2) G (/2) 12 (1100) 1 1 0 0 166.67 183.17
1100 - 1279 E (/2) G (/2) 14 (1110) 1 1 1 0 157.14 182.71
1280 - 1439 E (/2) G (/2) 8 (1000) 1 0 0 0 320.00 359.75
1440 - 1710 E (/2) G (/2) 10 (1010) 1 0 1 0 288.00 342.00
0 = switch open
1 = switch closed
3.3.4.1 Carrier Oscillator Crystal: Verify an (b) When oscillator frequency must be divided by
appropriate oscillator crystal has been installed, four to obtain c; terminals F and D must be
noting the crystal frequency must be between 2.0Mhz linked and terminals J and H must be linked.
and 4.0Mhz. Use the following criteria to determine Terminals E and G must not be connected.
the frequency of the oscillator crystal.
(c) When oscillator frequency must be divided by
- When c is less than 1000kHz, the oscillator two to obtain c; terminals F and E must be
crystal frequency should be precisely four times linked and terminals J and G must be linked.
the carrier frequency (4c). Terminals D and H must not be connected.
- When c is 1000kHz or higher, the oscillator 3.3.4.3 Divide-by-N Switch Settings: Verify the
crystal frequency should be precisely twice the divide-by-N switch settings are set to provide a
carrier frequency (2c) 2c/N that, in conjunction with divider links in the
associated modulator driver PWB, will ultimately
3.3.4.2 Frequency Divider Links: Connect or produce the required variable pulse width modulation
verify the appropriate divide-by ( ) links are frequency (pwm). 2c/N should be within the
connected. Determine interconnection as follows: frequency range specified in the 2 c/N (kHz) column
of table 3-3.
(a) Enter table 3-3 with c and refer to the Links
column to determine which terminals (/2 or /4) NOTE
should be linked to terminals F and J, noting: The optimum variable pulse width modulation
frequency (PWM) was selected during factory tests.
- Divide-by-four links (/4) are connected when c Refer to the Transmitter Configuration Sheet,
is less than 1000kHz. provided with the Factory Test Results, to
determine switch settings that were established to
- Divide-by-two links (/2) are connected when c obtain this frequency. These settings should be used
is 1000kHz or higher. unless the assigned carrier frequency is changed.
Page 3-18
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
NOTE (Continued) NOTE

In rare cases, the factory established PWM for a Unless otherwise specified, 2c/N frequency divider
specific transmitter may not be as tabulated in table links are connected to provide a variable pulse
3-3. For these transmitter's, the information in width modulation frequency (PWM) that is between
table 3-3 is not valid. The divide-by-N switches 70.00kHz and 93.63kHz.
must be set and the resultant 2c/N frequency must
be as recorded on the Transmitter Configuration (a) If 2c/N is between 140.00 and 187.25kHz:
Sheet. - Connect terminal A to associated /2 terminal.
Refer to the RF drive PWB's service instruction - Connect terminal B to associated /2 terminal.
manual to select the appropriate PWM after a
frequency change and to identify how the switch (b) If 2c/N is between 288.00 and 359.75kHz:
settings/link connections are normally determined. - Connect terminal A to associated /4 terminal.
- Connect terminal B to associated /4 terminal.
3.3.5 c DEPENDENT SELECTIONS (C-
QUAM AM STEREO EXCITER PWB): If the 3.3.6.2 Modulator Driver PWB With PWM
C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is installed, Oscillator: When the modulator driver PWB has a
Verify it is the appropriate variation, the appropriate piggy-back PWM oscillator PWB (it does not have
oscillator crystal is installed. provision to accept a 2c/N input), the PWM divider
links are factory set to divide by two
NOTE
C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWBs contain NOTE
frequency dependent parts. There are eleven The PWM divider links must be connected to divide
variations, with each for a specific frequency band. by 2 for all carrier frequencies. The PWM oscillator
Refer to the C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's is set to twice the PWM frequency by adjusting a
service instruction manual to determine the potentiometer.
variation that should be installed for the assigned
carrier frequency. 3.3.7 RF DRIVE PATH (EXCITER A):
3.3.5.1 Carrier Oscillator Crystal: Verify an Verify the coaxial cable from exciter A's RF drive
appropriate oscillator crystal has been installed, source is connected to the RF drive input of
noting the crystal frequency must be four times the exciter'A's RF drive amplifier (A16A3):
assigned carrier frequency (4c).
3.3.7.1 RF Drive PWB as RF Drive Source: If
3.3.5.2 Divide-by-N Switch Settings: The 2c/N
an RF drive PWB (A3 in the exciter drawer) is
output of the C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is
exciter A's RF drive source, connect or verify the RF
not used in this application. Since the 2c/N circuit
drive coaxial cable terminated by A12P4 is mated
has no influence on the other circuits, the setting of
with the RF drive input connector (J2) of exciter A's
its divide-by-N switch can be ignored.
RF drive amplifier (A12A2).
3.3.6 MODULATOR DRIVER PWB'S PWM
3.3.7.2 AM Stereo Exciter as RF Drive Source:
DIVIDER LINKS: Verify the appropriate PWM
If the optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB
frequency divider links have been connected, on both
(A16A7) is installed as exciter A's RF drive source,
modulator driver PWBs in the exciter drawer, as
connect or verify the RF drive coaxial cable
recorded on the Transmitter Configuration Sheet. terminated by A12P6 is mated with the RF drive
input connector (J2) of exciter A's RF drive amplifier
3.3.6.1 Modulator Driver PWB Without PWM (A12A2).
Oscillator: When the modulator driver PWB
requires a 2c/N input (it does not have a piggy-back
PWM oscillator PWB) and the factory link
connection information is not available or a
frequency change is to be implemented, enter table 3-
3 with the carrier frequency (c) and determine
2c/N.
Page 3-19
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.3.8 CONTROL INTERFACE BATTERY: 3.3.10 LOAD RESISTANCE CHECK FOR B-

If battery BT1 is not already installed in its battery VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY: Check the B-
holder on the control interface PWB, locate the 9.0 voltage power supply's load resistance as follows:
volt battery supplied in the ancillary parts kit and
install it. Ensure the mating connector is connected (a) Set or verify all of the RF POWER MODULE
and fully engaged. CONTROL switches on the relay control panel
(A13) on the bottom rear of the cabinet are set
NOTE to their ON position.
The control interface PWB is located on the rear of
the control/monitor panel. Refer to figure MD-4 as (b) Measure the load resistance for the B- voltage
an aid in locating the control interface PWB and power supply by connecting an ohmmeter
then, if additional information is necessary, to its between TB1-10 on the RF drive distribution
service instruction manual panel (A12) and chassis ground.
3.3.9 REMOVAL OF METER SHORTING (c) Resistance reading obtained in step (b) should
CLIPS: Remove or verify in-transit meter shorting be approximately 100 ohms.
clips have been removed from terminals of all four
meters (DC SUPPLY CURRENT, FORWARD POWER, NOTE
DC SUPPLY VOLTS and REFLECTED POWER) on the There are large storage capacitors in each RF
control/monitor panel and from the TEST meter in the power module. Resistance readings will not be
exciter drawer. Ensure nuts securing wiring to meter accurate until they are fully charged to the voltage
terminals are firmly tightened. being applied by the ohmmeter.
NOTE
The in-transit meter shorting clips are factory
installed to prevent damage to the meter movements
when the transmitter is in transit. These clips must
be removed for a meter to function properly.
Page 3-20
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 3.4.1 PRECAUTIONS TO BE OBSERVED:

3.4 These procedures are in a step-by-step The AMPFET ND5 transmitter contains many solid
format. They will permit a person who is not state devices which may be damaged if they are
familiar with the transmitter to perform the checks. subjected to excessive heat or high voltage transients.
They should be completed in sequence, as each Every effort must be taken to ensure the circuits are
procedure establishes settings and contains not overdriven and they are not disconnected from
prerequisites for subsequent procedures. their loads while turned on. The precautionary
information included in the operating instructions of
NOTE section four should be read and fully understood prior
The transmitter was precisely calibrated and to applying power and must be observed during
subjected to a burn-in during manufacture. It operation.
should not be necessary to change any adjustment,
other than the ones specified. If the tests associated 3.4.2 PRELIMINARY SETTINGS: Verify
with a procedure indicate the preset adjustments are the transmitter is ready to turn on as follows:
not optimum, perform the appropriate adjustment
procedure as detailed in section 5 prior to (a) Verify pre-commissioning requirements of
proceeding with additional tests. paragraph 3.2 and 3.3 have been completed.
The exciter assemblies, except for the B- VDC (b) Set all switches and circuit breakers as
switching power supply and the RF drive tuning tabulated in table 3-4.
PWB, are duplicated and are connected to form an
active and a reserve exciter. The control/monitor (c) Terminate the transmitter's RF output into a
panel's EXCITER switch setting determines which set precision 50 ohm dummy load rated at a
is selected as the active exciter. Refer to the minimum of 10 000 watts.
following listings to determine which PWB
/assembly is selected for a specific EXCITER switch
A or B setting.
WARNING
An optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB
(A8A3) may be installed on the interface panel as If a jumper is placed between the interlock inputs
exciter A's RF drive source. When this option is (TB1-13/TB1-14) on the remote interface PWB,
included, the exciter drawer's 'A' RF drive PWB safety features controlled by the external interlocks
(A6A3) will not be installed and its 'A' modulator will be disabled. It is recommended a fail safe
driver PWB will contain a PWM oscillator. method of alerting personnel to this fact be
implemented. Voltages which are dangerous to life
Exciter A Selected (Stereo Option Not Installed) will be present on RF output stages and the
A - DC Power Supply .................................... A6A1 antenna system if the transmitter is turned on.
A - RF Drive PWB ........................................ A6A3
A - Modulator Driver PWB (Standard) ........... A6A5 (d) Close all external interlocks or temporarily
A - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A2 connect a jumper wire between TB1-13 and
TB1-14 of the remote interface PWB.
Exciter A Selected (Stereo Option Installed)
A - DC Power Supply .................................... A6A1 (e) Turn off the audio input at its source.
A - C-QUAM AM Stereo Exciter PWB .......... A8A3
A - Modulator Driver PWB (c/w PWM Osc) .. A6A5 (f) Set control/monitor panel's (control interface
A - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A2 PWB) ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers fully counter
Exciter B Selected clockwise (minimum of four turns)
B - DC Power Supply .................................... A6A2
B - RF Drive PWB......................................... A6A4 (g) Disconnect the mod drive coaxial cable (P22)
B - Modulator Driver PWB ............................ A6A6 from MOD DRIVE connector J6 on the rear of
B - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A3 the exciter drawer.
Page 3-21
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 3-4 Reference Switch Settings for Initial Turn-on
WHERE SWITCH REF PANEL MARKING/

IS LOCATED DES NOMENCLATURE USED IN TEXT SETTING
Control/Monitor Panel A1S1 CONTROL LOCAL

Control Interface PWB A1A1S11 MAIN EXCITER SELECT OFF
Exciter Drawer A6S1 TEST OFF
Circuit Breaker Panel A7CB1 MAIN POWER OFF
RF Drive Distribution Panel A12S1 RF DRIVE MONO

Relay Control Panel (A-D) A13S1 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - A OFF
A13S2 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - B OFF
A13S3 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - C OFF
A13S4 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - D OFF
(h) If the optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter NOTE

PWB is installed on the interface panel as Exciter B is selected in the following procedures,
exciter A's RF drive source: unless a test specifically requires exciter A to be
selected. This selection ensures the procedures can
- Disable the AM stereo feature and select be used regardless of RF drive source for exciter A.
monaural operation by setting its STEREO
ENABLE switch to MONO. In single exciter transmitters, exciter B's assemblies/
modules are not be installed and exciter A must be
- Inhibit the 25Hz pilot frequency by setting its selected. Second exciter tests should be
PILOT switch to OFF. disregarded.
3.4.3 INITIAL TURN-ON: Switch on the DC (a) Verify the requirements of paragraph 3.4.2
power at the service entrance, turn on the transmitter have been completed.
and observe its alarm and status indicators as
follows: (b) Set the MAIN POWER circuit breaker to ON.
NOTE
Control switches and indicator lamps are located on
Do not change the setting of any adjustment on a the control interface PWB. They are oriented to be
C-QUAM AM stereo exciter (if installed) unless accessible/visible through openings in the front of
specifically directed to do so and then only if test control/monitor panel. They are considered to be
results are not within specified tolerances. on the control/monitor panel in the following.
Improper adjustment may result in emission level
test results being out of tolerance and will probably Unless otherwise stated, all referenced controls and
cause a badly distorted or otherwise unacceptable indicators, are located on or accessible from the
AM stereo output. control/monitor panel in the following.
Page 3-22
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(c) Preset the control interface PWB's local control Table 3-5 Exciter Drawer's Dc Voltage Readings
switches. Press and release the following
switches, noting they are all located on the TEST METER
control/monitor panel: TEST SWITCH
MIN MAX
- ALARM RESET switch
- RF-OFF switch +24V +22.0 +26.0
- SELECT EXCITER-B switch +15V +14.0 +16.0
-15V -14.0 -16.0
- SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 switch.
(a) Sequentially set the exciter drawer's TEST
(d) The control/monitor panel's OUTPUT POWER-
switch to each of its settings. Verify its TEST
LOW 2 and EXCITER-B lamps shall turn on.
meter's readings are within the tolerance
tabulated in table 3-5.
(e) The exciter drawer's POWER B-VDC lamp shall
turn on.
(b) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
EXCITER-A switch and verify the EXCITER-A
(f) All remaining lamps shall be off.
lamp turns on.
NOTE
(c) Repeat step (a) for the 'A' exciter.
Relay control panel A13 is located at the rear of the
transmitter. Refer to figure MD-2 as an aid in
(d) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release SELECT
locating it.
EXCITER-B switch and verify the EXCITER-B
lamp turns on).
(g) The B- VDC lamp on the rear of all RF power
modules shall be off.
3.4.4.2 B- VDC Power Supply (No Load): Verify
the no-load output voltage of the B- VDC power
(h) Turn on the RF power stage. Press/release
supply is satisfactory, as follows:
control/monitor panel's RF-ON switch and note
the RF-ON lamp turns on.
(a) Connect a digital multimeter, set to measure
DC volts, across the control/monitor panel's DC
(i) All cooling air fan of each RF power module
SUPPLY VOLTS meter terminals.
shall turn on.
(b) The digital multimeter indication should be
3.4.4 DC VOLTAGE CHECKS: Check the
between -71.5 VDC and -79.0 VDC.
output voltage of the DC power supplies as follows:
NOTE
NOTE
If voltage reading in step (b) is not within required
The output voltage of the unregulated 24 VDC
limits, the most probable cause is the tap selection
power supply and the B- VDC power supply is
for the power transformer's primary winding.
dependent on the voltage of the AC power source
and the power transformer's primary winding tap
(c) If voltage is acceptable proceed to step (g).
selection.
(d) If voltage in step (b) is less negative than -71.5
(a) Verify requirements of paragraph 3.4.3 are
volts DC, switch off DC power source at
completed and are being met.
service entrance, then select new primary
winding taps for next lower voltage range as
3.4.4.1 Exciter Drawer's DC Power Supplies:
detailed in paragraph 3.3.1.
Check the output voltage of the exciter drawer's low
DC voltage power supplies, for the 'A' and the 'B'
exciter:
Page 3-23
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(e) If voltage in step (b) is more negative than NOTE (Continued)

-79.0 volts DC, switch off DC power source at Refer to figure MD-6 to locate RF drive PWB's that
service entrance, then select new primary are located in the exciter drawer. For assembly
winding taps for next higher voltage range as detail of an RF drive PWB, refer to its service
detailed in paragraph 3.3.1. instruction manual.
(f) If the power transformer's primary winding taps (a) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
were changed, repeat steps (a) and (b). LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
active and Low 2 is the selected preset power
(g) The control/monitor panel's DC SUPPLY level.
VOLTAGE meter indication shall be within 1.0
volts of the reading noted in step (b). (b) Verify the ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers, are fully counter
(h) Record any difference in readings obtained in clockwise.
steps (b) and (g) for future reference.
(c) Connect a frequency counter to the remote
3.4.5 RF DRIVE FREQUENCY/ interface PWB's FREQUENCY MONITOR
PREAMPLIFIER CHECKS: Check frequency connector (J9), using a suitable coaxial cable.
and level of the RF drive being produced by the
exciter drawer's RF drive PWB, as follows: (d) Determine the RF drive source for exciter A
and B, noting:
NOTE
There are three standard factory configured RF - When a C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is
drive options. They are: providing the RF drive (exciter A), its integral
crystal oscillator is the RF drive source.
Transmitters that are not factory configured for C-
QUAM AM stereo operation have two monaural RF - When a monaural RF drive PWB is providing
drive PWBs and two standard modulator driver the RF drive and it has a link connected
PWB's. They are all located in the exciter drawer. between its B and C terminals, its integral
crystal oscillator is the RF drive source.
Transmitters that are factory configured for C-
QUAM AM stereo operation when exciter A is - When a monaural RF drive PWB is providing
selected; have one C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB the RF drive and it has a link connected
(located on the interface panel) and one modulator between its A and C terminals, an external RF
driver PWB which contains an integral PWM generator is the RF drive source.
oscillator. Exciter B has one monaural RF drive
PWB and a standard modulator driver PWB. (e) Check exciter B's RF drive as detailed in
paragraph 3.4.5.1 or 3.4.5.2.
Transmitters that are factory configured for a single
exciter do not have exciter B's modules/assemblies. (f) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release SELECT
Standard transmitters have a monaural RF drive EXCITER-A switch and verify the EXCITER-A
PWB and a standard modulator driver PWB (both lamp turns on).
located in the exciter drawer) installed for exciter A.
AM stereo transmitters have a C-QUAM AM stereo (g) If a monaural RF drive PWB is providing
exciter PWB (located on the interface panel) and a exciter A's RF drive, check the RF drive as
modulator driver PWB which contains an integral detailed in paragraph 3.4.5.1 or 3.4.5.2.
PWM oscillator (located in the exciter drawer)
installed for exciter A. (h) If a C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is
If required, refer to figure MD-10 to locate the C- providing exciter A's RF drive, check the RF
QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB. For assembly drive as detailed in paragraph 3.4.5.3.
detail, refer to its service instruction manual.
Page 3-24
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(i) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the (d) Frequency counter indication shall be the
SELECT EXCITER-B switch) and verify the assigned carrier frequency 5.0Hz or five parts
EXCITER-B lamp turns on). per million (ppm) whichever is greater.
3.4.5.1 Internal RF Drive Source: If the RF drive
source is being produced internally, check the RF (e) If the requirement of step (d) is not met, adjust
drive as follows: carrier frequency of external RF source, until
the frequency counter's indication is the
(a) Verify a link is connected between terminals B assigned carrier frequency.
and C on selected RF drive PWB.
(b) Frequency counter indication shall be the (f) Connect an oscilloscope between terminal C, of
assigned carrier frequency 5.0Hz or five parts active RF drive PWB and ground.
per million (ppm) whichever is greater.
(g) Oscilloscope indication should be a
(c) If the requirement of step (b) is not met, adjust symmetrical (50% duty cycle) waveform (sine
the active RF drive PWB's FREQ ADJUST or square) with a nominal peak-to-peak
trimming capacitor (C14), until the frequency amplitude that is between 5.0 and 12.0 volts.
counter's indication is the assigned carrier
frequency. (h) Connect an oscilloscope between TP2 of the
(d) Connect an oscilloscope between TP2 of the active RF drive PWB and ground.
active RF drive PWB and ground.
(e) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to (i) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to
example depicted in figure 5-1 [symmetrical example depicted in figure 5-1 (symmetrical
(50% duty cycle) square wave with a nominal (50% duty cycle) square wave with a nominal
peak-to-peak amplitude of 15.0 volts]. peak-to-peak amplitude of 15.0 volts].
(f) If necessary, adjust the active RF drive PWB's (j) If necessary, adjust the active RF drive PWB's
SLICER BIAS potentiometer (R4) to obtain a SLICER BIAS potentiometer (R4) to obtain a
symmetrical square wave. symmetrical square wave.
(g) Disconnect oscilloscope.
(k) Disconnect oscilloscope.
3.4.5.2 External RF Drive Source: If the RF
drive is being provided from an external source,
3.4.5.3 AM Stereo RF Drive Source: If the RF
check the RF drive as follows:
drive source is being produced by a C-QUAM AM
stereo exciter PWB, check the RF drive as follows:
(a) Verify the C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's

Ensure peak-to-peak amplitude of external RF STEREO ENABLE switch is set to MONO.
drive does not exceed 12.0 volts. Voltages in excess
of 12.0 volts will over stress RF drive input (b) Frequency counter indication shall be the
components and cause them to overheat. assigned carrier frequency 5.0Hz or five parts
(a) Verify a link is connected between terminals A
and C on active RF drive PWB. (c) If the requirement of step (b) is not met, adjust
the C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's 4 c
(b) Verify an external RF drive is being applied to trimming capacitor (C49), until the frequency
the remote interface PWB's STEREO connector counter's indication is the assigned carrier
(J1). frequency.
(c) Verify the external RF drive input is the
(d) Connect an oscilloscope between TP12 of the
assigned carrier frequency, is unmodulated and
C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB and ground
its amplitude is between 5.0 and 12.0 volts
(TP17).
peak-to-peak (sine or square wave).
Page 3-25
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(e) Oscilloscope indication should similar to the

example depicted in figure 5-1 [symmetrical
(50% duty cycle) square wave with a nominal WARNING
peak-to-peak amplitude of 15.0 volts].
Voltages which are dangerous to life are present on
(f) If necessary, adjust the C-QUAM AM stereo exposed terminals of the power transformer when
exciter PWB's SLICER BIAS potentiometer the side panel is removed. Extreme caution must
(R154) to obtain a symmetrical square wave. be exercised when the panel is removed.
(g) Disconnect oscilloscope. (d) Connect an oscilloscope between TB1-2, of RF

power module A4 and ground, noting access is
3.4.6 RF DRIVE AMPLIFIER CHECKS: gained by removing the side panel.
Check the amplitude of the RF drive being applied to
the RF power amplifier stages, as follows: (e) Oscilloscope indication shall be similar to the
NOTE example in figure 5-3. Waveform's peak-to-
There are two RF drive amplifiers (A/B), one B- peak amplitude shall be between 80.0 and 88.0
VDC switching power supply and one RF drive volts, peak-to-peak.
tuning PWB. The B- VDC switching power supply
and RF drive tuning PWB are common to both RF (f) If necessary, adjust the B- VDC switching
drive amplifiers. Refer to figures MD-17/MD-18 as power supply's B- Adjust potentiometer for an
an aid to locating these assemblies, noting RF drive oscilloscope indication of 84.0 volts, peak-to-
amplifier A is A12A2, RF drive amplifier B is peak (noting the B- VDC switching power
A12A3, the B- VDC switching power supply is supply is mounted on the rear of the RF drive
A12A1 and the RF drive tuning PWB is A12A4. distribution panel and access to it is gained by
Refer to figure MD-19 for the RF drive tuning removing the left-hand side panel).
PWB's assembly detail and to the appropriate
service instruction manual for assembly detail of the (g) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release SELECT
RF drive amplifier's and the B- VDC switching EXCITER-A switch and verify the EXCITER-A
power supply. lamp turns on.
(a) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- (h) Repeat steps (d) thru (f) for the A exciter.
LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is active
and Low 2 is the selected preset power level. (i) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release SELECT
lamp turns on).
3.4.6.1 RF Drive Level Detector Check: Check
the amplitude of the RF drive tuning PWB's RF drive
Use extreme care when connecting/disconnecting level output, noting it is monitored by the low RF
the oscilloscope probe in the following procedures. drive alarm circuit, as follows:
Do not allow the probe to short the RF drive to
ground. (a) Connect a digital multimeter, that is preset to
measure DC volts, between TB1-10(+) of the
(b) Connect an oscilloscope to monitor the active RF drive tuning PWB (see figure MD-19) and
RF drive amplifier's RF drive input between chassis ground.
terminal 1 of resistor R1 and ground (A12A3 is
in use when exciter B is selected and A12A2 is (b) The digital multimeter's indication should be
in use when exciter A is selected). between 38.0 and 40.0 VDC.
(c) Oscilloscope indication shall be similar to the (c) If necessary, adjust the RF drive tuning PWB's
example in figure 5-2. Waveform's peak-to- Level Threshold Adjust potentiometer for a
peak amplitude should be a nominal 20 volts. reading of 39.0 VDC.
Page 3-26
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.4.7 MOD DRIVE CHECKS: Check critical (c) Connect a frequency counter between TP4 of
parameters of the variable pulse width modulation active modulator driver PWB and ground.
drive signal, as follows:
(d) Frequency counter's indication shall be the
NOTE pulse width modulation frequency (PWM). It
Two modulator driver PWBs (A and B) are located should be between 70.0 and 96.63 kHz. Refer
in the exciter drawer. Refer to figure MD-6 to to Transmitter Configuration Sheet for
locate them, noting the A mod driver is A1 and the B factory determined value of 2c/N (see
mod driver is A2. For assembly detail of a paragraph 3.3.4.3).
modulator driver PWB, refer to its service
instruction manual. NOTE
The factory determined PWM frequency (PWM) for a
3.4.7.1 Mod Drive Check Pre-Requisites: transmitter may be outside the tolerance specified in
Perform the following mod drive check pre-requisites: step (d). See paragraph 3.3.4.
(a) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- (e) Connect the oscilloscope between TP4 of the
LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is active modulator driver PWB and ground.
level. NOTE
When preset PWM is unknown, enter table 3-3 and
(b) Inhibit exciter drawer's DC power source by determine 'N' for assigned carrier frequency (c). If
turning transmitter off (press/release RF-OFF c is less than 1280kHz, divide it by the number
switch and note RF-ON lamp turns off). tabulated as 'N'. If c is 1280kHz or more, divide it
by twice the number tabulated as 'N'.
(c) Disconnect or verify the Mod Drive coaxial
cable is disconnected from the exciter drawer's (f) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to
MOD DRIVE output connector (J6). example depicted in figure 5-5. Waveform
should be a square wave with a nominal peak-
(d) Enable the B-VDC(sample) to the modulator to-peak amplitude of 15.0 volts at the PWM
driver PWBs, by setting one of the relay control frequency
panel's RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch
to ON. 3.4.7.3 PWM (PWM Oscillator): When the active
(e) Activate exciter drawer's DC power source by modulator driver PWB is the /02 variation and it uses
turning transmitter on (press/release RF-ON its own integral PWM oscillator to produce the PWM
switch and note the RF-ON lamp turns on. frequency (PWM), proceed as follows:
3.4.7.2 PWM (2 c/N Input): When the active (a) Connect a frequency counter between TP4 of
modulator driver PWB is the /01 variation and it uses active modulator driver PWB and ground.
the RF drive source's 2c/N output to produce the
PWM frequency (PWM), proceed as follows: (b) Frequency counter's indication shall be the
pulse width modulation frequency (PWM)
(a) Connect an oscilloscope between the /2 terminal recorded on the transmitter configuration sheet
associated with terminal B of the active provided with the factory test results. It should
modulator driver PWB and ground. be between 80.0 and 90.6kHz.
(b) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to

example depicted in figure 5-4. Waveform
should be positive going 2c/N pulses. Refer to
Transmitter Configuration Sheet for factory
determined value of 2c/N (see paragraph
3.3.4.3).
Page 3-27
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
NOTE (e) Monitor oscilloscope and turn ADJUST-LOW 2

Calculate PWM using the following formula, noting potentiometer clockwise until a rectangular
the resultant must be between 80.0 and 90.6kHz. waveform with an on (positive peak)/off
(negative peak) ratio of 40/60 (40% duty cycle)
is attained.
(f) Oscilloscope waveform shall increase linearly

and continuously from a 0/100 ratio (zero volts
DC trace) to a rectangular waveform with a
40/60 ratio (40% at 15 VDC/60% at 0 VDC),
as the ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer is
adjusted. Final waveform shall be similar to
the example in figure 5-7.
(g) Set the ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer fully

counter clockwise.
(h) Select low 1 power level (press/release the
SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LO 1 switch and
verify the OUTPUT POWER-LOW 1 lamp turns
on.
(i) Repeat steps (a) thru (g), substituting ADJUST-
LOW 1 potentiometer where ADJUST-LOW 2
(c) Connect the oscilloscope between TP4 of the potentiometer is specified.
active modulator driver PWB and ground. (j) Select high power level (press/release the
SELECT OUTPUT POWER-HIGH switch and
(d) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to verify the OUTPUT POWER-HIGH lamp turns
example depicted in figure 5-5. Waveform on.
to-peak amplitude of 15.0 volts at the PWM (k) Verify oscilloscope is connected between TP10
frequency of active mod driver PWB and ground.
3.4.7.4 PWM Checks: Verify the variable pulse (l) Oscilloscope waveform indication should be a
width modulation (PWM) waveforms are correct as rectangular waveform with an on (positive
follows: peak)/off (negative peak) ratio of 25/75 (25%
duty cycle).
(a) Connect an oscilloscope between TP6 of the
active modulator driver PWB and ground. (m) Monitor oscilloscope and turn ADJUST-HIGH
potentiometer clockwise until a waveform with
(b) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to an on (positive peak)/off (negative peak) ratio
example depicted in figure 5-6. It should be a of 40/60 (40% duty cycle) is attained.
triangular waveform with a nominal peak- to-
peak amplitude of 4.0 volts. Its negative going (n) Waveform's on/off ratio shall increase linearly
peaks should just touch zero volts DC. Its and continuously from a 25/75 ratio to a 40/60
frequency should be the PWM. ratio (40% at 15 VDC/60% at 0 VDC), as
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer is adjusted. Final
(c) Connect the oscilloscope between TP10 of the waveform shall be similar to the example in
active modulator driver PWB and ground. figure 5-7.
(d) Oscilloscope waveform indication should be a (o) Set the ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer fully
zero volt DC trace with nominal +15 VDC counter clockwise.
spikes at PWM.
Page 3-28
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(p) Return to low 2 power level (press/release the (b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 switch and LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
verify OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 lamp turns on. active and Low 2 is the selected preset power
level.
(q) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release SELECT
EXCITER-A switch and verify the EXCITER-A (c) Verify the ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and
lamp turns on). ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers, are fully counter
clockwise.
(r) Check the variable pulse width modulation
frequency (PWM) as detailed in paragraph (d) Verify the cooling air fan of each RF power
3.4.7.2 or 3.4.7.3 and then repeat steps (a) thru module is operating, noting a fan is located on
(p) for the 'A' exciter. the rear of each RF power module.
3.4.7.5 Completion of Mod Drive Checks: When (e) Verify the control/monitor panel's RF-ON lamp
the mod drive checks have been completed, return to is on, indicating the RF drive/mod drive stages
the pre-check conditions as follows: are enabled.
(a) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release SELECT (f) Verify the B- VDC reading on the control/
EXCITER-B switch and verify the EXCITER-B monitor panel's DC SUPPLY VOLTS meter is
lamp turns on). between -71.5 VDC and -79.0 volts.
(b) Inhibit exciter drawer's DC power source by 3.4.8.1 Charging of B- VDC Storage Capacitors:
turning transmitter off (press/release RF-OFF Apply the B- VDC voltage to the large electrolytic
switch and note the RF-ON lamp turns off). storage capacitors in each RF power module as
follows:
(c) Connect Mod Drive coaxial cables removed in
step (c) of paragraph 3.4.7.1 to the exciter NOTE
drawer's MOD DRIVE output connector (J6). RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switches are on the
relay control panel, which is located and accessed
(d) Verify the ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and from the rear of the cabinet (see figure MD-2 to
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers, are fully counter locate the relay control panel and then to figure
clockwise. MD-20/MD-21 for its assembly detail).
(e) Activate exciter drawer's DC power source by (a) Set the RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch
turning transmitter on (press/release RF-ON of the RF power module to be turned on to its
switch and note the RF-ON lamp turns on. ON position.
3.4.8 INITIAL TURN-ON OF RF POWER (b) The B-VDC lamp of the RF power module
MODULES: Turn on each RF power module being turned on should turn on within three
independently and verify the charge control circuitry seconds.
for its B- VDC storage capacitor is functioning, as
follows: (c) The reading on the control/monitor panel's DC
SUPPLY CURRENT meter shall be near zero,
NOTE indicating the current being consumed by the
Refer to figure MD-1 to identify RF power modules RF power modules that have been turned on is
A2 thru A5. For assembly detail of an RF power a nominal zero amperes.
module, refer to its service instruction manual.
(d) Repeat steps (a) thru (c) for each RF power
(a) Verify the requirements of paragraphs 3.4.2 module.
thru 3.4.7 have been successfully completed.
Page 3-29
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
3.4.9 RF POWER AMPLIFIER CHECK: NOTE

Verify the RF power amplifier stage is functioning Indication on DC SUPPLY CURRENT meter is the
and each RF power module is contributing equally to current being drawn from B- VDC power supply.
the RF output, by monitoring the appropriate meters The maximum current range specified in step (g) is
and alarm lamps as follows: applicable when the B- output is -71.5 VDC and the
NOTE minimum current range is applicable when the B-
The PA FAIL and MOD FAIL alarm lamps on one or output is -79.0 VDC.
more RF power modules may be on at this point.
These alarms should reset when RF power is being (h) Slowly adjust ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer
produced in step (d). clockwise for an RF output power level of
approximately 5500 watts, as indicated by the
(a) Verify the requirements of paragraphs 3.4.2 FORWARD POWER meter.
thru 3.4.8 have been successfully completed.
(b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- (i) The REFLECTED POWER meter indication shall
LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is be less than 50 watts.
level. NOTE
The reflected power indication is dependent on the
(c) Verify the control/monitor panel's, ADJUST- impedance of the transmitter's RF output
LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and ADJUST-HIGH terminating load. The reflected power level should
potentiometers, are fully counter clockwise. be near zero watts when the load impedance is
precisely 50 ohms at the carrier frequency.
(j) All ALARM lamps, including ALARM lamps of

each RF power module, shall be off.
Monitor all meters and ALARM lamps when
increasing RF power output level. Discontinue 3.4.10 B- VOLTAGE CHECK - FULL LOAD:
any further increase if an abnormal meter Verify the full-load output voltage of the B- voltage
indication is observed or if an ALARM lamp turns power supply is between -69.0 and -76.0 volts DC as
on. follows:
(d) Slowly adjust, ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer (a) Adjust control/monitor panel's, ADJUST-LOW 2
clockwise for an RF output power level of potentiometer for an RF output of 5000 watts,
approximately 1500 watts, as indicated by the as indicated by the control/monitor panel's
FORWARD POWER meter. FORWARD POWER meter.
NOTE (b) The control/monitor panel's DC SUPPLY

To obtain a more accurate reading when RF output VOLTAGE meter indication shall be between
is less than 1750 watts, press control/monitor -69.0 volts DC and -76.0 volts DC.
panel's READ LOWER SCALE switch and read the
lower scale of the FORWARD POWER meter. NOTE
If voltage reading in step (b) is not within the
(e) Control/monitor panel's REFLECTED POWER required limits, the most probable cause is the
meter should indicate near zero watts. power transformer primary winding tap selection.
(f) All ALARM lamps, including ALARM lamps of (c) If voltage reading in step (b) is less negative
each RF power module, shall be off. than -69.0 VDC, switch off DC power source
at the service entrance; change primary
(g) The control/monitor panel's DC SUPPLY winding taps, as detailed in paragraph 3.3.1,
CURRENT meter indication should be between using the taps tabulated for the next lower
22 and 28 amperes. Record DC supply voltage range in table 3-1 and then repeat step
current reading for future reference. (b).
Page 3-30
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(d) If the voltage reading in step (b) is more FUNCTIONAL TESTS/FINAL ADJUSTMENTS
negative than -76.0 VDC, switch off AC power 3.5 Perform the final adjustments; to provide
source at the service entrance; change the the desired RF output power levels; the desired audio
primary winding taps, as detailed in paragraph characteristics and modulation envelope; and then
3.3.1, using the taps tabulated for the next perform a functional check as detailed in section 5.
higher voltage range in table 3-1 and then
repeat step (b).
Page 3-31
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 4
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
GENERAL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

4.1 The following instructions are primarily 4.3 A table is referenced for each module/
intended for persons involved in testing or assembly that contains controls and/or indicators.
maintenance of the equipment. Each table identifies the panel marking, or when there
is no marking, the nomenclature used in text, the
reference designation assigned to each item and a
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE description of each control/indicator's purpose/
4.2 There are no special precautions to be taken function.
if an emergency shutdown is required, but the type of
shutdown will be dictated by the reason for the 4.3.1 RF POWER MODULE CONTROLS
shutdown. There are two types of shutdown, the first AND INDICATORS: Table 4-2 lists the RF power
turns off the RF output by inhibiting the exciter and module controls and indicators. Refer to figure MD-
power amplifier stages. The second turns off the RF 1 to locate the RF power modules, noting their
output and disables all of the internal power supplies reference designations are A2 thru A5. The RF
by disconnecting the AC power source. power module has its own service manual. Refer to
this manual for its assembly detail.
4.2.1 TURN-OFF OF RF OUTPUT: When the
cause of the emergency shutdown is external to the 4.3.2 CONTROL/MONITOR PANEL
transmitter or is in the RF output portion of the CONTROLS AND INDICATORS: Table 4-3
transmitter, the following will inhibit the exciter and lists the control/monitor panel's controls and
power amplifier stages: indicators. Refer to figure MD-1 to locate the
control/ monitor panel, noting its reference
designation is A1, and then refer to figures MD-3 and
WARNING MD-4 for its assembly detail.
The following will not turn off the B- VDC power 4.3.3 INTERFACE PANEL CONTROLS
source. If the reason for an emergency shutdown AND INDICATORS: Table 4-4 lists the interface
requires the B- VDC voltage to be turned off, panel's controls and indicators. Refer to figure MD-1
proceed directly to paragraph 4.2.2. to locate the interface panel, noting its reference
designation is A8, and then refer to figure MD-10 for
(a) If in remote control, select RF OFF at the its assembly detail. Each of the interface panel's
remote control site. PWB/assemblies has its own service manuals. Refer
to the appropriate manual for the assembly detail of a
(b) If the front of the transmitter is accessible, specific PWB/assembly.
press and release the control/monitor panel's RF
OFF switch (local or remote control). 4.3.4 EXCITER DRAWER CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS: Table 4-5 lists the exciter
(c) Open any external interlock switch. drawer's controls and indicators. Refer to figure
MD-1 to locate the exciter drawer, noting its
4.2.2 COMPLETE SHUTDOWN: When the reference designation is A6, and then refer to figures
cause of the emergency shutdown dictates the need MD-5 thru MD-8 for its assembly detail. Each of the
for a complete shutdown of the transmitter, open exciter drawer's PWB/assemblies has its own service
(turn off) the circuit breaker panel's MAIN POWER manuals. Refer to the appropriate manual for the
circuit breaker or switch off the AC power source at assembly detail of a specific PWB/assembly.
the service entrance.
Page 4-1
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
4.3.5 RF OUTPUT FILTER CONTROLS (d) Verify all panels/covers are installed and their
AND INDICATORS: Table 4-6 lists the RF output attaching hardware is firmly secured.
filter's controls and indicators. Refer to figure MD-1
to locate the RF output filter, noting its reference (e) Verify the transmitter RF output is terminated
designation is A9, and then refer to figures MD-11 into a 50 ohm load - an antenna that is
thru MD-14 for its assembly detail. interfaced by an appropriate matching system
for normal operation, or a 50 ohm resistive
4.3.6 RF DRIVE DISTRIBUTION PANEL dummy load that is rated at 10 000 watts for
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS: Table 4-7 adjustment and testing procedures.
lists the RF drive distribution panel's controls and
indicators. Refer to figure MD-2 to locate the RF (f) Verify appropriate primary winding taps of the
drive distribution panel noting its reference power transformer have been selected to match
designation is A12, and then refer to figure MD-17 the voltage of the input power source (refer to
and MD-18 for its assembly detail. paragraph 3.3).
4.3.7 RELAY CONTROL PANEL (g) Verify the power source has a minimum rating
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS: Table 4-8 of 13kVA.
lists the relay control panel controls and indicators.
Refer to figure MD-2 to locate the relay control
panel, noting its reference designation is A13 and TURNING ON THE TRANSMITTER
then refer to figures MD-20 and MD-21 for its 4.5 Turn on the transmitter as described in
assembly detail. paragraph 3.4 for initial startup and after repairs that
may have affected the tuning of frequency sensitive
4.3.8 FUSE BLOCK ASSEMBLY circuits. At other times, set the switches to their
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS: Table 4-9 appropriate positions.
lists the fuse block assembly's controls and
indicators. Refer to figure MD-2 to locate the fuse
block assembly, noting its reference designation is RF POWER MODULE SWITCH SETTINGS
A15, and then refer to figure MD-24 for its assembly 4.6 The four RF power modules have an
detail. associated RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch
located on relay control panel A13.
4.3.9 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS: Table 4-10 4.6.1 Each RF POWER MODULE CONTROL
lists the circuit breaker panel's controls and switch controls the charge/discharge status of its
indicators. Refer to figures MD-1 to locate the associated RF power module's B-VDC storage
circuit breaker panel, noting its reference designation capacitors at initial turn-on. The relay control panel's
is A7, and then refer to figure MD-9 for its assembly relay control PWB (A1) controls the operating status
detail. of its associated RF power module's high current B-
VDC being applied from the AC/DC power supply.
PRE-STARTUP CHECKS
4.4 Prior to applying input power to the - When an RF power module is installed and it is
transmitter, observe the following: required to contribute to the transmitter's RF
output, its associated RF POWER MODULE
(a) Verify all assemblies/modules are installed and
CONTROL switch must be set to ON.
mating connectors are fully engaged.
(b) Verify the external input/output wiring is - When an RF power module must be switched
connected as detailed in paragraph 3.2. off or it is not installed, its associated RF
POWER MODULE CONTROL switch must be set
(c) Visually inspect the internal electrical wiring to OFF.
for defects such as; damaged insulation, broken
wires, wrong connections and/or loose
connections.
Page 4-2
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
MODULATION LEVELS REMOVAL OF RF POWER MODULE

4.7 The modulating audio's gain control is 4.9 The large B-VDC, electrolytic, storage,
factory set for a 100 percent modulation envelope capacitors in an RF power module must be
when the input audio is a pure sine wave and its discharged prior to disconnecting its connectors and
amplitude is +10dBm at 600 ohms. If necessary, the removing it from the transmitter. Follow the
gain control can be adjusted to obtain this modulation instructions detailed in paragraph 6.5 to turn off an
envelope when the amplitude of the input audio is RF power module that must be removed while the
between 0.0dBm and +12dBm at 600 ohms. If the transmitter remains on-air. At all other times turn off
station's audio processing equipment can produce a the B-VDC power supply, to discharge the storage
more positive than negative audio waveform, the gain capacitors, by switching off the AC power source.
control can be set to provide a modulation envelope This is accomplished by opening (turning off) the
with 125 percent positive peaks, provided the circuit breaker panel's MAIN POWER circuit breaker
negative valleys do not exceed 100 percent, when the or switching off the AC power source at the service
carrier level is 5500 watts. entrance.
NOTE NOTE
Once the gain of the modulating audio stage has When the exciter drawer's B-VDC lamp is on, AC
been established, the amplitude of the input audio power is being applied to the power transformer and
must be controlled by the station audio processing the B- VDC power supply is producing a potentially
equipment. Circuits that monitor the positive high current negative voltage.
modulation peaks, will limit their on time when RF
current stress limits are exceeded. If this occurs or The B-VDC lamp on the rear of an RF power module
the negative valleys exceed 100 percent, distortion indicates the charge status of its storage capacitors.
will be present in the demodulated audio. When it is not fully off, the storage capacitor
contains a charge and it is not permissible to
disconnect its mating connectors.
VERIFICATION OF PA FAILURE ALARMS
4.8 Transients may occasionally trigger the
failure detection circuit in a modulator/power OPERATION WITH DEFECTIVE OR MISSING
amplifier assembly and cause one or more of the RF RF POWER MODULES:
power module's ALARM lamps to turn on. The 4.10 It is permissible to operate the transmitter
transmitter should be momentarily switched off and with a defective or missing RF power module,
then on to reset the alarm circuits. provided following precautions/procedures are
observed:
- If the offending ALARM lamp does not turn on 4.10.1 If an RF power module has one or more
when RF power is restored, the fault was a defective modulator/power amplifier assemblies, as
false alarm triggered by a transient. indicated by its ALARM lamps, but it is still
contributing to transmitter's RF output; RF power
- If the offending ALARM lamp turns on when RF module may be left on. A reduction in carrier level is
power is restored, a fault exists in one or more the only consequence. Refer to table 4-1 to determine
modulator/power amplifiers in the RF power reduction in forward power that can be expected with
module. different quantities of defective modulator/power
amplifier assemblies.
Do not attempt to compensate for any RF power

reduction caused by modulator/power amplifier
assembly failures by adjusting RF power level
controls.
Page 4-3
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-1 PA Failures Versus RF Output
DISABLED MOD/POWER AMPLIFIERS POWER REDUCTION NOMINAL

AND/OR RELATIVE TO RF CARRIER
RF POWER MODULES 5000 WATTS OUTPUT
One Modulator/Power Amplifier -0.76dB 4200 Watts

Two Modulator/Power Amplifiers -1.60dB 3500 Watts
One RF Power Module -2.50dB 2800 Watts
Two RF Power Modules -6.00dB 1200 Watts
4.10.2 If an RF power module must be removed, it OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

must be turned off prior to disengaging its mating 4.11 The subject transmitter contains many solid
connectors. state devices that may be damaged if subjected to
excessive heat or high voltage transients. Every
effort must be taken to ensure the circuits are not
overdriven and they are not disconnected from their
Ensure the RF power module's associated RF loads while turned on. The following should be
POWER MODULE CONTROL switch is switched to routinely observed.
OFF.
4.11.1 The DC current being consumed by the RF
These procedures should be observed regardless of power module(s) must not exceed prescribed
the transmitter's on/off status. maximums for specific carrier levels (modulated or
unmodulated). The control/monitor panel's DC
NOTE SUPPLY CURRENT meter provides an indication of
It is permissible to operate a transmitter with an RF the current being drawn from the B- VDC power
power module removed, provided requirements of supply by the RF power stage. This current
steps (a) thru (c) are met and being maintained. consumption, which is representative of the RF
current being produced, is referred to as the DC
There are three modulator/power amplifiers in each supply current. It is recommended the DC supply
RF power module. current be routinely monitored, especially when the
carrier level or modulation depth are changed.
(a) Switch the associated RF POWER MODULE
CONTROL switch (located on relay control 4.11.2 The transmitter's RF output must be applied
panel) to OFF. to a 50-ohm load (antenna or resistive dummy load).
The load must not be disconnected from or connected
(b) Wait until the B- VDC voltage, stored in the to the transmitter when an RF output is being
RF power module's electrolytic capacitors, has produced. The RF output must be turned off prior to
decayed to near zero volts, as indicated by changing the load. Operation into an open circuit is
brilliance of the B- VDC lamp on its rear panel. not recommended.
(c) Disengage mating connectors and remove the

RF power module.
Page 4-4
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
4.11.3 The graph in figure 4-1 plots the DC supply ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTION
current reading versus the RF carrier's forward 4.14 The transmitter's assemblies contain
power level to determine if the DC supply current is semiconductor devices that are susceptible to damage
within prescribed limits. The results are only valid if from electrostatic discharge. Prior to removing an
all four RF power modules are contributing their full assembly from the transmitter, and while servicing an
share to the RF output. The graph depicts assembly, the following precautions must be
maximums for: observed:
- RF carrier only (no mod) when B- VDC is - NOTE

69.0. Electrostatic energy is produced when two
insulating materials are rubbed together. A person
- RF carrier only (no mod) when B- VDC is - wearing rubber-soled shoes, walking across a nylon
72.0. carpet or a waxed floor, can generate an extremely
large electrostatic charge. This effect is magnified
- modulated carrier (normal program material). during periods of low humidity.
- 100% modulated carrier (sine wave) Components such as integrated circuits, field-effect
transistors, thyristors, and Schottky diodes may be
4.11.4 If an RF power module has been removed, damaged by this high voltage unless adequate
ensure its associated RF POWER MODULE CONTROL precautions are taken.
switch has been set to OFF. See paragraph 4.10.
4.14.1 PERSONAL DISCHARGING:
Maintainers should be electrically discharged by a
READING FORWARD POWER METER suitable grounding system (anti-static mats,
4.12 The FORWARD POWER meter has two grounding straps) during removal of an assembly
scales. The upper scale is normally in-circuit. When from the transmitter and while handling the assembly
the power level is less than 1750 watts, a more for maintenance procedures.
precise reading can be obtained by depressing the
READ LOWER SCALE switch and reading the lower 4.14.2 HANDLING/STORAGE: The assembly
scale. should be placed in an anti-static bag when it is not
installed in a host transmitter or when it is not being
NOTE subjected to maintenance procedures. Electronic
The FORWARD POWER meter has square law scales. components should be stored in anti-static materials.
Resulting non-linearity makes it difficult to read less
than 500 watts on the upper scale and 125 watts on 4.14.3 TOOLS/TEST EQUIPMENT: Testing
the lower scale. and maintenance equipment, including soldering and
unsoldering tools, should be suitable for contact with
static sensitive semiconductor devices.
REMOTE OPERATION
4.13 The transmitter's on/off status, preset power 4.14.4 STRESS CURRENT PROTECTION:
level selection and its active exciter selection can be Every precaution should be taken to ensure the static
controlled remotely. When the control/monitor sensitive semiconductor devices are protected from
panel's CONTROL switch is set to REMOTE, these unnecessary stress current. This is achieved by
functions are controlled from a remote location. ensuring:
When the CONTROL switch is set to LOCAL the
remote controls have no influence. The remote - current is not flowing when an electrical
alarm/status monitoring is independent of and is not connection is broken.
affected by the local/remote selection.
- voltages are not present on external control/
monitoring circuits when they are connected.
Page 4-5
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 4-6
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Figure 4-1 DC Input Current Versus RF Carrier Forward Power

Page 4-7
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-2 RF Power Module Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
REF FIG NOMENCLATURE FUNCTION
DES NO. USED IN TEXT
DS1 - B- VDC Indicates charge state of large, electrolytic storage

capacitors connected across B- VDC input to the RF
power module.
When fully turned on (maximum brightness), indicates

large, electrolytic storage capacitors are charged to the
B- VDC (nominally -72 VDC).
When partially turned on, indicates storage capacitors

are charging or not fully discharged.
When turned off, indicates storage capacitors are fully

discharged.
L1 - RF Drive Tune Adjusted to precisely tune the RF drive input's parallel

L/C circuit; formed by L1 and the sum of the reflected
capacitance, from power MOSFETs in the modulator/
power amplifier's, for minimum RF drive current at
the carrier frequency (c).
A4DS1 - PA FAIL ALARM - A When turned on, indicates modulator/power amplifier

A1 has failed and is not contributing to the RF power
module's output. Normally caused by the failure of
one or more power MOSFET's, in A1's power
amplifier stage, being sensed by its RF drive current
imbalance detector.
A4DS2 - PA FAIL ALARM - B When turned on, indicates modulator/power amplifier

imbalance detector.
A4DS3 - PA FAIL ALARM - C When turned on, indicates modulator/power amplifier

imbalance detector.
A4DS4 - MOD FAIL ALARM - A When turned on, indicates the PA volts output of
modulator/amplifier A1 is less negative than the
average PA volts of all three modulator/power
amplifiers, as the result of a modulator failure.
Page 4-8
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-2 RF Power Module Controls and Indicators (Continued)
PANEL MARKING/
A4DS5 - MOD FAIL ALARM - B When turned on, indicates the PA volts output of
A4DS6 - MOD FAIL ALARM - C When turned on, indicates the PA volts output of
NOTE: Partial reference designation shown. Prefix with A2, A3, A4, A5 for full reference
designation.
Figures MD-1 and MD-2 depict the location of the RF power module, but do not show the detail of its
controls and indicators. Refer to the RF power module's service instruction manual for its assembly
detail.
Page 4-9
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-3 Control/Monitor Panel Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
A1BT1 MD-4 Battery Acts as an uninterruptible power supply for alarm

display circuits. Provides 9.0 VDC, when AC power
source is inadvertently turned off or when a power
failure occurs, that permits the active alarm
information to be retained.
A1DS1 MD-3 INTERLOCK OPEN ALARM When turned on, indicates the exciter stages and
power amplifier stages have been inhibited (RF output
turned off) because an external interlock switch is
open. Normal operation is restored and the
INTERLOCK OPEN ALARM lamp will turn off when all
interlock switches are closed.
A1DS2 MD-3 DETUNED RF DRIVE ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output is shutback
(turned off) because the load for the RF drive
amplifier is not tuned to the carrier frequency. The
lamp will not turn off and normal operation will not be
restored until DETUNED RF DRIVE RESET switch is
activated, after the cause of the alarm has been
removed.
A1DS3 MD-3 EXCITER - B When turned on, indicates exciter B is enabled and
providing variable pulse width modulator drive, RF
drive and low level DC voltages.
A1DS4 MD-3 RF - ON When turned on, indicates the exciter stages and the
RF power amplifiers are enabled.
A1DS5 MD-3 HIGH B-VDC ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output has been
shutback (turned off), since the alarm circuits were
reset, because output voltage of the B- VDC power
supply has exceeded the high B- VDC threshold (more
negative than -85.0 VDC). If cause of alarm is
removed, normal operation is restored, but HIGH B-
VDC ALARM lamp shall remain on.
A1DS6 MD-3 HIGH AC PWR ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output has been
reset, because the voltage of the AC power source was
excessive and caused the output of the unregulated 24
VDC power supply to exceed the high AC power
threshold (more than 10% above nominal). If cause of
alarm is removed, normal operation is restored, but
HIGH AC PWR ALARM lamp shall remain on.
Page 4-10
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-3 Control/Monitor Panel Controls and Indicators (Continued)
PANEL MARKING/
A1DS7 MD-3 LOW AC PWR ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output has been
reset, because the AC power source voltage was low
and caused the unregulated 24 VDC power supply's
output to fall below the low AC power threshold
(more than 10% below nominal). If cause of alarm is
removed, normal operation is restored, but LOW AC
PWR ALARM lamp shall remain on.
A1DS8 MD-3 LOW RF DRIVE ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output has been
reset, because the DC voltage that is representative of
the RF drive level was less than the low RF drive
threshold (less than 36 VDC). If cause of alarm is
removed, normal operation is restored, but LOW RF
DRIVE ALARM lamp shall remain on.
A1DS9 MD-3 SWR SHUTBACK ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output has been
reset, because the reflected power exceeded the
reflected power threshold (800 50 watts). If cause of
alarm is removed, normal operation is restored, but
SWR SHUTBACK ALARM lamp shall remain on.
A1DS10 MD-3 HIGH RF CURRENT ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output has been
reset, because the RF current flowing in the RF output
filter exceeded the RF power module's stress current
threshold. If cause of alarm is removed, normal
operation is restored, but HIGH RF CURRENT ALARM
lamp shall remain on.
A1DS11 - Not Used
A1DS12 MD-3 SWR CUTBACK ALARM When turned on, indicates the RF output is being
cutback (reduced) because it was shutback (turned
off) four times or more, by the SWR shutback circuit
(reflected power in excess of 800 watts) or the high
RF current shutback circuit, in any 20 second period,
since the alarm circuit was reset. If shutback counter
is reset by 20 second clock, normal operation is
restored, but SWR CUTBACK ALARM lamp shall
remain on.
Page 4-11
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 43 Control/Monitor Panel Controls and Indicators (Continued)
PANEL MARKING/
A1DS13 MD-3 HIGH OUTPUT POWER When turned on, indicates the high power level
STATUS circuitry is enabled and the transmitter's RF output
will be the preset high power level.
A1DS14 MD-3 LOW 1 OUTPUT POWER When turned on, indicates the low 1 power level
will be the preset low 1 power level.
A1DS15 MD-3 LOW 2 OUTPUT POWER When turned on, indicates the low 2 power level
will be the preset low 2 power level.
A1DS16 MD-3 AUTO OUTPUT POWER When turned on, indicates the reference voltage that
STATUS determines the carrier level of the RF output is being
provided by an optional auxilliary power control PWB
or by an external micro processor based RF power
level controller.
A1DS17 MD-3 EXCITER - A When turned on, indicates exciter A is enabled and
providing variable pulse width modulator drive, RF
drive and low level DC voltages.
A1DS18 BAT OK When turned on, indicates the charge state of the 9.0
volt battery on the control interface PWB is adequate
to maintain the fault alarm memory if AC power is
lost.
A1R10 B-VDC THRSHLD Adjusted to set high B- VDC threshold to -85.0 VDC.
Establishes reference point that causes RF output to
be shutback and HIGH B-VDC ALARM to be activated.
A1R17 HIGH AC THRESHOLD Adjusted to set high AC power fault threshold to ten
percent above the nominal AC power source voltage.
Causes RF output to be shutback and HIGH AC PWR
ALARM to be activated when voltage of AC power
source exceeds this threshold.
A1R77 LOW 1 MONITOR Adjusted to set the RF envelope monitor when the
Low 1 power level is selected.
A1R78 HIGH MONITOR Adjusted to set the RF envelope monitor when the
High power level is selected.
Page 4-12
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
PANEL MARKING/
A1R79 LOW 2 MONITOR Adjusted to set the RF envelope monitor when the
Low 2 power level is selected.
A1R95 POWER LIMIT Adjusted to limit the unmodulated RF output to 5500

watts when any power level ADJUST potentiometer
(HIGH, LOW 1 or LOW 2) is set for maximum output
(fully clockwise).
A1R100 MD-3 LOW 2 ADJUST Adjusted to set carrier portion of the RF output to
desired level when Low 2 power level is selected.
A1R103 MD-3 HIGH ADJUST Adjusted to set carrier portion of the RF output to
desired level when High power level is selected (3500
watts min/5500 watts max).
A1R105 MD-3 LOW 1 ADJUST Adjusted to set carrier portion of the RF output to
desired level when Low 1 power level is selected.
A1R111 CURRENT THRESHOLD Adjusted to set the high RF current threshold to a level
that represents the stress current limits of the RF
power module. Limit cannot be precisely defined as it
includes complex factors such as peak current,
average current and the rise/fall time of the
modulating audio. Establishes the reference point that
causes the RF output to be shutback and HIGH RF
CURRENT ALARM to be activated.
A1R149 LOW AC THRESHOLD Adjusted to set low AC power fault threshold to ten
percent below the nominal voltage of the AC power
source. Causes RF output to be shutback and LOW
AC PWR ALARM to be activated when voltage of AC
power source falls below this threshold.
A1S1 MD-3 SELECT - EXCITER A Sets the exciter A/B latching relay to its exciter A
position when pressed and released, provided
CONTROL switch is set to LOCAL. Enables exciter A
as the variable pulse width modulator drive, RF drive
and low DC voltage source for the transmitter. This
switch is disabled and has no influence when
CONTROL switch is set to REMOTE.
Page 4-13
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
PANEL MARKING/
A1S2 MD-3 SELECT - EXCITER B Sets the exciter A/B latching relay to its exciter B
position when pressed and released, provided
CONTROL switch is set to LOCAL. Enables exciter B
as the variable pulse width modulator drive, RF drive
and low DC voltage source for the transmitter. This
switch is disabled and has no influence when
CONTROL switch is set to REMOTE.
A1S3 MD-3 RF - OFF Sets the on/off latching relay to its off position when
pressed and released. Effectively opens the interlock
circuit and turns off the RF output by inhibiting the
exciter stage and the RF power amplifier. This switch
is in-circuit regardless of CONTROL switch setting.
A1S4 MD-3 RF - ON Sets on/off latching relay to its on position when

pressed and released, provided CONTROL switch is set
to LOCAL. Completes interlock circuit's 24 VDC
source circuit and enables the exciter stage and RF
power amplifier. This switch is disabled and has no
influence when CONTROL switch is set to REMOTE.
A1S5 MD-3 ALARM RESET Resets ALARM lamp circuits that latch in their turned
on state when an alarm condition is sensed. Switch is
in-circuit regardless of CONTROL switch setting.
A1S6 MD-3 SELECT - HIGH Sets the power level latching relays to the high power
level configuration, provided the CONTROL switch is
set to LOCAL. Sets RF output to the preset high
power level. Switch is disabled and has no influence
when CONTROL switch is set to REMOTE.
A1S7 MD-3 SELECT - AUTO Sets the power level latching relays to the auto power
set to LOCAL. The RF output level is determined by
an optional auxilliary power control PWB or by an
external micro processor based RF power level
controller. Switch is disabled and has no influence
A1S8 MD-3 SELECT - LOW 2 Sets the power level latching relays to the low 2 power
set to LOCAL. Sets RF output to the preset low 2
Page 4-14
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
PANEL MARKING/
A1S9 MD-3 SELECT - LOW 1 Sets the power level latching relays to the low 1 power
set to LOCAL. Sets RF output to the preset low 1
A1S10 MD-3 DETUNED RF DRIVE RESET Resets the latching feature of the detuned RF drive
detector circuit. Restores the operational status of the
transmitter and turns off the DETUNED RF DRIVE
ALARM lamp, provided the cause of the detuned RF
drive alarm has been removed.
A1S11 MAIN EXCITER SELECT Setting determines if automatic exciter transfer circuit
is enabled or disabled.
When setting (A or B) corresponds to preselected

active (main) exciter (as indicated by EXCITER-A or
EXCITER-B STATUS lamp), automatic exciter transfer
circuit is enabled and operation will automatically be
transferred to the reserve (standby) exciter if the main
exciter's RF drive fails.
When set to OFF or setting does not correspond to

preselected active (main) exciter, the automatic exciter
transfer circuit is disabled and it has no influence on
exciter selection.
A2R3 Forward Power Meter Cal Adjusted to accurately set the output power reading on
the upper scale of the FORWARD POWER meter.
Normally when the RF output power is 5500 watts.
DS1 MD-3 REMOTE When turned on, indicates the CONTROL switch is set
to REMOTE and the transmitter's on/off and preset
power level selections are being controlled from a
remote location.
M1 MD-3 DC SUPPLY CURRENT Indicates total current being consumed by the

modulator/amplifiers from the B-VDC power source.
M2 MD-3 FORWARD POWER Indicates the transmitter's RF carrier forward power in

kilowatts.
Upper scale is normally in-circuit. For a more

accurate reading when forward power is less than
1750 watts, press and hold READ LOWER SCALE
switch.
Page 4-15
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
PANEL MARKING/
M3 MD-3 DC SUPPLY VOLTS Indicates the magnitude of the negative DC voltage

being applied to the RF power modules as their B-
BVC voltage.
M4 MD-3 REFLECTED POWER Indicates the RF power being reflected back to the
transmitter, by the antenna system, in kilowatts.
S1 MD-3 CONTROL Determines whether the on/off function and the preset
RF power level selection is controlled locally or
remotely. Switches on the control/monitor panel are
placed in-circuit when switch is set to LOCAL.
S2 MD-3 READ LOWER SCALE Increases sensitivity of OUTPUT POWER meter by a

factor of four when held depressed. OUTPUT POWER
meter's lower scale to be read.
NOTE: Partial reference designation shown. Prefix with A1 for full reference designation.
- Denotes item is located on control interface PWB A1 and is not specifically identified in figure
MD-4. Refer to the control interface PWB's assembly detail drawing in its service instruction
manual to locate these items.
Items prefixed with A1, that are identified as being in figure MD-3, are located on control
interface PWB A1. They are visible or accessible from the front of the control/monitor panel.
Refer to figure MD-4 to locate control interface PWB A1.
Page 4-16
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-4 Interface Panel Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
A1F1 MD-10 External RF Drive Fuses external RF drive being applied to the RF drive
PWB at 200 milliamperes.
A3C49 MD-5 FREQ ADJ (4

c) Adjusted to set C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's
crystal oscillator to precisely the assigned RF carrier
frequency, when exciter 'A' is selected as the RF drive
source.
A3R154 MD-5 SLICER BIAS Adjusted to obtain an RF drive waveform that is a

symmetrical square wave.
A3S3 MD-5 STEREO ENABLE Enables AM stereo operation when set to STEREO.
Inhibits AM stereo operation and converts to a
monaural exciter when set to MONO.
A3S5 MD-5 PILOT Enables the 25Hz pilot tone required for C-QUAM
AM stereo operation when set to ON. Disables pilot
tone for testing or monaural operation when
set to OFF.
NOTE: Partial reference designation shown. Prefix with A8 for full reference designation.
Figure MD-10 depicts assembly detail of the interface panel and identifies its major assemblies.
Refer to the appropriate service instruction manual for the detail of these assemblies.
- Denotes item is located on remote interface PWB A1. If necessary, refer to the remote
interface PWB's service instruction manual to locate its control/indicators.
- Denotes item is located on optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB A3. If necessary, refer
to C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's service instruction manual to locate its
control/indicators.
The C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB contains a number of controls and adjustments that
are not identified in this listing. They are part of the complex and time intensive AM stereo
adjustments and are not routinely adjusted. Refer to its service instruction manual for a
complete listing.
Page 4-17
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-5 Exciter Drawer Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
DS1 MD-8 POWER - +24VDC Indicates exciter drawer is switched on and is

producing an unregulated +24 volt DC output when
on.
DS2 MD-8 POWER - B-VDC Indicates B- voltage is being provided from the
AC/DC power supply when turned on.
F1 MD-8 +24VDC - EXCITER A Fuses unregulated +24 volt DC being applied to

exciter A's power supply (A1) at 1.0 amperes.
F2 MD-8 +24VDC - EXCITER B Fuses unregulated +24 volt DC being applied to

exciter B's power supply (A2) at 1.0 amperes.
F3 MD-8 B- - EXCITER A Fuses B- DC voltage being applied to exciter A's

power supply (A1) at 1.0 amperes.
F4 B- - EXCITER B Fuses B- DC voltage being applied to exciter B's

power supply (A2) at 1.0 amperes.
M1 MD-8 TEST Displays an output voltage of the low voltage DC

power supply, from the active exciter, as selected by
TEST switch S1.
S1 MD-8 TEST Selects parameter -15V, +15V or +24V to be

displayed on TEST meter M1.
A3C14 MD-9 FREQ ADJ Adjusted to set exciter A's crystal oscillator to the
assigned RF carrier frequency, when exciter A's
internal oscillator is selected as the RF drive source.
A3R4 MD-9 SLICER BIAS Adjusted to obtain a symmetrical square wave, and
therefore a symmetrical RF drive.
A3R18 MD-9 IPM BALANCE Adjusted for minimum incidental phase modulation
(IPM) when exciter A is the RF drive source.
A3S1 MD-9 SELECT N Binary switch that is set to obtain the appropriate
2c/N output, noting this frequency ultimately
determines the pulse width modulation (PWM)
frequency when exciter A is selected.
A4C14 MD-9 FREQ ADJ Adjusted to set exciter B's crystal oscillator to the
assigned RF carrier frequency, when exciter B's
internal oscillator is selected as the RF drive source.
Page 4-18
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-5 Exciter Drawer Controls and Indicators (Continued)
PANEL MARKING/
A4R4 MD-9 SLICER BIAS Adjusted to obtain a symmetrical square wave, and
therefore a symmetrical RF drive.
A4R18 MD-9 IPM BALANCE Adjusted for minimum incidental phase modulation
(IPM) when exciter B is the RF drive source.
A4S1 MD-9 SELECT N Binary switch that is set to obtain the appropriate
2c/N output, noting this frequency ultimately
determines the pulse width modulation (PWM)
frequency when exciter B is selected.
A5A1R5 MD-9 FREQ Adjusted to set the PWM frequency for exciter A
when a C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is its RF
drive source.
A5DS1 MD-9 Audio Limiting Indicates RF output's positive modulation peaks are
exceeding preset thresholds and a portion of the
modulating audio's positive half cycles, being applied
to exciter A, are being clipped, when on.
A5R6 MD-9 THRESHOLD Determines reference voltage level that will be applied
to the mod level detector/comparator circuit for
exciter A. Ensures modulating audio's positive half
cycles are clipped when the RF output's positive
modulation peaks approach RF power amplifier
limits.
A5R17 MD-9 COMMON MODE BALANCE Adjusted to balance (null out) in-phase noise and
transients that are present on and appear across
exciter A's audio input terminals.
A5R34 MD-9 AUDIO Adjusted to set the modulation depth when the audio
input level is known, by setting the gain of exciter A's
modulating audio amplifier stage. Preferred gain
setting will provide 100% modulation when audio
level is 10dBm.
A5R37 MD-9 CAR LVL Adjusted to ensure equal amplitudes from each exciter
in dual exciter applications.
A5S1 MD-9 Low Pass Filter Determines exciter A's audio pass band by selecting
the low pass filter's -1.0dB high frequency roll-off
point. Refer to table 3-2 for low pass filter switch
settings.
Page 4-19
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-5 Exciter Drawer Controls and Indicators (Continued)
PANEL MARKING/
A6DS1 MD-9 Audio Limiting Indicates RF output's positive modulation peaks are
exceeding preset thresholds and a portion of the
modulating audio's positive half cycles, being applied
to exciter B, are being clipped, when on.
A6R6 MD-9 THRESHOLD Determines reference voltage level that will be applied
to the mod level detector/comparator circuit for
exciter B. Ensures modulating audio's positive half
cycles are clipped when the RF output's positive
modulation peaks approach RF power amplifier
limits.
A6R17 MD-9 COMMON MODE BALANCE Adjusted to balance (null out) in-phase noise and
transients that are present on and appear across
exciter B's audio input terminals.
A6R34 MD-9 AUDIO Adjusted to set the modulation depth when the audio
input level is known, by setting the gain of exciter B's
modulating audio amplifier stage. Preferred gain
setting will provide 100% modulation when audio
level is 10dBm.
A6R37 MD-9 CAR LVL Adjusted to ensure equal amplitudes from each exciter
in dual exciter applications.
A6S1 MD-9 Low Pass Filter Determines exciter B's audio pass band by selecting
the low pass filter's -1.0dB high frequency roll-off
point. Refer to table 3-2 for low pass filter switch
settings.
NOTE: Refer to figure MD-6 to locate the RF drive PWBs (A3 and A4) the modulator driver PWBs (A5
and A6). Refer to figure MD-7 to locate the exciter power supplies (A1 and A2). If necessary
refer to the appropriate service instruction manual for the assembly detail of a PWB/assembly
- Denotes RF drive PWB A3 is not installed when the optional AM stereo exciter PWB (A8A3)
is installed as the exciter A RF drive source.
Partial reference designation shown. Prefix with A6 to obtain full reference designation.
Page 4-20
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-6 RF Output Filter Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
E1 MD-12 RF Output Spark Gap Adjusted to provide a breakdown path to ground for
voltage transients present during lightning strikes.
Supplements but does not replace spark balls of the
antenna system.
A2C10 MD-11 RATIO ADJ Adjusted to provide precisely 1/31 of the RF output
voltage as the reference voltage to the forward/
reflected power probe.
A2L1 MD-11 IMPD ADJ Adjusted for minimum change in the reference voltage
to the forward/reflected power probe when the RF
sample load is varied from 50 ohms to infinity.
NOTE: Partial reference designation shown. Prefix with A9 to obtain full reference designation.
Page 4-21
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-7 RF Drive Distribution Panel Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
F1 MD-17 +24 VDC (UNSWITCHED) Fuses the unregulated +24 volts DC being applied to
the control/monitor panel (A15) at 3.0 amperes.
F2 MD-17 +24 VDC (RF ON) Fuses the unregulated +24 volts DC being applied to
exciter power supplies A and B (A6A1 and A6A2),
the remote interface PWB (A8A1) and the relay
control panels (A13) at 3.0 amperes.
F3 MD-17 +24 VDC (POWER MODULES) Fuses the unregulated +24 volts DC being applied to
RF power modules A thru D (A2 thru A5) at 3.0
amperes.
F4 MD-17 B-VDC - (EXCITER) Fuses the B- VDC voltage being applied to exciter
power supplies A and B (A6A1 and A6A2) and
control/monitor panel A1 at 3.0 amperes.
F5 MD-17 B-VDC - (RF DRIVE - A) Fuses the B- VDC voltage being applied to RF drive
amplifier A (A12A2) at 3.0 amperes.
F6 MD-17 B-VDC - (RF DRIVE - B) Fuses the B- VDC voltage being applied to RF drive
amplifier B (A12A3) at 3.0 amperes.
L2 MD-17 RF Drive Tuning Coil Adjusted to tune the RF drive applied to the RF
tuning/splitter PWB.
A1A1R2 MD-18 B- VDC Adjust Adjusted to set the output voltage of B- VDC
switching power supply A1 to the level that will result
in the peak-to-peak voltage of the RF drive being
applied to the input of the RF power modules at 84.0
volts.
A1F1 MD-18 +15 VAC Fuses the regulated 15 VDC being applied to B- VDC
switching power supply A1 at 0.5 amperes.
A1F2 MD-18 B- VDC Fuses the B- VDC being applied to B- VDC switching
power supply A1 at 5.0 amperes.
A4R3 MD-19 LVL THReshold Adjusted to set the DC voltage that is representative
of the RF drive level to 39 VDC when the peak-to-
peak voltage of the RF drive input to the RF power
modules is 84.0 volts.
Page 4-22
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-8 Relay Control Panel Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
A13S1 RF POWER MODULE Connects the operating B- VDC voltage to power

CONTROL - A module A (A2) when set to ON.

CONTROL - B module B (A3) when set to ON.

CONTROL - C module C (A4) when set to ON.

CONTROL - D module D (A5) when set to ON.
Page 4-23
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-9 Fuse Block Assembly Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
F1 MD-24 B-VDC (REF A) Fuses the B- VDC voltage being applied to the low
voltage power supply panel (A12) and the relay
control panels (A13) at 30 amperes.
F2 MD-24 High Current B-VDC- A Fuses the high current B- VDC voltage being applied
to relay control panel A13 for RF power module A at
40 amperes.
F3 MD-24 High Current B-VDC - B Fuses the high current B-VDC voltage being applied
to relay control panel A13 for RF power module B at
40 amperes.
F4 MD-24 High Current B-VAC - C Fuses the high current B- VDC voltage being applied
to relay control panel A13 for RF power module C at
40 amperes.
F5 MD-24 High Current B-VAC - D Fuses the high current B-VDC voltage being applied
to relay control panel A13 for RF power module D at
40 amperes.
Page 4-24
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 4-10 Circuit Breaker Panel Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING/
CB1 MD-9 MAIN POWER Controls application of AC power source to the power
transformer and protect wiring from excessive current.
F1 MD-9 24 VAC Power Source Fuses one phase of the low AC power source being
3 - Phase (1) applied to the low voltage power supply's (A12) three-
phase rectifier at 5.0 amperes.
F2 MD-9 24 VAC Power Source Fuses one phase of the low AC power source being
F3 MD-9 24 VDC Power Source Fuses one phase of the low AC power source being
Page 4-25
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 5
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
GENERAL
WARNING
5.1 This section contains a step-by-step
functional test procedure for the subject transmitter,
using integral meters and precision test/monitoring AC voltages that can cause serious personal injury
equipment. The test procedures contain routine or death are present on circuit breaker terminals
adjustment instructions to bring the parameter being and primary winding taps of the main power
tested within defined limits, where appropriate. transformer. These voltages are present when AC
Special adjustment procedures are also included in power is being applied and the MAIN POWER circuit
this section. These adjustments are defined as being breaker is closed, regardless of the transmitter's
the adjustments that require a significant amount of RF/off status. In addition to the AC voltage, the
disassembly and/or test equipment that will not output of the B- DC power supply (nominally -72
normally be available at a transmitter site. volts DC) will be present when AC power is applied
to the main power transformer's primary windings.
NOTE
It is recommended that personnel who are not
familiar with detailed circuit theory or do not FUNCTIONAL TESTS
realize what impact a specific adjustment will have 5.3 Successful completion of the following tests
on other steps, follow instructions in order will verify the transmitter circuits are within factory
presented. It is recommended they be followed specifications. When a routine adjustment will
sequentially during initial turn-on and after major correct an out-of-tolerance condition, the adjustment
repairs. procedure is included.
NOTE
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS If an in-tolerance condition cannot be attained with
5.2 The transmitter contains protection circuits the specified routine adjustment, discontinue testing
that monitor critical parameters. When the defined until the problem causing the out-of-tolerance
limits of any of these parameters are exceeded, one or condition has been corrected.
more ALARM lamps will turn on. When the out-of-
tolerance condition could result in excessive power 5.3.1 GENERAL: The functional tests should
amplifier stress current, the modulator drive to the be performed and the results recorded for comparison
power amplifiers will effectively be reduced or turned with past and future test results, as a routine part of
off, as long as the cause of the out-of-tolerance scheduled maintenance checks and as the first step in
condition exists. Maintainers should read and fully troubleshooting procedures.
understand operating instructions provided in section
4. Pay particular attention to paragraph 4.10. 5.3.1.1 The functional test procedures are provided
in a step-by-step format. This method of presentation
NOTE will permit a person who is unfamiliar with the
The FORWARD POWER meter has two scales. The transmitter to perform the functional tests in a logical
upper scale is normally in-circuit and should be sequence. It is recommended the procedures be
read when the RF power level being monitored is completed in sequence, as each procedure establishes
more than 1750 watts. When the indicated power switch settings and contains prerequisites for
level is less than 1750 watts, a more precise reading subsequent procedures.
can be obtained by depressing the READ LOWER
SCALE switch and reading the lower scale.
Page 5-1
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.3.1.2 The following assume the commissioning NOTE

procedures of paragraph 3.4 have been completed The majority of the controls/indicators are on the
during initial installation or after major repairs that control interface PWB (A1A1). They are oriented to
warrant the initial start-up procedure be repeated. be accessible/visible through openings in the front
of the control/monitor panel. They are considered
5.3.1.3 The exciter assemblies, except for the B- to be on the control/monitor panel in the following.
VDC switching power supply and the RF drive
tuning PWB, are duplicated and are connected to Unless otherwise stated, all referenced controls and
form an active (main) and a reserve (standby) exciter. indicators, are located on or accessible from the
The control/monitor panel's EXCITER switch control/monitor panel in the following.
determines which is selected as the main exciter. The
following list identifies duplicated assemblies and 5.3.2 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: The
which are active for a specific selection. following test equipment is required to perform the
functional test procedures.
NOTE
An optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB Digital multimeter Oscilloscope
(A8A3) may be installed on the interface panel as Distortion analyzer Functional generator
exciter A's RF drive source. When this option is Audio signal generator DC ammeter
included, the exciter drawer's 'A' RF drive PWB 15 VDC power supply 24 VDC power supply
(A6A3) will not be installed and its 'A' modulator Modulation monitor Frequency counter
driver PWB will contain a PWM oscillator. 0 - 100 VDC pwr supply 50-ohm dummy load
Exciter A Selected (Stereo Option Not Installed) RF Drive Tuning Adapter
A - DC Power Supply .................................... A6A1
A - RF Drive PWB ........................................ A6A3 5.3.3 TEST PREREQUISITES: The
A - Modulator Driver PWB (Standard) ........... A6A5 following prerequisites must be completed prior to
A - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A2 performing any of the functional test procedures:
Exciter A Selected (Stereo Option Installed)

A - DC Power Supply .................................... A6A1
A - C-QUAM AM Stereo Exciter PWB .......... A8A3
A - Modulator Driver PWB (c/w PWM Osc) .. A6A5 Do not change the setting of any adjustment on the
A - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A2 optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter (if installed)
unless specifically directed to do so and then only if
Exciter B Selected the test results are not within the specified
B - DC Power Supply .................................... A6A2 tolerances. Improper adjustment may cause some
B - RF Drive PWB......................................... A6A4 of paragraph 5.3.11's emission level test results to
B - Modulator Driver PWB ............................ A6A6 be out of tolerance and will probably cause a badly
B - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A3 distorted or otherwise unacceptable AM stereo
output.
5.3.1.4 When the specified adjustment is on a
printed wiring board in the exciter drawer, the drawer NOTE
must be extended on its slides and its top cover Exciter B is selected as the active exciter in the
removed. It is recommended the top cover be following procedures, unless a test specifically
replaced on completion of adjustment. requires exciter A to be selected. This selection
ensures the procedures can be used regardless of
5.3.1.5 Printed wiring board mounted the RF drive source for exciter A.
potentiometers are multi-turn devices that have a When the transmitter is configured for a single
clutch at either extreme of their adjustment. Their exciter, exciter B's assemblies/modules will not be
wipers must be turned a minimum of four turns in installed. In this case exciter A must be substituted
one direction to ensure they have been set fully as the active exciter and duplicated tests for the
clockwise or fully counter clockwise. reserve (standby) exciter should be disregarded.
Page 5-2
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 5-1 Reference Switch Settings for Functional Test
WHERE SWITCH REF PANEL MARKING/

IS LOCATED DES NOMENCLATURE USED IN TEXT SETTING
Control/Monitor Panel A1S1 CONTROL LOCAL
Control Interface PWB A1A1S11 MAIN EXCITER SELECT OFF
Exciter Drawer A6S1 TEST OFF
Circuit Breaker Panel A7CB1 MAIN POWER ON
Relay Control Panel (A-D) A13S1 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - A ON

A13S2 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - B ON
A13S3 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - C ON
A13S4 RF POWER MODULE CONTROL - D ON
(a) Verify nothing that would affect the RF drive or

mod drive to the power amplifier stages has WARNING
been changed or altered since the transmitter
was commissioned or since the last time the If a jumper is placed between the interlock inputs
initial start-up procedure described in (TB1-13 and TB1-14) on the remote interface
paragraph 3.4 were completed. PWB, safety features provided by the external
interlocks will be disabled. It is recommended that
NOTE a fail safe method of alerting personnel to this fact
Remote interface PWB A1A1 is located on the be implemented. Voltages which are dangerous to
interface panel, directly behind the control/monitor life will be present on RF output stages and the
panel. Refer to the interface panel's assembly detail antenna system if the transmitter is turned on.
(figure MD-5) to locate the remote interface PWB.
If necessary, refer to the remote interface PWB's (d) Close all external interlocks or temporarily
service instruction manual for its assembly detail. connect a jumper wire between TB1-13 and
TB1-14 of the remote interface PWB.
(b) Set all switches/circuit breakers, except MAIN
POWER circuit breaker, as tabulated in table 5-
(e) In lieu of normal station programming, connect
1. Set MAIN POWER circuit breaker to OFF. an audio signal generator [preset to 1000Hz at
a zero output level (turned off)], between TB1-
(c) Connect or verify the transmitter's RF output is 15(+) and TB1-17(-) of the remote interface
connected to a precision 50 ohm, resistive PWB.
dummy load that has provision to accurately
display the RF power being applied to it and is
rated at a minimum of 10 kilowatts.
Page 5-3
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 5-2 Exciter Drawer's DC Voltage Readings
TEST METER
Ensure the peak-to-peak amplitude of the external TEST SWITCH
MIN MAX
RF drive does not exceed 12.0 volts. Voltages in
excess of 12.0 volts will over stress RF drive input
components and cause them to overheat. +24V +22.0 +26.0
+15V +14.0 +16.0
(f) If an externally generated RF drive is being -15V -14.0 -16.0
applied as the RF drive source, verify it is not
being modulated and its frequency is the (h) All remaining lamps shall be off.
assigned carrier frequency plus/minus 5.0Hz.
(j) The remote RF Ready status output on the
(g) Connect a modulation monitor to remote remote interface PWB's RF READY terminal
interface PWB's RF MONITOR connector (J4). (TB2-20) shall be a current sink to ground.
(h) Set ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and (k) Turn on the RF power stage (press/release the
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers fully counter RF-ON switch and verify RF-ON lamp turns on).
clockwise (minimum of four turns).
(l) The exciter drawer's POWER +24 VDC lamp
5.3.4 INITIAL TURN-ON: Apply AC power to shall turn on.
the transmitter and observe the alarm and status
indicators as follows: (m) All cooling air fans (one in each RF power
module) shall turn on and operate.
(a) Verify the requirements of paragraph 5.3.3
have been completed. 5.3.5 EXCITER DRAWER POWER SUPPLY
CHECKS: Check the output voltage of the exciter
(b) Switch on or verify the AC power source is drawer's low DC voltage power supplies, for the 'A'
switched on at the service entrance. and the 'B' exciter:
(c) Set the MAIN POWER circuit breaker to ON. (a) Sequentially set the exciter drawer's TEST
switch to each of its settings. Verify its TEST
(d) Preset the local control switches. Press/ release meter's readings are within the tolerance
the following switches, noting they are all tabulated in table 5-2.
located on the control/monitor panel:
- ALARM RESET switch. (b) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
- RF-OFF switch. EXCITER-A switch and verify the EXCITER-A
- SELECT EXCITER-B switch. lamp turns on.
- SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 switch.
(c) Repeat step (a) for the 'A' exciter.
(e) The OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 and EXCITER-B
lamps shall turn on. (d) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release SELECT
(f) The exciter drawer's POWER B-VDC lamp shall lamp turns on).
turn on.
(g) The B-VDC lamp on the rear of each RF power

module shall turn on.
Page 5-4
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.3.6 B- VOLTAGE CHECK - NO LOAD: 5.3.7 RF DRIVE FREQUENCY/

Verify the no-load output voltage of the B- DC PREAMPLIFIER CHECKS: Check the RF
voltage power supply is satisfactory, as follows: drive's frequency and level for each exciter, as
follows:
(a) FORWARD POWER meter indication shall be
near zero watts. NOTE
There are three standard factory configured RF
(b) DC SUPPLY CURRENT meter indication should drive options. They are:
be near zero amperes.
Transmitters that are not factory configured for C-
(c) DC SUPPLY VOLTS meter indication should be QUAM AM stereo operation have two monaural RF
between -71.5 VDC and -79.0 VDC. drive PWBs and two standard modulator driver
PWB's. They are all located in the exciter drawer.
NOTE
If voltage reading in step (c) is not within the Transmitters that are factory configured for C-
required limits, the most probable cause is the QUAM AM stereo operation when exciter A is
power transformer's primary winding tap selection. selected; have one C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB
(located on the interface panel) and one modulator
(d) If the voltage reading in step (c) is less negative driver PWB which contains an integral PWM
than -71.5 VDC, switch off AC power source oscillator. Exciter B has one monaural RF drive
at the service entrance and then select new PWB and a standard modulator driver PWB.
primary winding taps as detailed in paragraph
3.3.1, using the taps tabulated for the next Transmitters that are factory configured for a single
lower voltage range in table 3-1. exciter do not have exciter B's modules/assemblies.
Standard transmitters have a monaural RF drive
(e) If the voltage reading in step (c) is more PWB and a standard modulator driver PWB (both
negative than -79.0 VDC, switch off AC power located in the exciter drawer) installed for exciter A.
source at the service entrance, then select new
primary winding taps as detailed in paragraph If required, refer to figure MD-10 to locate the
3.3.1, using the taps tabulated for the next C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB. For assembly
higher voltage range in table 3-1. detail, refer to its service instruction manual.
(f) If the power transformer's primary winding taps Refer to figure MD-6 to locate RF drive PWB's that
were changed, repeat steps (a) thru (e). are located in the exciter drawer. For assembly
detail of an RF drive PWB, refer to its service
(g) Record final reading recorded in step (c) as the instruction manual.
B-VDC no-load voltage.
(a) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
(h) The DC SUPPLY CURRENT meter's indication LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
shall be near zero amperes. active and low 2 is the selected preset power
level.
(b) Verify the ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and

clockwise.
(c) Connect a frequency counter to the remote

interface PWB's FREQUENCY MONITOR
connector (J9), using a suitable coaxial cable.
Page 5-5
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(d) Determine the RF drive source for exciter A

and B, noting:
- When a C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is
the RF drive source for exciter A, the RF drive
is being generated by its crystal oscillator.
- When a monaural RF drive PWB is the RF
drive source and a link is connected between its
B and C terminals, the RF drive is being
generated by its crystal oscillator.
- When a monaural RF drive PWB is the RF

drive source and a link is connected between its
A and C terminals, the RF drive is being
produced by an external RF generator
(e) Check exciter B's RF drive as detailed in

paragraph 5.3.7.1 or 5.3.7.2. c = 1600kHz (DC Coupled)
0.2 s/div, 5.0 V/div, Scale Centre = 0.0 VDC
(f) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release SELECT Figure 5-1 Balanced Drive Input Waveform
EXCITER-A switch and verify the EXCITER-A
lamp turns on). (d) Connect an oscilloscope between TP2 of the
- If a monaural RF drive PWB is providing
exciter A's RF drive, check the RF drive as (e) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to
detailed in paragraph 5.3.7.1 or 5.3.7.2. example depicted in figure 5-1. It should be a
symmetrical (50% duty cycle) square wave
- If a C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is with a nominal peak-to-peak amplitude of 15.0
providing exciter A's RF drive, check the RF volts.
drive as detailed in paragraph 5.3.7.3. (f) If necessary, adjust the active RF drive PWB's
SLICER BIAS potentiometer (R4) to obtain a
(g) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the symmetrical square wave.
SELECT EXCITER-B switch and verify
EXCITER-B lamp turnson). (g) Disconnect oscilloscope.
5.3.7.1 Internal RF Drive Source: If the RF drive 5.3.7.2 External RF Drive Source: If the RF
source is a monaural RF drive PWB and its integral drive source is a monaural RF drive PWB and an
crystal oscillator is providing the RF drive, proceed external RF generator is providing the RF drive,
as follows: proceed as follows:
(a) Verify a link is connected between terminals B (a) Verify a link is connected between terminals A
and C on active RF drive PWB. and C on active RF drive PWB.
(b) Frequency counter indication shall be the
assigned carrier frequency 5.0Hz or five parts (b) Verify the external RF drive is being applied to
per million (ppm) whichever is greater. the remote interface PWB's STEREO connector
(J1).
(c) If requirement of step (b) is not met, adjust
active RF drive PWB's FREQ ADJUST (c) Verify the external RF drive input is the
trimming capacitor (C14), until the frequency assigned carrier frequency, is unmodulated and
counter's indication is the assigned carrier its amplitude is between 5.0 and 12.0 volts
frequency. peak-to-peak (sine or square wave).
Page 5-6
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(d) Frequency counter indication shall be the (e) Oscilloscope indication should similar to the
assigned carrier frequency 5.0Hz or five parts example depicted in figure 5-1. It should be a
per million (ppm) whichever is greater. symmetrical square wave with nominal peak-to-
peak amplitude of 15.0 volts.
(e) If the requirement of step (d) is not met, adjust
carrier frequency of external RF source, until (f) If necessary, adjust the C-QUAM AM stereo
the frequency counter's indication is the exciter PWB's SLICER BIAS potentiometer
assigned carrier frequency. (R154) to obtain a symmetrical square wave.
(f) Connect an oscilloscope between terminal C, of (g) Disconnect oscilloscope.

5.3.8 RF DRIVE AMPLIFIER CHECKS:
(g) The oscilloscope indication should be a Check the amplitude of the RF drive being applied to
symmetrical (50% duty cycle) waveform (sine the RF power amplifier stage, as follows:
or square) with a nominal peak-to-peak
amplitude that is between 5.0 and 12.0 volts. NOTE
There are two RF drive amplifiers (A and B), a
(h) Connect an oscilloscope between TP2 of the common B- VDC switching power supply (A12A1)
active RF drive PWB and ground. and a common RF drive tuning PWB (A12A4) on the
RF drive distribution panel. Refer to figures MD-
(i) The oscilloscope indication should be similar to 17/MD-18 as an aid to locating these assemblies,
the example in figure 5-1. It should be a noting the 'A' RF drive amplifier is A12A2 and the
symmetrical (50% duty cycle) square wave 'B' RF drive amplifier is A12A3. Refer to figure
with a nominal peak-to-peak amplitude of 15.0 MD-19 for the RF drive tuning PWB's assembly
volts. detail and to the RF drive amplifier's service
instruction manual for its assembly detail.
(j) If necessary, adjust the active RF drive PWB's
SLICER BIAS potentiometer (R4) to obtain a (a) Set all switches as tabulated in table 5-1.
symmetrical square wave.
(b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
(k) Disconnect oscilloscope. LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
active and low 2 is the selected preset power
5.3.7.3 AM Stereo RF Drive Source: If the RF level.
drive source is being produced by a C-QUAM AM
stereo exciter PWB, check the RF drive as follows: (c) Verify the ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and
(a) Verify the C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's clockwise.
STEREO ENABLE switch is set to MONO.
(d) Connect an oscilloscope between TT1 (one end
(b) Frequency counter indication shall be the of resistor R1) and ground on the active RF
assigned carrier frequency 5.0Hz or five parts drive amplifier.
(c) If requirement of step (b) is not met, adjust C-

QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB's 4 c trim
capacitor (C49), until frequency counter's
indication is the assigned carrier frequency.
(d) Connect an oscilloscope between TP12 of the

C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB and ground
(TP17).
Page 5-7
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
c = 1600kHz (AC Coupled)

Figure 5-2 RF Drive Amplifier Input Waveform c = 1600kHz (AC Coupled)
(e) Oscilloscope indication shall be similar to the Figure 5-3 RF Drive Output Waveform
example in figure 5-2. Waveform's peak-to-
peak amplitude should be a nominal 14 volts. 5.3.8.1 RF Drive Level Detector Check: Check
the amplitude of the RF drive tuning PWB's RF drive
level output, noting it is monitored by the low RF
drive alarm circuit, as follows:
Use extreme care when connecting/disconnecting (a) Verify the requirements of paragraph 5.3.8
the oscilloscope probe in the following procedures. have been completed and are being met.
Do not allow the probe to short the RF drive to
ground. (b) Connect a digital multimeter, that is preset to
measure DC volts, between TB1-10(+) of the
(f) Connect an oscilloscope between TB1-1 and RF drive tuning PWB and ground.
TB1-2 (ground) of the RF drive tuning PWB.
(c) The digital multimeter's reading should be
(g) Oscilloscope indication shall be similar to the between 38.0 and 40.0 VDC.
example in figure 5-3. peak-to-peak amplitude
shall be between 80 and 88 volts. (d) If necessary, adjust the RF drive tuning PWB's
(h) If necessary, adjust B- VDC switching power Level Threshold Adjust potentiometer for a
supply's B- Adjust potentiometer for 84 volts, reading of 39.0 VDC.
peak-to-peak (noting access is gained by
removing right-hand side panel). 5.3.9 MOD DRIVE CHECKS: Check critical
parameters of the variable pulse width modulation
(i) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT drive (mod drive) signal as follows:
EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp
turns on). NOTE
Two modulator driver PWBs (A and B) are located
(j) Repeat steps (d) thru (h) for exciter 'A'.
in the exciter drawer. Refer to figure MD-6 to
(k) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the locate them, noting mod driver A is A5 and mod
SELECT EXCITER-B switch and verify driver B is A6. For assembly detail of a modulator
EXCITER-B lamp turnson). driver PWB, refer to its service instruction manual.
Page 5-8
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
2c/N = 320kHz (DC Coupled) pwm = 80.0kHz (DC Coupled)

1.0 s/div, 5.0 V/div, Scale Centre = 0.0 VDC 5.0 s/div, 5.0 V/div, Scale Centre = 0.0 VDC
Figure 5-4 2c/N Frequency Waveform Figure 5-5 PWM Frequency Waveform
5.3.9.1 Mod Drive Check Pre-Requisites: (b) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to
Perform the following mod drive check pre-requisites: example depicted in figure 5-4. Waveform
should be positive going 2c/N pulses. Refer to
(a) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- commissioning records for recorded value of
LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is 2c/N (see note in paragraph 3.3.4.3.)
level. (c) Connect a frequency counter between TP4 of
active modulator driver PWB and ground.
(b) Set ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers, fully counter (d) Frequency counter's indication shall be the
clockwise. pulse width modulation frequency (pwm). It
(c) Inhibit exciter drawer's DC power source by should be between 70.0 and 96.63kHz. Refer
turning off the RF power stage (press/release to commissioning records for recorded value
RF-OFF switch and note RF-ON lamp turns off.
(see note in paragraph 3.3.4.3).
(d) Disconnect the Mod Drive coaxial cable from NOTE

the exciter drawer's MOD DRIVE output The factory determined PWM frequency (pwm) for
connector (J6). a transmitter may be outside the tolerance specified
in step (d). See note in paragraph 3.3.4.3.
(e) Activate exciter drawer's DC power source by
turning RF power stages on (press/release RF- (e) Connect the oscilloscope between TP4 of the
ON switch and verify RF-ON lamp turns on). active mod driver PWB and ground.
5.3.9.2 PWM (2 c/N Input): When the active NOTE

modulator driver PWB is the /01 variation and it uses If preset pwm is unknown, enter table 3-3 with
the RF drive source's 2c/N output to produce the carrier frequency (c). If c is less than 1280kHz,
PWM frequency (PWM), proceed as follows: divide it by number tabulated as N for that carrier
frequency. If c is 1280kHz or more, divide it by
(a) Connect an oscilloscope between the /2 terminal twice the number tabulated as N.
associated with terminal B of the active
modulator driver PWB and ground.
Page 5-9
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(f) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to

example depicted in figure 5-5. Waveform should be
a square wave with a nominal peak-to-peak
amplitude of 15.0 volts at the pwm frequency
5.3.9.3 PWM (PWM Oscillator): When the active

modulator driver PWB is the /02 variation and it uses
its own integral PWM oscillator to produce the PWM
frequency (PWM), proceed as follows:
(a) Connect a frequency counter between TP4 of

active modulator driver PWB and ground.
(b) Frequency counter's indication shall be the

pulse width modulation frequency (PWM)
recorded on the transmitter configuration sheet
provided with the factory test results. It should PWM = 80.0 kHz (DC Coupled)
be between 80.0 and 90.6kHz. 5.0 s/div, 1.0 V/div, Scale Centre = 0.0 VDC
Figure 5-6 PWM Ramp Integrator Waveform
NOTE
Calculate PWM using the following formula, noting 5.3.9.4 PWM Checks: Verify the variable pulse
the resultant must be between 80.0 and 90.6 kHz. width modulation (PWM) waveforms are correct as
follows:
(a) Connect an oscilloscope between TP6 of the

active mod driver PWB and ground.
(b) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to

example depicted in figure 5-6. It should be a
triangular waveform with a nominal peak- to-
peak amplitude of 4.0 volts. Its negative going
peaks should just touch zero volts DC. Its
frequency should be the pwm.
(c) Connect the oscilloscope between TP10 of the

active mod driver PWB and ground.
(d) Oscilloscope waveform indication should

basically be a zero volt DC trace with nominal
+15 VDC spikes at pwm.
(c) Connect the oscilloscope between TP4 of the
active modulator driver PWB and ground. (e) Adjust ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer clockwise
until a rectangular waveform with an on
(d) Oscilloscope indication should be similar to (positive peak)/off (negative peak) ratio of
example depicted in figure 5-5. Waveform 40/60 (40% duty cycle) is attained.
to-peak amplitude of 15.0 volts at the PWM
Page 5-10
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(m) Adjust ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer clockwise

for a rectangular waveform with an on/off
(positive/negative) ratio of 40/60.
(n) Waveform's on/off ratio shall increase linearly

and continuously from a 25/75 ratio to a 40/60
ratio (40% at 15 VDC/60% at 0 VDC), as
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer is adjusted. Final
waveform shall be similar to the example in
figure 5-7.
(o) Set ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer fully counter

clockwise.
(p) Select the low 2 power level (press/release

SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 switch and
verify OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 lamp turns on).
pwm = 80.0kHz (DC Coupled)
5.0 s/div, 5.0 V/div, Scale Centre = 0.0 VDC (q) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
Figure 5-7 Mod Drive Output Waveform EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp
turns on.
(f) Waveform observed on oscilloscope shall
increase linearly and continuously from a 0/100 (r) Check the variable pulse width modulation
ratio (zero volts DC trace) to a rectangular frequency (PWM) as detailed in paragraph
waveform with a 40/60 ratio (40% at 15 5.3.9.2 or 5.3.9.3 and then repeat steps (a) thru
VDC/60% at 0 VDC), as the ADJUST-LOW 2 (p) for the 'A' exciter.
potentiometer is adjusted. Final waveform shall
be similar to the example in figure 5-7. 5.3.9.5 Completion of Mod Drive Checks: When
the mod drive checks have been completed, return to
(g) Set ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer fully counter the pre-check conditions as follows:
clockwise.
(a) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the
(h) Select the low 1 power level (press/release SELECT EXCITER-B switch and verify
SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 1 switch and EXCITER-B lamp turns on).
(b) Inhibit exciter drawer's DC power source by
(i) Repeat steps (a) thru (g), substituting ADJUST- turning RF power stage off (press/release RF-
LOW 1 potentiometer where ADJUST-LOW 2 OFF switch and note the RF-ON lamp turns off.
potentiometer is specified.
(c) Connect Mod Drive coaxial cable [removed in
(j) Select the High power level (press/release paragraph 5.3.9.1 (d)] to the exciter drawer's
SELECT OUTPUT POWER-HIGH switch and MOD DRIVE output connector (J6).
verify OUTPUT POWER-HIGH lampturns on).
(d) Verify the ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and
(k) Verify oscilloscope is connected between TP10 ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers are fully counter
of active mod driver PWB and ground. clockwise.
(l) Oscilloscope display should be a rectangular (e) Activate exciter drawer's DC power source by
waveform with an on/off (positive/negative) turning RF power stage on (press/release RF-
ratio of 25/75 (25% duty cycle). ON switch and verify RF-ON lamp turns on).
Page 5-11
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.3.10 RF POWER AMPLIFIER CHECKS: (c) FORWARD POWER meter indication shall be
Check the forward/reflected power and modulator less than 4000 watts. Record forward power
input current levels as follows: reading.
(d) REFLECTED POWER meter indication shall be
NOTE near zero watts.
Two mod driver PWBs (A and B) are located in the (e) DC SUPPLY VOLTS meter indication shall be
exciter drawer. Refer to figure MD-6 to locate between -69.0 and -75.0 VDC.
them, noting the 'A' mod driver PWB is A5 and the
'B" mod driver PWB is A6. For assembly detail, (f) Record DC SUPPLY CURRENT meter's current
refer to the mod driver PWB's service instruction indication.
manual. (g) Enter figure 4-1 with forward power reading
(a) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- recorded in step (c) and the DC current reading
LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is recorded in step (f) and then plot intersection
active and low 2 is the selected precept power point on the graph.
level.
(h) Intersection point plotted in step (g) must be
(b) Verify the ADJUST-LOW 1, ADJUST-LOW 2 and below the line-representing maximum (carrier
ADJUST-HIGH potentiometers are fully counter
only).
clockwise.
(I) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
(c) Verify all cooling fans (one in each RF power EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp
module) are operating. turns on).
(d) FORWARD POWER meter indication shall be (j) Dummy load's forward power indication should
near zero watts. be within ten percent of forward power level
recorded in step (c). Note the difference
(e) DC SUPPLY CURRENT meter indication shall be between the two readings.
near zero amperes.
(k) Adjust 'A' modulator driver PWB's CAR LVL
(f) Set the CAR LVL potentiometer (R37) of both potentiometer to reduce the forward power
modulator driver PWB's to the centre of their difference noted in step (j) by one half.
range by adjusting them a minimum of four
turns counter clockwise and then two turns (l) Select exciter B and adjust the 'B' modulator
clockwise. driver PWB's CAR LVL potentiometer to reduce
any remaining difference between the 'A' and
5.3.10.1 Forward Power Limiting: Precept the RF 'B' forward power levels to zero.
power level control circuits to limit the maximum
forward power level to 5500 watts as follows: (m) Adjust control interface PWB's POWER LIMIT
potentiometer for a RF output of precisely
(a) Set control interface PWB's POWER LIMIT 5500 watts, as indicated by dummy load's
potentiometer fully counter clockwise. forward power indicator.
(b) Slowly adjust ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer
fully clockwise.
Do not change POWER LIMIT potentiometer setting

once it has been established. If setting is changed
in a clockwise direction, it will be possible to set
Discontinue clockwise adjustment of ADJUST-LOW the forward power too more than 5500 watts. If
2 potentiometer if forward power level indication
setting is changed in a counter clockwise direction,
exceeds 4000 watts or if DC supply current exceeds it will not be possible to set the forward power to
70 amperes when the POWER LIMIT potentiometer 5500 watts.
is set fully counter clockwise.
Page 5-12
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(n) FORWARD POWER meter indication shall be (d) Select High preset RF power level (press/
5500 watts. If reading is satisfactory go to release SELECT OUTPUT POWER-HIGH switch
step (p). If reading is significantly different, and verify OUTPUT POWER-HIGH lamp turns
calibrate the meter as detailed in step (o). on).
(e) Set ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer for an RF
(o) Adjust meter calibration potentiometer output, as indicated by dummy load's forward
A1A2R3 for a FORWARD POWER meter power indicator, of precisely the carrier level to
indication of 5500 watts, noting calibration be transmitted when High preset power level is
potentiometer A1A2R3 is located on a PWB selected, noting it may not be set to less than
that is fastened to the meter terminals. 3500 watts.
(p) REFLECTED POWER meter indication shall be (f) Record FORWARD POWER meter indication as
near zero watts. the High preset forward power level for the
active exciter.
(q) DC SUPPLY VOLTS meter indication shall be
between -69.0 and -75.0 VDC. (g) Adjust control interface PWBs HIGH MONITOR
potentiometer (R78) for an oscilloscope
(r) DC SUPPLY VOLTS meter indication as the
waveform with a peak-to-peak amplitude of 8.5
loaded B-VDC voltage.
volts (3.0 volts RMS).
(s) Record DC SUPPLY CURRENT meter
(h) Select the Low 1 power level (press/release
indication as the loaded B- VDC current.
(t) Enter figure 4-1 with B- VDC current reading
recorded in step (s) and plot intersection point
(i) Set ADJUST-LOW 1 potentiometer for an RF
on the graph for a forward power level of 5500
output, as indicated by dummy load's forward
watts.
power indicator, of precisely the carrier level to
be transmitted when Low 1 power level is
(u) Intersection point plotted in step (t) must be
selected.
below the line representing maximum (carrier
only).
(j) Record FORWARD POWER meter indication as
the Low 1 preset forward power level for the
(v) Set ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer fully counter
active exciter.
clockwise.
(k) Adjust control interface PWB's LOW 1
5.3.10.2 Setting Preset Power Levels: Set the
MONITOR potentiometer (R77) for an
preset RF power level control circuits to produce the
oscilloscope waveform with a peak-to-peak
desired RF output levels and adjust the RF MONITOR
amplitude of 8.5 volts (3.0 volts RMS).
output to the amplitude required by the modulation
monitor in use, as follows:
(l) Select the Low 2 power level (press/release
(a) Verify the control interface PWB's POWER
LIMIT potentiometer has been preset to limit the
forward power level to 5500 watts as detailed
(m) Set ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer for an RF
in paragraph 5.3.10.1.
output, as indicated by dummy load's forward
power indicator, of precisely the carrier level to
be transmitted when Low 2 power level is
LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
selected.
level.
(n) Record FORWARD POWER meter indication as
the Low 2 preset forward power level for the
(c) Connect an oscilloscope to remote interface
active exciter.
PWB's RF MONITOR connector (J4).
Page 5-13
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(o) Adjust control interface PWB's LOW 2 (a) Set or verify all switches are set as tabulated in
MONITOR potentiometer (R79) for an table 5-1.
oscilloscope waveform with a peak-to-peak
amplitude of 8.5 volts (3.0 volts RMS). (b) Connect a modulation monitor to the remote
interface PWBs RF MONITOR connector (J4).
(p) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp (c) Verify an audio signal generator, that has been
turns on). preset to 1000Hz at a zero output level (turned
off), is connected as the modulating audio
(q) Repeat steps (d) thru (o) for exciter A [RF source.
monitor requirements of steps (g), (k) and (o)
should be met without adjustment of referenced (d) Verify transmitter's RF output is connected to a
potentiometer]. precision, 50 ohm, resistive, 10kW, dummy
load that has provision to accurately display
(r) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the the RF power being applied to it.
EXCITER-B lamp turnson). (e) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
(s) Select the High power level (press/release active and High is the selected preset power
SELECT OUTPUT POWER-HIGH switch and level.
verify OUTPUT POWER-HIGH lamp turns on).
(f) Set ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer for a forward
5.3.11 MODULATION ENVELOPE/ power, as indicated by dummy load's forward
EMISSION LEVEL CHECKS: When a monaural power indicator, of precisely 5000 watts.
RF drive PWB is the RF drive source for the active
exciter, check that the modulation envelope, radiated 5.3.11.2 Audio Gain/Modulation Control: Verify
sidebands and hum/noise levels are within their modulating audio is being processed by the
acceptable limits, as follows: modulator driver and modulation depth can be set to
100% over the full audio pass band, as follows:
(a) Verify the prerequisites of paragraph 5.3.11.1

The following tests are not applicable to exciter A have been completed and are being met.
when a C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is its RF NOTE
drive source. Refer to the C-QUAM AM stereo The gain of the audio amplifier stage can be
exciter PWB's service instruction manual for adjusted to accommodate an audio input of 0dBm to
modulation envelope checks. +12dBm for a modulation depth of 100%. The
AUDIO GAIN potentiometer on both of the exciter
NOTE drawer's modulator driver PWBs is preset during
The maintainer has the option of checking the gain manufacture to provide 100% modulation when the
of the audio stage, to ensure it can be adjusted to audio input level is +10dBm.
provide 100% modulation, when the audio input
level is between 0 dBm to +12 dBm; or just verifying (b) Adjust the audio signal generator's output for a
the audio stage is functioning without disrupting the 100% modulation depth indication on the
setting established for normal station programming. modulation monitor. The audio signal
If the first option is selected, it will be necessary to generator's output level shall be between 0dBm
reset the gain to the original level on test and +12dBm.
completion.
5.3.11.1 Modulation Envelope/Emission Level (c) If the audio gain has previously been
Check Prerequisites: The following prerequisites established for 100% modulation when the
must be completed for each of the modulation station programming audio is a specific level,
envelope/emission level checks. record audio signal generator's output level.
Page 5-14
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(d) Verify the audio input level recorded in step (c) 5.3.11.3 Audio Frequency Response: Check the
is the previously established station audio frequency response as follows:
programming reference level.
NOTE have been completed and are being met.
If a full audio gain check is required, proceed to
step (e). If completion of steps (a) thru (d) satisfies (b) Adjust audio generator's output for a 25%
testing requirements, proceed to step (o). modulation depth, on modulation monitor.
(e) Set the audio signal generator's output level to (c) Record audio generator's output level.
zero (turned off).
(d) Repeat steps (b) and (c) with the audio
(f) Set active modulator driver PWB's AUDIO generator's frequency set to 7500Hz, 5000Hz,
GAIN potentiometer (R34) fully clockwise. 400Hz and 50Hz respectively.
(g) Adjust output of audio signal generator for a (e) Audio generator's output level should be within
100% modulation depth indication on the 1.0 dB of the level recorded in step (c) for all
modulation monitor. frequencies listed in step (d).
(h) The audio signal generator's output level (f) Set audio generator's frequency to 1000Hz.
indication shall be 0dBm or less.
(g) Check frequency response when modulation
(i) Set active modulator driver PWB's AUDIO depth is 50%, 85% and 95%, by repeating
GAIN potentiometer fully counter clockwise. steps (b) thru (c) and substituting the
appropriate percentage in step (b).
(j) Set the audio signal generator's output level to
+12dBm. (h) Turn off audio generator's output.
(k) Verify the active modulator driver PWB's (i) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
AUDIO GAIN potentiometer can be adjusted for EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp
a 100% modulation depth indication on the turns on).
modulation monitor.
(j) Repeat steps (a) thru (h) for exciter 'A'.
(l) Set the audio signal generator's output level to
the level recorded in step (c). (k) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the
(m) Adjust the active modulator driver PWB's EXCITER-B lamp turns on).
AUDIO GAIN potentiometer for a 100% mod
depth indication on modulation monitor. 5.3.11.4 Signal-To-Noise Ratio: Check the signal-
to-noise ratio as follows:
(n) Set audio signal generator's output to zero.
NOTE
An unacceptable signal-to-noise ratio may be
(o) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
obtained when the RF sample is obtained from the
remote interface PWB's RF MONITOR connector.
turns on).
This is caused by monitoring circuit ground loops.
It may be necessary to use a current probe, inserted
(p) Repeat steps (a) thru (n) for exciter 'A'.
at the RF output connector, as the RF sample source
for the modulation monitor in the following tests.
(q) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the
EXCITER-B lamp turns on).
have been completed and are being met.
Page 5-15
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(b) Connect a distortion analyzer with a nominal (g) Set audio generator's frequency to 1000Hz.
25kHz bandwidth to the demodulated audio
output of the modulation monitor. (h) Check audio distortion level when modulation
(c) Adjust the audio signal generator's output for a depth is 50%, 85% and 95%, by repeating
100% modulation depth indication on the steps (c) thru (g) and substituting the
modulation monitor. appropriate percentage in step (c).
(d) Record signal level on distortion analyzer. (i) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
(e) Set output level of audio signal generator to EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp
zero (turned off). turns on).
(f) Record combined noise and hum level (j) Repeat steps (a) thru (h) for exciter 'A'.
indication on distortion analyzer.
(k) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the
(g) The combined noise and hum level recorded in SELECT EXCITER-B switch and verify
step (f) shall be a minimum of 60dB below the EXCITER-B lamp turns on).
signal level recorded in step (d).
(l) Disconnect the distortion analyzer from the
(h) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT modulation monitor.
turns on). 5.3.11.6 Carrier Shift: Check the carrier shift
with 1000Hz modulation as follows:
(i) Repeat steps (a) thru (g) for exciter 'A'.
(j) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the have been completed and are being met.
EXCITER-B lamp turnson). (b) Record carrier level indication on the
modulation monitor.
5.3.11.5 Audio Distortion: Check the demodulated
audio for distortion as follows: (c) Adjust output of audio signal generator for a
95% modulation depth indication on the
(a) Verify the prerequisites of paragraph 5.3.11.1 modulation monitor.
(d) Record carrier level indication on the
(b) Connect a distortion analyzer with a nominal modulation monitor.
25 kHz bandwidth to the demodulated audio
output of the modulation monitor. (e) Carrier level recorded in step (d) shall not
differ from carrier level indication recorded in
(c) Adjust audio signal generator for a 25% mod step (b) by more than one percent.
depth indication on the modulation monitor.
(f) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
(d) Distortion analyzer's audio distortion level EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp
indication shall not exceed one percent. turns on).
(g) Repeat steps (a) thru (e) for exciter 'A'.
(e) Repeat steps (c) and (d) with audio signal
generator's frequency set to 10 000Hz, (h) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the
7500Hz, 5000Hz, 400Hz and 50Hz. SELECT EXCITER-B switch and verify
EXCITER-B lamp turns on).
(f) Distortion analyzer's audio distortion level
indication shall be a maximum of 1.0% for all (i) Set audio signal generator's frequency to
frequencies listed in step (e). 1000Hz and its output level to zero.
Page 5-16
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.3.11.7 Completion of Modulation Envelope/ (b) At remote control site, set the remote on/off
Emission Level Checks: On completion of the switch to off [momentary application of a
modulation envelope/emission level checks, adjust ground to remote interface PWB's RF OFF
control/monitor panel's ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer terminal (TB1-2)].
for the preset High forward power level recorded in
step (g) of paragraph 5.3.10.2. (c) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter, shall immediately go to zero
5.3.12 REMOTE CONTROL CHECK: Check watts, indicating the RF power stage has been
the remote control circuits as follows: turned off.
5.3.12.1 Remote Control Prerequisites: Complete (d) RF ON lamp shall turn off.
the following for each check.
(e) The exciter drawer's +24 VDC POWER lamp
(a) Set all switches as tabulated in table 5-1. shall turn off.
(b) Connect or verify transmitter's RF output is (f) All cooling air fans shall turn off.
connected to a precision, 50 ohm, resistive,
10kW, dummy load that has provision to (g) The remote RF on status output, on the remote
accurately display RF power being applied. interface PWB's RF ON STATUS terminal
(TB2-1), shall be an open collector.
(c) Connect or verify an audio signal generator,
that has been preset to 1000Hz at a zero output (h) Remaining indicator lamps shall remain as they
level (turned off), is connected as the were before turn-off.
modulating audio source.
(i) At remote control site, set the remote on/off
(d) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- switch to on [momentary application of a
HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is ground to remote interface PWB's RF ON
active and High is the selected preset power terminal (TB1-1)].
level.
(j) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
(e) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the POWER meter shall be restored to the preset
FORWARD POWER meter, is the preset High high RF power level.
forward power level.
(k) RF ON lamp shall turn on.
(f) Set the CONTROL switch to REMOTE.
(l) The exciter drawer's +24 VDC POWER lamp
(g) REMOTE lamp shall turn on. shall turn on.
(h) All other status indicating lamps shall remain (m) All cooling air fans shall turn on.
the same.
(n) The remote RF on status output, on the remote
(i) The remote status output, on the remote interface PWB's RF ON STATUS terminal, shall
interface PWB's REMOTE STATUS terminal be a current sink to ground.
(TB2-15), shall be a current sink to ground.
5.3.12.3 Remote Selection Of Active Exciter:
5.3.12.2 Remote On/Off Control: Verify the Verify exciter A or exciter B can be selected from a
transmitter's on/off function can be controlled from a remote location as follows:
remote location as follows:
(a) Verify the prerequisites of paragraph 5.3.12.1 have been completed and are being met.
Page 5-17
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(b) At the remote control site, set the remote (e) The remote Low 1 power level status output,
Exciter Selector switch to A [momentary on the remote interface PWB's LOW 1 POWER
application of a ground to remote interface STATUS terminal (TB2-4), shall be a current
PWB's EXCITER SELECT-A terminal (TB1-3)]. sink to ground.
(c) EXCITER A lamp shall turn on. The EXCITER B (f) The remaining power level status outputs, on
lamp shall turn off. the remote interface PWB's POWER STATUS
terminals (TB2-3, TB2-5, TB2-6), shall be an
(d) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD open collector.
POWER meter, shall be the preset high forward
power level recorded for exciter A. (g) At the remote control site, set the remote
Power Level Selector switch to Low 2
(e) The remote exciter B status output, on the [momentary application of a ground to remote
remote interface PWB's EXCTR B STATUS interface PWB's POWER SELECT-LOW 2
terminal (TB2-2), shall be an open collector. terminal (TB1-7)].
(f) At the remote control site, set the remote (h) OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 lamp shall turn on.
Exciter Selector switch to B [momentary The remaining OUTPUT POWER lamps shall be
application of a ground to remote interface off.
PWB's EXCITER SELECT-B terminal (TB1-4)].
(i) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
(g) EXCITER B lamp shall turn on. The EXCITER A POWER meter, shall be the preset Low 2
lamp shall turn off. forward power level.
(h) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD (j) The remote Low 2 power level status output,
POWER meter, shall be the preset high forward on the remote interface PWB's LOW 2 POWER
power level recorded for exciter B. STATUS terminal (TB2-5), shall be a current
sink to ground.
(i) The remote exciter B status output, on the
remote interface PWB's EXCTR B STATUS (k) The remaining power level status outputs, on
terminal, shall be a current sink to ground. the remote interface PWB's POWER STATUS
5.3.12.4 Remote Power Level Controls: Verify the open collector.
three preset power levels can be selected from a
remote location as follows: (l) At the remote control site, set the remote
Power Level Selector switch to High
(a) Verify the prerequisites of paragraph 5.3.12.1 [momentary application of a ground to remote
have been completed and are being met. interface PWB's POWER SELECT-HIGH
terminal (TB1-5)].
(b) At the remote control site, set the remote
Power Level Selector switch to Low 1 (m) OUTPUT POWER-HIGH lamp shall turn on. The
[momentary application of a ground to remote remaining OUTPUT POWER lamps shall be off.
interface PWB's POWER SELECT-LOW 1
terminal (TB1-6)]. (n) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter, shall be the preset high forward
(c) OUTPUT POWER-LOW 1 lamp shall turn on. power level.
The remaining OUTPUT POWER lamps shall be
off. (o) The remote high power level status output, on
the remote interface PWB's HIGH POWER
(d) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
STATUS terminal (TB2-3), shall be a current
POWER meter, shall be the preset Low 1
sink to ground.
Page 5-18
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(p) The remaining power level status outputs, on (d) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
the remote interface PWB's POWER STATUS POWER meter, shall increase one increment
terminals (TB2-4, TB2-5, TB2-6), shall be an each time the switch is closed, for the first
open collector. seven switch closures.
(q) At the remote control site, set the remote
Power Level Selector switch to Auto (e) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
[momentary application of a ground to remote POWER meter, shall not change on the eighth
interface PWB's POWER SELECT-AUTO and subsequent switch closures.
terminal (TB1-8)].
(f) Final RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
(r) OUTPUT POWER-AUTO lamp shall turn on. POWER meter, shall be a minimum of ten
The remaining OUTPUT POWER lamps shall be percent higher than the RF output noted in step
off. (b).
(s) If an optional power level controller has not
been installed as A8A2, the RF output as (g) Set remote Power Trim switch in its Decrease
indicated by the FORWARD POWER meter, position [application of a ground to remote
shall be zero watts. interface PWB's POWER DECR terminal (TB1-
10)] a minimum of fifteen times.
(t) If an optional power level controller has been
installed as A8A2, the RF output as indicated
(h) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
by the FORWARD POWER meter, shall be
POWER meter, shall decrease one increment
determined by the power level controller.
each time the switch is closed, for the first
fifteen switch closures.
(u) The remote Auto power level status output, on
the remote interface PWB's AUTO POWER
(i) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
STATUS terminal (TB2-6), shall be a current
POWER meter, shall not change on the
sink to ground.
sixteenth and subsequent switch closures.
(v) The remaining power level status outputs, on
(j) Final RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
the remote interface PWB's POWER STATUS
POWER meter, shall be a minimum of ten
percent lower than the RF output noted in step
open collector.
(b).
(w) Select the High preset RF power level (press/ (k) The power trim circuit can be reset to its mid-
release SELECT OUTPUT POWER-HIGH switch range setting by momentarily turning off the
and verify OUTPUT POWER-HIGH lamp turns RF power stage (Press/release RF-OFF switch
on. and then press/release RF ON switch). It can
also be reset by pressing remote Power Trim
5.3.12.5 Remote Power Trim Control: Verify the switch, in its Increase or Decrease position, a
RF output power can be trimmed from a remote minimum of fifteen times and then pressing the
location as follows: switch seven times in its other position.
(a) Verify the prerequisites of paragraph 5.3.12.1 (l) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
have been completed and are being met. POWER meter, shall be restored to the preset
High forward power level noted in step (b).
(b) Note the RF output, as indicated the FORWARD
POWER meter.
5.3.12.6 Remote PWM Inhibit Control: Verify the
variable pulse width modulator (PWM) drive, and
(c) Set remote Power Trim switch to its Increase therefore the RF output, can be inhibited from a
position [application of a ground to remote remote location; as follows:
interface PWB's POWER INCR terminal (TB1-
9)] a minimum of seven times.
Page 5-19
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(a) Verify the prerequisites of paragraph 5.3.12.1 (c) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the
have been completed and are being met. FORWARD POWER meter, is the preset high
(b) Note the RF output, as indicated by the
FORWARD POWER meter. (d) Simulate a high B- VDC by temporarily
connecting a 100K ohm resistor in parallel with
(c) Monitor the FORWARD POWER meter resistor R6 on control interface PWB.
indication and simulate a PWM Inhibit input NOTE
by applying a ground to the remote interface Connecting a 100K ohm resistor in parallel with
PWB's PWM INHIBIT terminal (TB1-11). resistor R6 simulates a B- voltage that is more
negative than -85 volts DC. Refer to figure MD-4 to
(d) Forward power indication on the FORWARD locate the control interface PWB and then to its
POWER meter, shall instantly go to zero watts,
service instruction manual to locate R6.
indicating the modulator (PWM) drive has been
inhibited. If the High B- VDC protection circuit is suspect or if
it does not satisfy the requirements of the following
(e) Monitor the FORWARD POWER meter tests, refer to paragraph 5.4.6 for a detailed
indication and remove ground from remote test/adjustment procedure.
interface PWB's PWM INHIBIT terminal (TB1-
11). (e) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter, shall be instantly shutback to a
(f) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD near zero watts reading.
POWER meter, shall instantly be restored to the
preset high forward power level noted in step (f) The HIGH B-VDC ALARM and LOW RF DRIVE
(b). ALARM lamps shall turn on.
5.3.13 PROTECTION CIRCUIT CHECKS: (g) The High B- alarm output, on remote interface
Verify the fault detector circuits, that monitor critical PWB's HIGH B-VDC ALARM terminal (TB2-
parameters of the transmitter and protect the RF 10), shall be a current sink to ground.
power amplifier stages, are functioning within their
design limits as follows: (h) The Drive Level Alarm output, on remote
NOTE interface PWBs DRIVE LEVEL ALARM terminal
There is no practical way of controlling the AC (TB2-11), shall be a current sink to ground.
power source voltage. It is also not practical to
detune RF drive circuits or simulate faults in the RF (i) Remove the 100K ohm resistor which was
output stages without risk to the solid state devices temporarily installed across R6 of the control
in the RF power amplifier stages. The following are interface PWB.
go/no go test of fault detection circuits that monitor
voltages which represent critical parameters. (j) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter, shall return to the preset High
5.3.13.1 High B- VDC Detector: Verify the RF forward power level noted in step (c).
output is shutback (turned off) and a high B- VDC
alarm is produced when the output of the B- VDC (k) The High B- alarm output, on the remote
power supply exceeds -85 VDC, as follows: interface PWB's HIGH B-VDC ALARM terminal
(a) Set all switches as tabulated in table 5-1. shall be an open collector.
(l) The Drive Level alarm output, on the remote
(b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- interface PWB's DRIVE LEVEL ALARM terminal
HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is shall be an open collector.
active and High is the selected preset power
level. (m) The HIGH B-VDC ALARM and LOW RF DRIVE
ALARM lamps shall remain on.
Page 5-20
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(n) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release control (g) The High AC alarm output, on the remote
interface PWB's ALARM RESET switch). interface PWB's HIGH AC ALARM terminal
(o) The HIGH B-VDC ALARM and LOW RF DRIVE (h) Remove the 100K ohm resistor which was
ALARM lamps shall turn off.
temporarily installed across R7 of the control
interface PWB.
5.3.13.2 High AC Voltage Detector: Verify the RF
output is shutback (turned off) and a high AC alarm (i) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
is produced when the voltage of the AC power source POWER meter, shall return to the preset high
is more than 10% above its nominal value, as forward power level noted in step (c).
follows: (j) The remote high AC alarm output, on the
NOTE remote interface PWB's HIGH AC ALARM
The output voltage of the unregulated 24 VDC terminal shall be an open collector.
power supply is monitored, by the high AC voltage
detector circuit, since it is directly proportional to (k) HIGH AC ALARM lamp shall remain on.
the AC power source voltage.
(l) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release control
If the High AC Voltage protection circuit is suspect interface PWB's ALARM RESET switch).
or if the requirements of the following tests are not
satisfied, refer to paragraph 5.4.7 for a detailed (m) HIGH AC ALARM lamp shall turn off.
test/adjustment procedure.
5.3.13.3 Low AC Voltage Detector: Verify the
(a) Set or verify all switches are set as tabulated in RF output is shutback (turned off) and a low AC
table 5-1. alarm is produced when AC power source voltage is
more than 10% below its nominal value, as follows:
NOTE
active and High is the selected preset power The output voltage of the unregulated 24 VDC
level. power supply is monitored, by the low AC voltage
detector circuit, since it is directly proportional to
(c) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the the AC power source voltage.
FORWARD POWER meter, is the preset High
forward power level. If the Low AC Voltage protection circuit is suspect
or if the requirements of the following tests are not
(d) Simulate a high AC voltage by temporarily satisfied, refer to paragraph 5.4.7 for a detailed
connecting a 100K ohm resistor in parallel with test/adjustment procedure.
resistor R7 on control interface PWB.
(a) Set or verify all switches are set as tabulated in
NOTE table 5-1.
Connecting a 100K ohm resistor in parallel with
resistor R7 simulates a voltage that is more than (b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
10% above the nominal output of the unregulated 24
VDC power supply. Refer to figure MD-4 to locate active and High is the selected preset power
the control interface PWB and then to its service level.
instruction manual to locate R7.
(c) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the
FORWARD POWER meter, is the preset high
(e) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
near zero watts reading.
(d) Simulate a low AC voltage by temporarily
(f) HIGH AC ALARM lamp shall turn on. connecting a 47K ohm resistor in parallel with
capacitor C4 on control interface PWB.
Page 5-21
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
NOTE (b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-

Connecting a 47K ohm resistor in parallel with HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
capacitor C4 simulates a voltage that is more than active and High is the selected preset power
10% below the nominal output of the unregulated 24 level.
VDC power supply. Refer to figure MD-4 to locate
the control interface PWB and then to its service (c) Verify the control interface PWB's MAIN
instruction manual to locate C4. EXCITER SELECT switch is set to OFF.
(e) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD (d) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the
POWER meter, shall be instantly shutback to a FORWARD POWER meter, is the preset high
near zero watts reading. forward power level.
(f) LOW AC ALARM lamp shall turn on. (e) Simulate a low RF drive condition by
temporarily connecting a 100K ohm resistor in
(g) The low AC alarm output, on the remote parallel with resistor R2 on the control
interface PWB's LOW AC ALARM terminal interface PWB.
NOTE
(h) Remove the 47K ohm resistor which was Connecting a 100K ohm resistor in parallel with
temporarily installed across C4 of the control resistor R2 simulates an RF drive level voltage of
interface PWB. less than 35.0 VDC. Refer to figure MD-4 to locate
the control interface PWB and then to its service
(i) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD instruction manual to locate R2.
POWER meter, shall return to the preset high
forward power level noted in step (c). (e) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
(j) The low AC alarm output, on the remote near zero watts reading.
interface PWB's LOW AC ALARM terminal
shall be an open collector. (f) LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall turn on.
(k) The LOW AC ALARM lamp shall remain on. (g) The low RF drive alarm output, on the remote
interface PWB's DRIVE LEVEL ALARM terminal
(l) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release control (TB2-11), shall be a current sink to ground.
interface PWB's ALARM RESET switch).
(h) Remove the 100K ohm resistor connected in
(m) LOW AC ALARM lamp shall turn off. step (d).
5.3.13.4 Low RF Drive Level Detector: Verify the (i) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
RF output is shutback (turned off) and a low RF POWER meter, shall return to the preset High
drive alarm is produced when amplitude of the RF forward power level noted in step (c).
drive, to the RF power amplifier stages, falls below
its fault threshold, as follows: (j) The low RF drive alarm output, on the remote
interface PWB's DRIVE LEVEL ALARM terminal
NOTE shall be an open collector.
The RF drive is peak detected by a half-wave
rectifier circuit in the RF drive tuning PWB. When (k) LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall remain on.
the RF drive is acceptable, the output voltage of this
circuit will be more than 35.0 VDC. (l) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release control
table 5-1. (m) LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall turn off.
Page 5-22
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.3.13.5 Detuned RF Drive Detector: Verify the (h) LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall also turn on.
RF output is shutback (turned off) and a detuned RF
drive alarm is produced when the RF drive tuned (i) Detuned RF drive alarm output, on remote
circuits are detuned enough to apply a nominal 1.0 interface PWB's DRIVE TUNING ALARM
VDC tune alarm to the detuned RF drive detection terminal (TB2-12), shall be a current sink to
circuit, as follows: ground.
NOTE (j) The low RF drive alarm output, on remote

The RF drive output of each RF drive amplifier is interface PWB's DRIVE LEVEL ALARM terminal
monitored by a circuit that compares the phase of (TB2-11), shall also be a current sink to
current and voltage. When RF drive output's tuned ground.
circuits are detuned, current and voltage waveforms
will be out of phase by an amount proportional to (k) Set variable DC power supply's to 0.0 VDC.
the degree of detuning. Monitoring circuit output
will be a DC voltage proportional to current/voltage (l) DETUNED RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall remain
phase difference. When tuned circuits are on and the conditions of steps (g) thru (j) shall
acceptable, this DC voltage will be less than 1.0 be maintained.
VDC.
(m) Reset the RF drive detuned detector circuit
(a) Set or verify all switches are set as tabulated in (press/release control interface PWB's RF
table 5-1. TUNING RESET switch).
(b) Verify
the EXCITER B and OUTPUT (n) DETUNED RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall turn
POWER-HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter off.
'B' is active and High is the selected preset
power level. (o) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter, shall return to the preset High
(c) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the forward power level noted in step (c).
forward power level. (p) The detuned RF drive alarm output, on the
remote interface PWB's DRIVE TUNING ALARM
(d) Connect a variable DC power source that has terminal, shall be an open collector.
been preset to 0.0 VDC between the J1-2 side
of resistor R107 (+) and TP2 (ground) on the (q) The low RF drive alarm output, on the remote
control interface PWB. interface PWB's DRIVE LEVEL ALARM terminal
shall be an open collector.
NOTE
Refer to figure MD-4 to locate the control interface
(r) LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall remain on.
PWB and then to its service instruction manual to
locate R107.
(s) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release control
(e) Monitor the FORWARD POWER meter
indication and slowly increase output of
(t) LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall turn off.
variable DC power supply until DETUNED RF
DRIVE ALARM lamp just turns on.
(u) Disconnect the variable DC power supply.
(f) The variable DC power supply's output shall
be between 0.5 and 1.0 VDC.
(g) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD

Page 5-23
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.3.13.6 High RF Current Detector: Verify the RF (c) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the
output is shutback (turned off) and a high RF current FORWARD POWER meter, is the preset high
alarm is produced when RF power amplifier stress forward power level.
current limits are approached, as follows:
NOTE (d) Remove the RF current sample input from the
A current probe in the RF output filter provides an control interface PWB. Disconnect coaxial
RF voltage that is representative of the RF output cable (P7) from its RF CURRENT SAMPLE
current. connector (J7).
The high RF current detector forms part of a NOTE

dynamic servo that turns off the RF output Refer to figure MD-4 to locate control interface
(shutback) when the high RF current fault threshold PWB and to its service instruction manual to locate
is exceeded. When this occurs, the RF current will J7.
fall to zero, the RF shutback signal will be removed
and then the RF output will be exponentially (e) Connect a function generator that is preset to
restored over a 250 millisecond period. If a high provide a 100Hz square wave at a peak-to-
RF current is still detected, the shutback/turn on peak output of 0.0 volts (referenced to ground
cycle will be repeated. potential) to the control interface PWB's RF
Each shutback causes an alarm count/power CURRENT SAMPLE connector (J7).
cutback circuit to advance one count. If more than
three counts occur in any twenty second period, the (f) Simulate an increasing high RF current by
RF output will be reduced (cutback) incrementally slowly increasing function generator's peak-to-
until the RF current is acceptable or until shutdown peak amplitude (referenced to ground potential)
occurs at a count of nine. until the HIGH RF CURRENT ALARM lamp just
turns on.
The alarm count/power cutback circuit resets 20
seconds after the first count if a count of nine has NOTE
not been attained (shutdown has not occurred). If The SWR CUTBACK ALARM lamp will also turn on
shutdown has occurred, a manually initiated alarm because the dynamic servo has been disabled and
reset command must be applied to reset the counter the 100Hz input will cause the alarm counter to shift
and restore normal operation. past a count of three, to a count of nine very rapidly.
The cutback feature is difficult to check because of The RF output will be shutback to and remain at
the test circuit limitations. The counter/cutback zero watts.
function is tested in the high SWR detector tests of
paragraph 5.3.13.7, therefore it is not tested in this (g) Function generator's peak-to-peak amplitude
procedure. shall be between 4.2 and 4.6 volts, noting the
negative going peak must be at ground
potential.
(h) If requirements of steps (f) and (g) are met,

The protection provided by the high RF current proceed to step (m). If requirements are not
detection circuit is disabled, by disconnecting the met, complete steps (i) thru (l).
output of the RF current probe from its input,
during the following tests. Restore circuit integrity (i) Set the control interface PWB's CURRENT
as soon as possible after completion of testing. THRESHOLD potentiometer (R111) fully
clockwise.
(a) Set all switches as tabulated in table 5-1.
NOTE
Refer to the control interface PWB's service
instruction manual to locate CURRENT THRESHOLD
potentiometer R111.
level.
Page 5-24
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(j) Set the peak-to-peak amplitude of the function 5.3.13.7 High SWR Detector: Verify the RF
generator's output to 4.4 volts output is shutback (turned off) and a high SWR
alarm is produced when the reflected power exceeds
(k) If the HIGH RF CURRENT ALARM lamp is on, 800 watts, as follows:
reset the alarm circuit (press/release control NOTE
interface PWB's ALARM RESET switch). A forward/reflected power probe in the RF output
NOTE filter provides a DC voltage that is proportional to
The SWR CUTBACK ALARM lamp will also turn off the reflected power sensed at the filter's output, as
and the RF output will be restored to the high RF its reflected power output. This voltage is a nominal
output level noted in step (c). 5.3 VDC when the reflected power is 800 watts.
The high SWR detector forms part of a dynamic
(l) Slowly adjust the control interface PWB's servo that turns off the RF output (shutback) when
CURRENT THRESHOLD potentiometer counter the high reflected power fault threshold is exceeded.
clockwise until the HIGH RF CURRENT ALARM When this occurs, the reflected power will fall to
lamp just turns on. zero, the RF shutback signal will be removed and
then the RF output will be exponentially restored
(m) The RF output shall be instantly shutback to a over a 250 millisecond period. If a high reflected
near zero watts reading. power is still detected, the shutback/turn on cycle
will be repeated.
(n) SWR CUTBACK ALARM lamp will also turn on.
Each shutback causes an alarm count/power
cutback circuit to advance one count. If more than
(o) The high RF current alarm output, on remote
three counts occur in any 20 second period, the RF
interface PWB's RF CUR ALARM terminal
output will be reduced (cutback) incrementally until
the reflected power is acceptable or until shutdown
occurs at a count of '9'.
(p) Set the peak-to-peak amplitude of function
generator's output to 0.0 volts. The alarm count/power cutback circuit resets 20
seconds after the first count if a count of '9' has not
(q) The RF output shall remain shutback at near been attained (shutdown has not occurred). If
zero watts, the HIGH RF CURRENT ALARM and shutdown has occurred, a manually initiated alarm
SWR CUTBACK ALARM lamps shall remain on. reset command must be applied to reset the counter
and restore normal operation.
(r) The high RF current alarm output, on the
remote interface PWB's RF CUR ALARM A one-shot multivibrator in the SWR alarm circuit
terminal, shall switch to an open collector. restricts the clocking of the alarm counter, by SWR
alarms, to a maximum of one clock per second.
(s) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release the Additional SWR alarms will be disregarded and
control interface PWB's ALARM RESET have no influence on the count.
switch).
(t) The RF output shall be restored to the preset

high forward power level noted in step (c).
The protection provided by the high SWR detection
(u) The HIGH RF CURRENT ALARM and SWR circuit is disabled, by disconnecting the output of
CUTBACK ALARM lamps shall turn off.
the forward/reflected power probe from its input,
during the following tests. Restore circuit integrity
(v) Disconnect function generator and restore the as soon as possible after completion of testing.
high RF current detector circuit integrity by
connecting RF current sample coaxial cable (a) Set all switches as tabulated in table 5-1.
(P7) to control interface PWB's RF CURRENT
SAMPLE input connector (J7).
Page 5-25
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- (l) SWR Shutback Alarm output, on the remote
HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is interface PWB's SWR SHUTBACK ALARM
active and High is the selected preset power terminal (TB2-13), shall switch to an open
level. collector.
(m) The SWR SHUTBACK ALARM lamp shall stay
(c) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the on.
forward power level. (n) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release the
control interface PWB's ALARM RESET
(d) Remove control interface PWB's reflected switch).
power input. Disconnect coaxial cable (P6) (o) The SWR SHUTBACK ALARM lamp shall turn
from its REFLECTED POWER connector (J6). off.
NOTE
NOTE
Steps (p) thru (ab) must be completed within twenty
Refer to figure MD-4 to locate the control interface
seconds, after the SWR SHUTBACK ALARM lamp
PWB and then to its service instruction manual to
turns on in step (q).
locate J6.
(p) Switch the variable DC power supply's output
(e) Connect a variable DC power supply, that has on (6.0 VDC) and then off three times at a
been preset to 0.0 VDC, to control interface maximum repetition rate of one on/off cycle
PWB's REFLECTED POWER connector (J6) per second, noting the time of first turn-on.
using a suitable coaxial cable. NOTE
A one-shot multivibrator in the SWR alarm circuit
(f) Simulate an increasing reflected power by restricts the clocking of the alarm counter, by SWR
slowly increasing the output voltage of the alarms, to a maximum of one clock per second.
variable DC power supply until the SWR Spurious or additional SWR alarms will be
SHUTBACK ALARM lamp just turns on. disregarded and have no influence on the count.
NOTE (q) The SWR SHUTBACK ALARM lamp shall turn
Steps (g) thru (n) must be completed within twenty on the first time the power supply is switched
seconds after the SWR SHUTBACK ALARM lamp on and it shall stay on for steps (r) thru (x).
turns on in step (f). (r) The RF output shall be reduced to zero watts
when the power supply is on and it shall be
(g) The variable DC power supply's output shall restored to the preset high forward power level
be between 4.9 and 5.6 VDC noted in step (c) when the power supply is
switched off.
(s) Switch the variable DC power supply's output
on and then off one more (fourth) time.
(t) The SWR CUTBACK ALARM lamp shall turn on.
(i) SWR Shutback Alarm output, on the remote
interface PWB's SWR SHUTBACK ALARM
(u) The RF output shall be reduced to zero watts
terminal (TB2-13), shall be a current sink to
when the power supply is on and it shall return
ground.
to a slightly lower level than the forward power
level noted in step (c), when the power supply
(j) Set variable DC power supply's output to 6.0
is switched off.
VDC and then switch off its output.
(v) SWR cutback alarm output, on the remote
(k) The RF output shall be restored to the preset interface PWB's SWR CUTBACK ALARM
high forward power level noted in step (c). terminal (TB2-14), shall be a current sink to
ground.
Page 5-26
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(w) Switch the variable DC power supply's output (ai) The requirements of steps (ae), (af), (ag) and
on and then off four (fifth thru eighth) times at (ah) shall be maintained indefinitely, indicating
a maximum repetition rate of one on/off cycle the alarm counter's 20-second reset clock has
per second. been inhibited.
(aj) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release the
(x) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD control interface PWB's ALARM RESET
POWER meter, shall be reduced to zero watts switch).
when the power supply is on and it shall
increment to a lower forward power each time (ak) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
the power supply is switched off. POWER meter, shall be restored to the preset
high forward power level noted in step (c).
(y) Approximately 20 seconds after time noted in
step (p) (first turn-on of power supply), the RF (al) The SWR CUTBACK ALARM and SWR
output shall be restored to the preset high SHUTBACK ALARM lamps shall both turn off.
forward power level noted in step (c),
indicating the alarm counter has been reset to (am) SWR cutback alarm output, on the remote
'0'. interface PWB's SWR CUTBACK ALARM
(z) SWR cutback alarm output, on the remote terminal (TB2-14), shall switch to an open
interface PWB's SWR CUTBACK ALARM collector.
terminal, shall switch to an open collector. (an) Disconnect variable DC power supply and
restore the high SWR detector circuit's
(aa) The SWR CUTBACK ALARM and SWR integrity. Connect reflected power coaxial
SHUTBACK ALARM lamps shall remain on. cable (P6) to the control interface PWB's
REFLECTED POWER connector (J6).
(ab) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release the
control interface PWB's ALARM RESET 5.3.13.8 Modulation Peak Limiting: Verify the
switch). modulation peaks are limited, to reduce RF power
amplifier stress current, when the RF output's
(ac) The SWR CUTBACK ALARM and SWR modulation envelope contains low frequency (long
SHUTBACK ALARM lamps shall both turn off. duration), high amplitude peaks, as follows:
(ad) Switch the variable DC power supply's output (a) Set all switches as tabulated in table 5-1.
on and then off a minimum of nine times,
within 20 seconds, at a maximum repetition (b) Connect an oscilloscope to the remote interface
rate of one on/off cycle per second. Ensure DC PWB's RF MONITOR connector (J4).
power supply is off on completion.
(c) Verify an audio generator is connected as the
(ae) The SWR SHUTBACK ALARM and SWR modulating audio source.
CUTBACK ALARM lamps shall both turn on.
(d) Preset audio generator to provide a 30Hz sine
(af) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD wave at a zero output level (turned off).
POWER meter, shall be shutback (zero watts).
(e) Verify transmitter's RF output is connected to a
(ag) SWR shutback alarm output, on the remote precision, 50 ohm, resistive, 10kW, dummy
interface PWBs SWR SHUTBACK ALARM load that has provision to accurately display
terminal (TB2-13), shall be an open collector. the RF power being applied to it.
(ah) SWR cutback alarm output, on the remote (f) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
interface PWB's SWR CUTBACK ALARM HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
terminal (TB2-14), shall be a current sink to active and High is the selected preset power
ground. level.
Page 5-27
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5

table 5-1.

(c) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the
(d) Open an external interlock switch.
NOTE
The transmitter control circuit's 24 VDC power
source is routed from TB1-14 to TB1-13, on the
remote interface PWB, by the external interlock
circuit.
Modulated at 95% by 30Hz Sine Wave (e) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
Figure 5-8 RF Output with Positive Peak Clipping POWER meter, shall fall to near zero reading,
indicating the RF power stages have been
(g) Set ADJUST-HIGH potentiometer for a forward turned off.
power, as indicated by dummy load's forward
power indicator, of precisely 5000 watts. (f) INTERLOCK OPEN ALARM lamp shall turn on.
(h) Monitor oscilloscope and adjust the audio (g) Deleted.

generator's output for 95% modulation as
indicated by modulation envelope waveform. (h) The exciter drawer's +24 VDC POWER lamp
shall turn off.
(i) Monitor oscilloscope and adjust active
modulator driver PWB's THRESHOLD potent- (i) All cooling air fans shall turn off.
meter (R6) until trailing edge of each 30Hz
cycle is just being clipped as depicted in figure (j) The interlock open alarm output, on the
5-8 and then adjust the THRESHOLD remote interface PWB's INTLK OPEN ALARM
potentiometer for a setting that is on the edge of terminal (TB2-21), shall be a current sink to
the clipping threshold (no clipping of ground.
modulation envelope).
(k) The RF ON lamp shall remain on and the RF on
(j) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT status output, on the remote interface PWB's
EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp RF ON STATUS terminal (TB2-1), shall remain
turns on). a current sink to ground.
(k) Repeat steps (g), (h) and (i) for the 'A' exciter's (l) Remaining indicator lamps shall remain as they
modulator driver PWB. were before turn-off.
(l) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the (m) Restore the integrity of the interlock circuit.
EXCITER-B lamp turnson). (n) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter shall be restored to the preset
5.3.13.9 Check of Safety Interlock: Verify the RF high power level.
output is shutback (turned off) and an interlock open
alarm is produced when the integrity of the interlock (o) INTERLOCK OPEN ALARM lamp shall turn off.
circuit is interrupted, as follows:
Page 5-28
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(p) The exciter drawer's +24 VDC POWER lamp (i) Approximately 1.5 seconds after the 100K ohm
shall turn on. resistor is installed in step (e), the EXCITER B
lamp shall turn off and EXCITER A lamp shall
(q) All cooling air fans shall turn on. turn on, indicating an automatic exciter transfer
has occurred.
(r) The interlock open alarm output, on the (j) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
remote interface PWB's INTLK OPEN ALARM POWER meter, shall remain shutback at a near
terminal, shall be an open collector. zero watts reading, the LOW RF DRIVE ALARM
lamp shall stay on and the low RF drive alarm
5.3.14 AUTO EXCITER CHANGEOVER: output, on the remote interface PWB's DRIVE
Verify the active exciter will automatically be LEVEL ALARM terminal (TB2-11), shall be a
transferred from the preselected 'main' exciter to the current sink to ground.
'standby (reserve) exciter when the 'main' exciter's RF
drive fails and causes a low RF drive alarm to be (k) Remove the 100K ohm resistor which was
produced (see paragraph 5.3.13.4). installed across R2.
(a) Set or verify all switches are set as tabulated in (l) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
table 5-1. POWER meter, shall return to the preset high
forward power level noted in step (d).
HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is (m) The low RF drive alarm output, on the remote
active and High is the selected preset power interface PWB's DRIVE LEVEL ALARM
level. terminal shall switch to an open collector.
(c) Set the control interface PWB's MAIN EXCITER (n) The LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall stay on.
SELECT switch is set to B.
(o) Reset the alarm circuit (press/release control
(d) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the interface PWB's ALARM RESET switch).
forward power level. (p) The LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall turn
off.
(e) Simulate a low RF drive condition by
connecting a 100K ohm resistor in parallel with (q) Set the control interface PWB's MAIN EXCITER
resistor R2 on control interface PWB. SELECT switch to A
NOTE (r) Check automatic transfer from exciter A to B

Connecting a 100K ohm resistor in parallel with by repeating steps (d) thru (o), noting EXCITER
resistor R2 simulates an RF drive failure. Refer to B lamp turns on and EXCITER A lamp turns off
figure MD-4 to locate the control interface PWB in step (i).
and then to its service instruction manual to locate
R2. (s) Set the control interface PWB's MAIN EXCITER
SELECT switch to its operational setting.
(f) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD 5.3.15 REMOTE FORWARD POWER
POWER meter, shall be instantly shutback to a MONITOR: When connected, remote forward
near zero watts reading. power indicator's reading shall be the same as the
(g) The LOW RF DRIVE ALARM lamp shall turn on. FORWARD POWER meter.
(h) The low RF drive alarm output, on the remote 5.3.16 REMOTE REFLECTED POWER
interface PWB's DRIVE LEVEL ALARM MONITOR When connected, remote reflected
terminal (TB2-11), shall be a current sink to power indicator's reading shall be the same as the
ground. REFLECTED POWER meter.
Page 5-29
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES (e) Connect an audio signal generator, that has
5.4 Procedures referred to as special adjustment been set to 1000Hz and its output level to zero
procedures contain adjustments that should not have (turned off), to the left and right input terminals
to be altered once they have been established. of the station's stereo exciter, in lieu of normal
Adjustments have been precisely set at factory prior station programming.
to shipment and should not require further
adjustment. Settings will affect accuracy of the NOTE
adjustment; therefore, they should not be disturbed If the left plus right audio from the AM stereo
unless their accuracy is suspect and then only if the exciter was disconnected from the remote interface
specified test equipment is available. PWB's AUDIO terminals, to connect an audio
generator for other test procedures, ensure audio
5.4.1 INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION generator has been disconnected and audio from the
(EXTERNAL AM STEREO RF DRIVE): Adjust AM stereo exciter has been reconnected.
for minimum incidental phase modulation (IPM)
when an external AM stereo generator is the RF drive (f) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the
source for an RF drive PWB in the exciter drawer, as FORWARD POWER meter, is the preset high
follows: forward power level.
NOTE (g) Adjust output of audio generator for a 90

If Nautel's optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter percent modulation depth indication on the left
PWB is installed as the RF drive source for exciter plus right (L + R) channel of the station's
A, do not use these procedures for the 'A' exciter. stereo modulation monitor. Ensure the left and
Use the procedures detailed in the C-QUAM AM right signals are equal.
stereo exciter PWB's service instruction manual.
(h) Adjust active RF drive PWB's IPM BALance
An unacceptable incidental phase modulation (IPM) potentiometer (R18) minimum left/right
level may be obtained when the modulation separation, as indicated on the station's stereo
monitor's RF sample is obtained from the remote modulation monitor.
interface PWB's RF MONITOR connector (J4), as the
result of monitoring circuit ground loops. It may be NOTE
necessary to use a current probe, that is inserted at Two RF drive PWBs (A and B) are located in the
the RF output connector, as the RF sample source exciter drawer when Nautel's optional C-QUAM AM
for the modulation monitor in the following tests. stereo exciter is not installed. Refer to figure MD-6
to locate them, noting the A RF drive PWB is A3
(a) Set or verify all switches are set as tabulated in and the B RF drive PWB is A4. For assembly detail
table 5-1. of an RF drive PWB, refer to its service instruction
manual.
(b) Connect or verify the transmitter's RF output is
connected to a precision, 50 ohm, resistive, (i) Set audio generator's output to zero (turned
10kW, dummy load. off).
(c) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- (j) Select the 'A' exciter (press/release the SELECT
HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is EXCITER-A switch and verify EXCITER-A lamp
active and high is the selected preset power turns on.
level.
(k) Repeat steps (f) thru (i) for exciter 'A'.
(d) Connect an AM stereo modulation monitor to
the remote interface PWB's RF MONITOR (l) Return to the 'B' exciter (press/release the
connector (J4). SELECT EXCITER-B switch and verify
EXCITER-B lamp turnson).
Page 5-30
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.4.2 RF VOLTAGE PROBE TUNING: Tune (j) The FORWARD POWER meter indication
the RF voltage probe (A9A2) as follows: should not change significantly in step (i).
(k) If necessary, adjust RF voltage probe's

WARNING IMPEDANCE ADJUST variable inductor (L1)
for minimum change in the FORWARD POWER
RF voltages that may cause serious injury or death meter's indication.
may be present when power amplifier's are turned
on. (l) Repeat steps (e) thru (k) until their require-
NOTE ments are met without further adjustment.
The RF voltage probe is located inside the RF
output filter. Refer to figure MD-12 as an aid in (m) The REFLECTED POWER meter indication shall
locating the probe, noting access holes in the top of be less than 50 watts.
the RF output filter permit access to its adjustments.
5.4.3 RF OUTPUT SPARK GAP
(a) Set all switches as tabulated in table 5-1. ADJUSTMENT: Set the air gap on the RF output
filter's adjustable air spark gap (E1) as follows:
(b) Connect or verify the transmitter's RF output is
connected to a precision, 50 ohm, resistive, NOTE
10kW, dummy load. The spark gap setting is dependent on the RF power
(c) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER- output of the transmitter and the altitude of the
HIGH lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is transmitter site. The spark gap setting is preset at
active and High is the selected preset power the factory if the station's altitude is known and
level. should not be adjusted unless the air gap is suspect.
Partial disassembly of the transmitter will be
(d) Verify the RF output, as indicated by the required to gain access to the spark gap.
forward power level. (a) Turn off the transmitter by switching off its
MASTER CONTROL circuit breaker.
(e) Connect a digital multimeter, set to measure
DC volts, across the REFLECTED POWER (b) Determine altitude of transmitter site in feet.
meter's terminals.
(f) Adjust RF voltage probe's RATIO ADJUST (c) Enter figure 5-9 with the rated power level of
variable capacitor (C10) for a minimum the transmitter (5000 watts) and altitude
indication (null) on digital multimeter. obtained in step (b) to determine the air gap in
thousandths of an inch.
(g) Connect a digital multimeter, set to measure
DC volts, between terminal 1 (+) of the PWB
(d) If front access panel has not been removed
connected across the FORWARD POWER
from the front of the RF output filter, gain
meter's terminals and ground.
access to interior of the RF output filter, by:
(h) Connect a 50 ohm resistor, that has a connect/
- Opening the control/monitor panel and securing
disconnect switching device, to the remote
it in its fully open position.
interface PWB's RF MONITOR connector (J4),
using a suitable coaxial cable. - Removing two 1/4 x 20 screws securing the
right-hand side of the hinged interface panel,
(i) Monitor FORWARD POWER meter indication
noting one is at the top and the other is at the
while repeatedly connecting/disconnecting the
bottom, and then swinging the interface panel
50 ohm resistance connected to the remote to its fully open position.
interface PWB's RF MONITOR connector.
Page 5-31
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
NOTE
The interface panel is located immediately behind
the control/monitor panel.
- Removing the RF output filter's front access

panel by removing fourteen hex head 6-32 x
0.5 inch screws and fourteen flat washers and
then carefully lifting away the panel.
NOTE
See figure MD-12 as an aid in locating spark gap
(surge arrestor) E1.
(e) Measure air gap between the spark gap ball

and spark gap plate, using a feeler gauge.
(f) The air gap should be distance determined in

step (c).
Figure 5-9
(g) If necessary, loosen locking nut on spark gap, Determination of Air Gap for Spark Gap A9E1
adjust position of spark gap ball for the
required gap and then tighten locking nut. 5.4.4.1 Series Tuning: Tune RF drive tuning
inductor A12L2 as follows:
(h) Visually inspect the RF output filter's interior
and then install its front panel using fourteen (a) Turn off the transmitter by setting the circuit
hex head 6-32 x 0.5 inch screws and fourteen breaker panel's MASTER CONTROL circuit
flat washers retained during its removal. breaker to OFF.
(b) Disconnect the mating connector from J1 of

each RF power module, noting J1 is located at
the rear of the module.
Ensure the RF output filter's access panel
retaining screws are firmly tightened. If they are (c) Terminate the RF drive into a short circuit by
not, eddy currents, that may affect filter tuning and installing a shorting jumper between pins 13
that will generate excessive heat, will result. and 16 of each wiring harness connector (P28
thru P31) disconnected in step (b).
(i) Close the hinged interface panel and secure
using two 1/4 x 20 screws and 1/4 inch (d) Connect a function generator, that has been
washers [retained when opened in step (d)]. preset to provide a sinusoidal RF output at the
carrier frequency, between the output
5.4.4 RF DRIVE TUNING: Tune the RF connection (Q2-Drain) of RF drive amplifier
drive's series tuning inductor (A12L2), which is A12A2 and ground, noting the RF drive
located on the RF drive distribution panel, and the amplifier is located on the RF drive distribution
shunt tuning (parallel) inductors of each RF power panel.
module, as follows:
NOTE
Refer to the RF drive distribution panel assembly The wiring between the RF drive amplifiers and
detail (figure MD-17) to locate RF tuning coil relay K1 is part of the tuned circuit. Do not
A12L2. change lead dressing after optimum tuning has
been achieved.
Page 5-32
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 5-3 RF Drive Series Tuning Inductor 5.4.4.2 Parallel Tuning: Tune the RF drive shunt
tuning inductor (L1) in the RF power modules as
TAP NUMBER follows:
CONNECTION OF TURNS
NOTE
If an RF power module has been serviced or if it has
1-4 10
not previously been fine tuned in the transmitter,
1-3 8
verify it was coarse tuned (while removed from the
1-2 5
transmitter) to the carrier frequency. Refer to the
2-4 5
RF power module's service instruction manual for
2-3 3
bench tuning procedures.
3-4 2
(a) Verify the requirements of paragraph 5.4.4.1
(e) Connect an oscilloscope across the function
generator's output.
(b) Set all switches/circuit breakers, except the
MAIN POWER circuit breaker as tabulated in
(f) Adjust the RF TUNE variable inductor (A12L2)
table 5-1. Set the MAIN POWER circuit breaker
for a minimum amplitude (null) RF drive
to OFF.
waveform on the oscilloscope.
(c) Terminate or verify the RF output is terminated
(g) If a definite null is not obtained in step (f), set
into a precision 50 ohm, resistive, 10 kW
the RF TUNE inductor's slug to its fully inserted
dummy load.
position (maximum inductance) and then
determine the resonant frequency of the series
(d) Turn off or verify the modulating audio source
circuit by adjusting the frequency of the
is turned off.
function generator.
(e) Set ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer fully counter
(h) If resonant frequency is below the required
carrier frequency, change the RF TUNE
inductor's tap selection for less inductance
(f) Turn on the transmitter by setting the MAIN
(fewer turns) and repeat step (f). Refer to table
POWER circuit breaker to ON.
5-3 to determine the tap/turn selection.
(g) Select the 'B' exciter (press/release the SELECT
(i) If resonant frequency is above the required
EXCITER-B switch and verify EXCITER-B lamp
carrier frequency, change the RF TUNE
turns on).
inductor's tap selection for more inductance
(more turns) and repeat step (f). Refer to table
5-3 to determine the tap/turn selection. (h) Select Low 2 preset RF power level (press/
release SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 switch
(j) Disconnect the oscilloscope and function and verify OUTPUT POWER LOW 2 lamp turns
on).
generator.
(k) Remove the shorting jumpers which were (i) Turn on the RF power stages (press/release RF
installed in step (c) from each wiring harness ON switch and verify RF ON lamp turns on).
connector (P28 thru P31).
(j) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
(l) Connect wiring harness connectors (P28 thru POWER meter, shall be near zero watts.
P31) to their mating connectors (J1) on the rear
(k) Connect a digital multimeter (preset to measure
of the appropriate RF power modules.
DC volts) between the exciter drawer's PA
VOLTS test point (Located on its front panel)
and chassis ground.
Page 5-33
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(l) Set ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer for a digital (t) Using a 3/8 inch nut driver, adjust RF drive
multimeter PA Volts indication of -9.0 VDC. shunt tuning inductor on RF power module
being tuned, for a null (minimum) reading on
(m) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD the digital multimeter.
POWER meter, should be approx 550 watts
(u) Turn off RF power block associated with the
(n) Precisely tune the RF drive shunt tuning RF power module being tuned by setting its RF
inductor (L1) in each RF power module, to the POWER MODULE CONTROL switch to OFF.
carrier frequency as detailed in steps (o) thru
(w). The steps must be repeated for each (v) Disconnect RF drive tuning adapter.
module.
(w) Restore the RF drive circuit to its original state
NOTE by mating the RF drive connector disconnected
Refer to table in figure SD-4 - RF Power Stage, to in step (p) with J1 of the tuned RF power
determine which RF power module (A1 thru A4) is module.
associated with a specific RF power block (A thru
D). (x) On completion of tuning, set control/monitor
panel's ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer for an RF
(o) Turn off RF power block associated with the output of precisely the carrier level to be
RF power module to be tuned by setting its RF transmitted for the Low 2 preset forward power
POWER MODULE CONTROL switch to OFF. level.
NOTE 5.4.5 HIGH B-VDC THRESHOLD: Set the

The RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switches are High B- VDC alarm threshold, on the control
located on relay control panel A13. They are interface PWB, to initiate an RF shutback (turn off)
accessible from the rear of the cabinet. Refer to and generate a high B- VDC alarm when the B-VDC
figure MD-2 to locate them exceeds -85.0 VDC; as follows:
(p) Insert an RF drive tuning adapter in the RF (a) Set all switches/circuit breakers, except the
drive input circuit of the RF power module to MAIN POWER circuit breaker, as tabulated in
be tuned by; table 5-1. Set the MAIN POWER circuit breaker
to OFF.
- disconnecting the RF drive connector from J1.
- connecting the RF drive tuning adapter to J1. (b) Set control interface PWB's B- VDC THRSHLD
- connecting RF drive connector, which was potentiometer (R10) fully clockwise.
disconnected from J1, to the input connector of
the RF drive tuning adapter. NOTE
The control interface PWB is located on the rear of
(q) Connect a digital multimeter (preset to measure the control/monitor panel (see figure MD-4). Refer
DC volts) between the (+) and (-) terminals of to the control interface PWB's service instruction
RF drive tuning adapter's PWB. manual for its assembly detail.
(r) Turn on RF power block associated with the (c) Disconnect the B- VDC reference voltage [B-
RF power module to be tuned by setting its RF VDC (ref B)] from the input to the control
POWER MODULE CONTROL switch to ON. interface PWB. Disconnect wire #57 from
TB1-12 of RF drive distribution panel A12.
(s) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter shall return to the reading noted NOTE
in step (m). The RF drive distribution panel is accessible from
the rear of the cabinet (see figure MD-2).
Page 5-34
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(d) Substitute a variable DC power supply as the (p) Slowly increase the output voltage of the
B- VDC (ref B) input. Connect its negative variable DC power supply until the RF output
lead to wire #57 thru a 3900 ohm resistor, is shutback (turned off) as indicated by the
noting wire 57 was disconnected in step (b). FORWARD POWER meter.
Connect its positive lead to ground.
(q) The output of the variable DC power supply
(e) Preset the output of the variable DC power shall be between -84.5 and -85.5 VDC.
supply to -85.0 volts dc.
(r) On completion, restore the output of the B-
(f) Turn on the transmitter by setting the MAIN VDC power supply as the B- VDC (ref B)
POWER circuit breaker to ON. source by:
(g) Select the 'B' exciter (press/release the SELECT - turning off the transmitter (set the MAIN
EXCITER-B switch and verify EXCITER-B lamp POWER circuit breaker to OFF).
turns on).
- disconnecting variable DC power supply from
(h) Select Low 2 preset RF power level (press/ TB1-12 of the RF drive distribution panel.
release SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 switch
and verify OUTPUT POWER LOW 2 lamp turns - connecting wire #57 to TB1-12 of the RF drive
on). distribution panel.
(i) Turn on the RF power stages (press/release RF 5.4.6 RF CURRENT LEVEL: Select or verify
ON switch and verify RF ON lamp turns on). the resistance value of R52 on the control interface
PWB has been selected to provide between 1.65 and
(j) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD 1.69 VDC at the anode of CR9, on the control
POWER meter, should be the preset low 2 interface PWB, when the RF output is an
forward power level. unmodulated 5500 watts and it is terminated by a
precision 50-ohm load; as follows:
(k) All ALARM lamps on the control/monitor panel NOTE
should be off. If not reset the alarm circuits. The value of resistor R52 was selected during
(press/release ALARM RESET switch). manufacture. It should not be necessary to change/
select its value, unless the control interface PWB is
(l) Slowly adjust control interface PWB's B-VDC replaced or tuning of the RF output filter is
THRSHLD potentiometer counter clockwise until changed.
the RF output is shutback (turned off) as
indicated by the FORWARD POWER meter. (a) Set all switches/circuit breakers, except the
MAIN POWER circuit breaker, as tabulated in
(m) The HIGH B-VDC and SHUTBACK ALARM table 5-1. Set the MAIN POWER circuit breaker
lamps shall turn on. to OFF.
(n) Set the output of the variable DC power supply (b) Terminate or verify the RF output is terminated
to -72.0 volts DC. into a precision 50 ohm, resistive, 10 kW
dummy load.
(o) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD
POWER meter, shall be restored to the preset (c) Turn off or verify the modulating audio source
low 2 forward power level. is turned off.
NOTE NOTE
A latching circuit maintains the HIGH B-VDC ALARM The control interface PWB is located on the rear of
when normal operation is restored. If desired, it the control/monitor panel (see figure MD-4). Refer
can be reset by pressing and releasing the ALARM to the control interface PWB's service instruction
RESET switch.
manual for its assembly detail.
Page 5-35
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(d) If a replacement control interface PWB is being NOTE

installed and the value of R52 in the original If, after completion of tests, resistor R52 is not
control interface PWB is known, install a properly installed on the control interface PWB;
resistor of this value as R52. turn off the transmitter, remove the control interface
PWB, solder R52 in position, re-install the control
(e) If a replacement control interface PWB is being interface PWB and repeat the tests.
installed and the value of R52 is not known,
temporarily install a 1000 ohm, 0.5 watt (q) On completion of test, set ADJUST-LOW 2
resistor as R52 potentiometer for an RF output of precisely the
desired low 2 preset forward power level
(f) On the control interface PWB connect a digital
multimeter (preset to measure DC volts) 5.4.7 HIGH/LOW AC VOLTS
between anode of CR9 (+) and TP13. THRESHOLD: Set the high and low AC voltage
alarm thresholds to initiate an RF shutback (turn off
(g) Turn on the transmitter by setting the MAIN RF output) and generate an AC PWR alarm when the
POWER circuit breaker to ON. phase-to-phase voltage of the AC power source
changes by more than ten percent from its normal,
(h) Select the 'B' exciter (press/release SELECT nominal value, as follows:
EXCITER-B switch and verify EXCITER-B lamp NOTE
turns on). The high and low AC alarm threshold adjustments
are on the control interface PWB which is located
(i) Select Low 2 preset RF power level (press/ on the rear of the control/monitor panel. Refer to
release SELECT OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 switch the control interface PWB's service instruction
and verify OUTPUT POWER LOW 2 lamp turns manual for its assembly detail.
on).
(j) Turn on the RF power stages (press/release RF 5.4.7.1 Pre-Requisites for AC Alarm Thresholds:
ON switch and verify RF ON lamp turns on). Establish transmitter operating criteria and determine
the nominal voltage of unregulated 24 VDC power
(k) The RF output, as indicated by the FORWARD supply, as follows:
POWER meter, should be the preset low 2
forward power level. (a) Set or verify all switches are set as tabulated in
table 5-1.
(l) All ALARM lamps on the control/monitor panel
should be off. If not reset the alarm circuits. (b) Verify the EXCITER B and OUTPUT POWER-
(press/release ALARM RESET switch). LOW 2 lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B' is
(m) Adjust ADJUST-LOW 2 potentiometer for an RF level.
output of 5500 watts, as indicated by the
FORWARD POWER meter. (c) Verify the RF output is the preset low 2
(n) The digital multimeter's indication should be
between 1.65 and 1.69 volts DC. (d) From transmitter records, determine which of
the power transformer's primary winding taps
(o) If the requirement of step (n) is met, the value are connected.
of R52 is satisfactory.
(e) Using a digital voltmeter, measure the DC
(p) If the requirement of step (n) is not met, change voltage between TP5 of the control interface
the resistance of R52 by substituting a resistor PWB and chassis ground.
that will satisfy its requirement, noting an
increase in resistance will increase the voltage (f) Voltage reading in step (e) should be between
level. 21.5 and 26.5 VDC.
Page 5-36
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
(g) Accurately determine the average phase-to- (p) Disconnect the mating connector (P3) from J3
phase voltage being applied to the power of the control interface PWB.
transformer, from the AC power source .
NOTE
NOTE Disconnecting J3's mating connector removes the 24
Unless there is a significant voltage drop in the VDC (Ref), B- VDC (Ref), 15 VDC (Ref) and RF
wiring between the service entrance and the drive level inputs from the control interface PWB.
transmitter's power transformer, the voltage can be
measured at the service entrance, noting it should (q) Temporarily simulate the control interface
be loaded by the transmitter during this PWB's 15 VDC (ref) input by installing a
measurement. jumper between TP7 and C18's positive (+)
terminal on the control interface PWB.
(h) Determine the optimum voltage for the power
transformer's connected primary winding taps (r) Simulate the 24 VDC (ref) input by connecting
by entering table 3-1 with the tap connections the output of a 0-30 volt variable DC power
determined in step (d) and determining the supply between TP5(+) and TP13(-) on the
centre voltage of the voltage range for that tap control interface PWB.
selection.
(s) Set the output of the variable DC power supply
(i) Calculate the unregulated 24 VDC's nominal to the voltage recorded as the nominal unregu-
voltage, by multiplying the primary winding lated 24 VDC in step (j).
taps' optimum voltage determined in step (h) by
the DC voltage measured in step (e) and then (t) Turn on the transmitter by setting the MAIN
dividing the product by the applied AC voltage POWER circuit breaker to ON.
determined in step (g).
(u) Verify the EXCITER B, OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2
(j) The resultant in step (i) should be between 21.5 and RF ON lamps are on, indicating exciter 'B'
and 26.5 VDC. Record this value as the is active, the low 2 preset power level is
nominal unregulated 24 VDC. selected and the RF power stages are enabled.
(k) Determine the high AC alarm threshold. Multi- (v) The LOW RF DRIVE alarm lamp shall be on.
ply the nominal unregulated 24 VDC recorded
in step (j) by 1.1. Record the resultant as the NOTE
high AC alarm threshold reference voltage. The RF DRIVE ALARM lamp will be on as a result of
P3 being disconnected from J3 of the control
(l) Determine the low AC alarm threshold. interface PWB.
Multiply the nominal unregulated 24 VDC
recorded in step (j) by 0.9. Record the resultant (w) The LOW AC PWR alarm lamp may also be on.
as the low AC alarm threshold reference If so, reset the alarm retention circuits
voltage. (press/release the ALARM RESET switch).
(m) Turn off the transmitter by setting its MAIN (x) The RF output shall be near zero watts.
POWER circuit breaker to OFF.
(n) Set the control interface PWB's HIGH AC

THRESHOLD potentiometer (R17) fully counter
(o) Set the control interface PWB's LOW AC

THRESHOLD potentiometer (R149) fully
Page 5-37
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.4.7.2 High AC Voltage Alarm Threshold: Set 5.4.7.3 Low AC Voltage Alarm Threshold: Set
the high AC voltage alarm threshold to initiate an RF the low AC voltage alarm threshold to initiate an RF
shutback (turn off RF output) and generate a high shutback (turn off RF output) and generate a low AC
AC alarm when the applied AC voltage exceeds its alarm when the applied AC voltage falls below its
normal, nominal value by more than 10%, as follows: normal, nominal value by more than 10%, as follows:
(a) Verify the pre-requisites of paragraph 5.4.7.1 (a) Verify the pre-requisites of paragraph 5.4.7.1
have been completed and are being met. have been completed and are being met.
(b) Verify the control interface PWB's HIGH AC (b) Verify the control interface PWB's LOW AC
THRESHOLD potentiometer (R17) is set fully THRESHOLD potentiometer (R149) is set fully
counter clockwise (minimum of four turns). clockwise (minimum of four turns).
(c) Set the output of the variable DC power supply (c) Set the output of the variable DC power supply
to the precise voltage recorded as the high AC to the precise voltage recorded as the low AC
alarm threshold reference voltage recorded in alarm threshold reference voltage recorded in
step (k) of paragraph 5.4.7.1. step (l) of paragraph 5.4.7.1.
(d) Slowly adjust the control interface PWB's HIGH (d) Slowly adjust the control interface PWB's LOW
AC THRESHOLD potentiometer clockwise until AC THRESHOLD potentiometer counter
the HIGH AC PWR ALARM lamp just turns on. clockwise until the LOW AC PWR ALARM lamp
just turns on.
(e) Set output of the variable DC power supply to
the nominal unregulated 24 VDC value (e) Set output of the variable DC power supply to
recorded in step (j) of paragraph 5.4.7.1. the nominal unregulated 24 VDC value
recorded in step (j) of paragraph 5.4.7.1.
(f) Reset the alarm retention circuits (press/ release
the ALARM RESET switch). (f) Reset the alarm retention circuits (press/ release
the control interface PWB's ALARM RESET
(g) The HIGH AC PWR ALARM lamp shall turn off. switch).
(h) Slowly increase the output voltage of the (g) The LOW AC PWR ALARM lamp shall turn off.
variable DC power supply until the HIGH AC
PWR ALARM lamp just turns on. (h) Slowly decrease the output voltage of the
variable DC power supply until the LOW AC
(i) The output voltage of the variable DC power PWR ALARM lamp just turns on.
supply shall be within 0.1 VDC of the high AC
alarm threshold reference voltage recorded in (i) The output voltage of the variable DC power
step (k) of paragraph 5.4.7.1. supply shall be within 0.1 VDC of the low AC
alarm threshold reference voltage recorded in
(j) Restore the high AC alarm circuit to its pre step (l) of paragraph 5.4.7.1.
adjustment status by repeating steps (e), (f) and
(g). (j) Restore the low AC alarm circuit to its pre-
adjustment status by repeating steps (e), (f) and
(g).
Page 5-38
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
5.4.7.4 Completion of AC Voltage Tests: On (e) Turn on the transmitter by setting the MAIN
completion of the AC voltage alarm threshold checks POWER circuit breaker to ON.
and adjustments, restore the transmitter to an
operational status, as follows; (f) Reset the alarm retention circuits (press/ release
the ALARM RESET switch).
(a) Turn off the transmitter by setting the MAIN
POWER circuit breaker to OFF. (g) The EXCITER B, OUTPUT POWER-LOW 2 and
RF ON lamps should be on, indicating exciter
(b) Turn off the variable DC power supply and 'B' is active, the low 2 preset power level is
disconnect its test leads from the control selected and the RF power stages are enabled.
interface PWB.
(c) Remove the jumper wire from between TP7 and POWER meter, should be the preset low 2
C18 on the control interface PWB. forward power level.
(d) Locate connector P3 of the wiring harness that (i) All ALARM lamps should be off.
was disconnected in step (p) of paragraph
5.4.7.1 and mate it with connector J3 of the
control interface PWB.
Page 5-39
22 June 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 6
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL RF output level. The nature of the fault and station

6.1 This section contains scheduled and policy will dictate whether immediate maintenance
corrective maintenance information for the subject response is necessary. Fault analysis and
transmitter. Fault symptoms should be analyzed to rectification may be conducted from three different
determine the corrective action required. Normally levels with a different technical competence level
an adjustment will resolve the apparent problem. In required for each.
any event, the most practical way to isolate a fault is
to perform a functional test in conjunction with the 6.3.1 ON-AIR TROUBLESHOOTING: On-
calibration procedures. air trouble shooting can be performed from a remote
location or locally at the transmitter site.
6.3.1.1 Remote Trouble Shooting: Remote on-air

troubleshooting consists of monitoring the
The AMPFET ND5 transmitter contains many transmitter's radiated signal using an on-air monitor
solid state devices that may be damaged if and observing the status of remote fault alarm
subjected to excessive heat or high voltage indicators. The information obtained from these
transients. Every effort must be taken to ensure sources should enable an operator to decide if
circuits are not overdriven or disconnected from response may be deferred to a more convenient time,
their loads while turned on. if immediate corrective action must be taken and/or
whether the standby transmitter must be enabled (if
one is available). It is recommended the significance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE of remote indications and the appropriate responses
6.2 Scheduled maintenance consists of be incorporated into a station's standard operating
performing a visual inspection of the transmitter in procedures.
conjunction with a functional test/adjustment test
procedure at scheduled intervals (see section 5). The 6.3.1.2 Local Trouble Shooting: Local on-air
recommended minimum time between scheduled trouble shooting consists of monitoring the
maintenance visits is three months. Local operating transmitter's integral meters and fault alarm
and environmental conditions may dictate more indicators. Analysis of their status will normally
frequent visits and in the case of remote sites, less identify the nature of the malfunction and in most
frequent visits may be acceptable. Experience and cases will determine what corrective action must be
system reliability will determine the most practical taken.
schedule for a specific installation.
6.3.1.2.1 Built-in redundancy, within the exciter
drawer assembly, allows the selected (active) exciter
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE assemblies to provide the DC voltages for logic and
6.3 Corrective maintenance procedures consist control circuits, the RF drive for the power amplifier
of identifying and correcting defects or deficiencies stages and the variable pulse width mod drive for the
that arise during operation and/or functional modulators while the reserve (standby) exciter's
check/calibration test procedures of the subject assemblies can be removed for bench servicing. If
transmitter. Local and remote alarm signals will be the transmitter is used as a test bed for maintenance
generated when a malfunction occurs. Switching procedures, servicing can be deferred to a more
from the selected (active) exciter assemblies to the convenient time. Selection of the (active) exciter
reserve (standby) exciter assemblies will normally assemblies can be performed locally or remotely.
restore the transmitter to normal operation. If the Refer to paragraph 6.6 for exciter drawer assembly
alarm condition was caused by a malfunction in the replacement instructions.
power amplifier stages, the integral modular reserve
(IMR) features will maintain operation at a reduced
Page 6-1
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
6.3.1.2.2 The power amplifier stages contain an NOTE

integral modular reserve (IMR) feature. This feature A defective RF power module can be removed for
permits the transmitter to operate at a reduced RF repair, without turning off the transmitter as
output level when a malfunction occurs in one or described in paragraph 6.5. The transmitter can be
more of its RF power modules. Station operating operated at a reduced output power level with an RF
procedures will dictate if the reduced RF output level power module removed. Refer to paragraph 4.10
is acceptable. When the reduced RF output level can for procedures to be observed prior to and after
be tolerated, replacement of the defective RF power removal of an RF power module.
module(s) may be deferred to a more convenient time. (a) Check status of the three PA FAIL and the three
Defective RF power modules may be removed from MOD FAIL lamps on the front of each RF power
the transmitter for servicing, while the transmitter is module (see figure MD-1).
operating at a reduced RF output level, provided the
removal instructions detailed in paragraph 6.5 have NOTE
been met. Refer to paragraph 6.5 for RF power RF power modules that have one or more PA FAIL or
module removal/replacement instructions. MOD FAIL lamps turned on, may contain one or
more defective modulator/power amplifiers.
Confirm a legitimate failure has occurred by
verifying the PA failure alarms as detailed in
paragraph 4.8.
If the transmitter is operated with an RF power
module(s) removed for servicing, the appropriate (b) Record each defective RF power module (PA
RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch (located on FAIL and/or MOD FAIL lamps turned on). See
the relay control panel) must be set to OFF. figure MD-1 or MD-2.
6.3.2 OFF-AIR TROUBLESHOOTING: Off- (c) Record which PA FAIL and/or MOD FAIL lamps
air troubleshooting must be performed when selection are turned on for each RF power module
of the reserve (standby) exciter assemblies, recorded in step (b).
replacement of defective RF power module(s) or
routine on-air calibration adjustments will not restore (d) Replace RF power modules recorded in step (b)
operation. It is recommended the output be as detailed in paragraph 6.5.
connected to a precision 50-ohm resistive dummy
load (rated at a minimum of 20kW) for off-air
troubleshooting procedures. If an appropriate REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES FOR RF
dummy load is not available, troubleshooting for a POWER MODULE(S)
majority of faults can be performed with the power 6.5 Replace RF power module(s) as follows:
amplifier stages turned off. The transmitter may
remain connected to its antenna system for these
procedures. It is recommended the RF output level
be reduced to a minimal value when the RF output is
connected to the antenna system and it is necessary to RF power modules contain solid state devices that
troubleshoot faults in the power amplifier stage. may be damaged if they are subjected to excessive
heat or high voltage transients. Every effort must
be taken to ensure circuits are not overdriven and
RF POWER MODULE FAULT ISOLATION they are not disconnected from their loads while
6.4 Determine if an RF power module is turned on. The B- VDC lamp, on rear of power
defective and subsequently determine which module to be removed, must be 'off' prior to
modulator/power amplifier(s) caused an alarm removing an RF power module.
condition to be generated, as follows:
(a) Gain access to the appropriate relay control
panel's RF POWER MODULE CONTROL
switches by opening the left rear door (rear
view) (see figure MD-2).
Page 6-2
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
6.5.1 RF POWER MODULE REMOVAL: (b) Refer to figure MD-1 to verify ref des of the
Remove defective RF power module as follows: RF power module being installed and to figure
MD-20 as an aid in locating the associated RF
(a) Verify requirements of paragraph 6.5 have been POWER MODULE CONTROL switch.
(c) Verify the RF POWER MODULE CONTROL
NOTE switch identified in step (b) is set to OFF.
RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switches are
labelled A thru D. They are associated with RF (d) Verify the B- VDC lamp, on the rear of RF
power modules which are identified as A thru D. power module being installed, is off.
(b) Refer to figure MD-1 to verify the reference (e) Slide RF power module into its support tray,
designation of the RF power module being from the front of the cabinet, ensuring retaining
removed and to figure MD-20 as an aid in studs, at rear of the module's chassis, passes
locating the associated RF POWER MODULE through slotted mounting holes in its support
CONTROL switch. tray.
(c) Set RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch, (f) Secure the RF power module to its support
identified in step (b), to OFF. tray, by installing a 10-24 hex nut and a #10
flat washer on its retaining studs.
(d) Verify B- VDC lamp, on the rear of RF power
module to be removed, is off or wait until it NOTE
turns off (less than ten seconds). Ensure nuts are firmly tightened as the retaining
stud provides a secondary ground for the module.
(e) Disconnect interconnecting cable mating
connectors from J1 and J2 on the RF power (g) Connect interconnecting cable mating
module to be removed. connectors to J1 and J2 of the RF power
module being installed.
(f) Remove attaching hardware (hexagon nuts and
washers) from rear retaining studs of RF power (h) Set the RF POWER MODULE CONTROL switch
module to be removed. identified in step (b) to ON.
(g) Carefully withdraw RF power module from the

front of the cabinet. REPLACEMENT OF EXCITER DRAWER
PWB'S AND RF DRIVE AMPLIFIERS
NOTE 6.6 The following procedures must be observed
If a serviceable RF power module is available, when replacing exciter drawer assemblies and/or the
install module as per instructions detailed in RF drive amplifiers.
paragraph 6.5.2. If a serviceable RF power module
is not available, proceed with the instructions
detailed in paragraph 6.5.1 step (h).
(h) Service defective RF power module using The exciter drawer assembly contains many solid
instructions detailed in the RF power module's state devices that may be damaged if subjected to
service instruction booklet. excessive heat or high voltage transients. Every
effort must be taken to ensure the circuits are not
overdriven and not disconnected from their loads
6.5.2 RF POWER MODULE while turned on.
INSTALLATION: Install an RF power module as
follows: (a) Turn off the transmitter by setting the MAIN
(a) Verify requirements of paragraph 6.5 have been POWER circuit breaker to OFF.
Page 6-3
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
(b) Extend the exciter drawer on its attached (f) Remove attaching hardware and cable
drawer slides. connectors from assemblies located in step (e)
and remove assemblies.
(c) To remove exciter drawer's top cover, turn
fastening screws 1/4 turn counter clockwise. (g) Ensure cable connectors and other conductive
material of the wiring harness are isolated from
(d) Access to RF drive amplifiers is gained thru the exposed terminals.
rear door. They are located on the RF drive
distribution panel (see figure MD-2). (h) Replace the exciter drawer's top cover
[removed in step (c)].
NOTE
The exciter assemblies, except for the B- VDC (i) Slide the exciter drawer into the cabinet.
switching power supply and the RF drive tuning
PWB, are duplicated and are connected to form an (j) Close rear door.
active and a reserve exciter. The control/monitor
panel's EXCITER switch setting determines which set (k) Set AC power source switch, at the service
is selected as the active exciter. Refer to the entrance, to on.
following listings to determine which PWB/assembly
is selected for a specific EXCITER switch A or B (l) Repair defective assemblies removed in step (f),
setting. as per instructions detailed in the appropriate
bench repair instructions.
An optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB
(A8A3) may be installed on the interface panel as
exciter A's RF drive source. When this option is ISOLATION OF DEFECTIVE MOSFETS
included, the exciter drawer's 'A' RF drive PWB 6.7 Isolate defective power MOSFET, using a
(A6A3) will not be installed and its 'A' modulator digital multimeter that is capable of measuring the
driver PWB will contain a PWM oscillator. forward/reverse resistance of a diode, as follows:
Exciter A Selected (Stereo Option Not Installed)

A - DC Power Supply ................................... A6A1
A - RF Drive PWB ........................................ A6A3
A - Modulator Driver PWB (Standard) ........... A6A5 Precautions must be observed when handling or
A - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A2 maintaining circuits which contain electrical or
electrostatic sensitive parts and/or devices. A
Exciter A Selected (Stereo Option Installed) means should be provided to keep electrostatic
A - DC Power Supply ................................... A6A1 voltage below the sensitivity level of the
A - C-QUAM AM Stereo Exciter PWB .......... A8A3 electrostatic part/device.
A - Modulator Driver PWB (c/w PWM Osc) .. A6A5
A - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A2 (a) Unsolder and disconnect
wiring from gate of power
Exciter B Selected MOSFET to be tested.
B - DC Power Supply ................................... A6A2
B - RF Drive PWB......................................... A6A4 (b) Verify all power MOSFETs
B - Modulator Driver PWB ............................ A6A6 are turned off, by
B - RF Drive Amplifier ................................ A12A3 momentarily connecting a
jumper between their gate
(e) Locate assemblies suspected of having a fault and source terminals.
(see figures MD-6 and MD-7 to identify the
exciter drawer's assemblies).
Page 6-4
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
NOTE MOSFET REPLACEMENT

The following procedures require power MOSFET 6.8 Replace defective power MOSFET as
under test to be turned on by the application of a follows:
DC voltage (between 4.0 and 9.0 volts DC) between
its gate and source. Some digital multimeters have (a) Unsolder the applicable leads of power
sufficient DC voltage on their test leads when set to MOSFET to be replaced, ensure solder is not
'diode' or 'resistance' test positions. If multimeter to splattered on the chassis.
be used falls in this category, it may be used as the
voltage source. If it does not, a DC voltage source
that is between 4.0 and 9.0 VDC must be obtained.
Because paired MOSFETs are connected in When removing power MOSFET and, if installed,
parallel, all MOSFETs must be turned off prior to note color and/or type of insulator pad between the
testing to prevent interaction between the MOSFET power MOSFET and chassis (heat sink) ensuring
under test and MOSFETs not being tested. the 'same' type is used when reinstalling. If a
(c) Measure source/drain resistance, of power thermo compound and mica insulator is being used
MOSFET being tested, in both directions. in lieu of an insulator pad, ensure thermo
compound is clean (free of slivers) and mica
(d) Resistance measurement in step (c) shall be an insulator is not damaged prior to reinstalling
open circuit in reverse bias direction and a MOSFET.
diode pedestal in forward bias direction.
(b) Remove attaching hardware from the power
(e) If the requirements in step (d) are not met, MOSFET to be replaced and remove
unsolder and disconnect wiring from the source MOSFET. If installed, note type of insulator
of MOSFET that is suspected of being between chassis (heat sink) and MOSFET.
defective and repeat steps (b) thru (d).
(c) Remove insulating sleeve from gate and source
(f) If requirements of step (d) are still not met, lead of removed power MOSFET and install
assume the MOSFET being tested is defective. them on replacement device.
Replace the defective power MOSFET as
detailed in paragraph 6.8. (d) If applicable, position correct insulator on
chassis (heat sink) where power MOSFET will
(g) Turn on power MOSFET to be tested by be installed, ensuring lead and mounting holes
momentarily applying a DC voltage (4.0 volts are properly aligned. See caution following
DC to 9.0 volts DC) between its gate (+) and step (a).
source (-) leads.
(e) Set replacement power MOSFET in the
(h) Measure source/drain resistance, of power appropriate position on chassis (heat sink)
MOSFET being tested, in both directions. ensuring insulator, if applicable, is installed
between the chassis and power MOSFET.
(i) Resistance measurements in step (h) shall be a
short circuit in both directions. (f) Position insulating spacers in the mounting
holes of power MOSFET mentioned in step (e)
(j) If the requirements of step (i) are met, power from under the chassis (heat sink).
MOSFET being tested may be assumed to be
serviceable.
(k) If requirements of step (i) are not met, power

MOSFET being tested or, where applicable, its When replacing defective power MOSFET ensure
insulating washer may be assumed to be that the mounting holes and mounting surface are
defective. Replace defective power MOSFET free from burrs or any sharp projection that could
as detailed in paragraph 6.8. damage the insulating pads and/or plastic sleeves.
Page 6-5
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
(g) Reinstall screws of power MOSFET ensuring VENTILATION FAN FILTERS

that screws with Belville washers are torqued to 6.9 The air filters covering the air intakes for
five inch pounds (0.665 Newton meters or 0.58 the cooling air fans should be inspected and cleaned
kilogram meters). periodically. There are a total of four cooling air
fans in an AMPFET ND5 transmitter. One in each
(h) Resolder the appropriate leads to the source RF power module.
terminals of the power MOSFET.
6.9.1 RF POWER MODULE AIR FILTERS:
(i) Verify terminals of power MOSFET which The air filter element (media) can be removed from
protrude through the chassis (heat sink) are not an RF power module without disrupting its operation.
shorting to the chassis (heat sink) and Carefully remove the outer retainer and then extract
protective plastic sleeve over gate or source the media. Wash the media using soap and warm
leads are present and not damaged. water. When it is clean and dry, position the media
in the fan guard and secure it in place by re-installing
(j) Verify the chassis is free from solder slivers the outer retainer. The filter element is a 30 PPI
and other conductive foreign objects, pay (pores per inch) media. Replacement filters, which
special attention to holes in the chassis (heat include the guard, the filter element and the retainer;
sink) containing MOSFET terminals and the are available from Nautel (Nautel P/N HAS47).
area around the insulated, conductive circuit
board. See caution following step (f).
(k) Perform a resistance measurement as detailed in

paragraph 6.7.
(l) Resolder leads to gate terminals of power

MOSFETs that have been replaced and
perform a visual inspection.
Page 6-6
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 7
PARTS LIST
INTRODUCTION 7.4.2 WHEN REF DES IS KNOWN: Locate

7.1 This section contains reference designation the information for a part when the full reference
indexes which provide descriptive and provisioning designation is known, as follows:
information for all electrical and mechanical parts
that have been assigned a reference designation and Enter the family tree depicted in figure 7-1 with the
form a part of the subject equipment. full reference designation.
Follow the family tree branches to the block that

FAMILY TREE represents the lowest level assembly assigned a
7.2 Figure 7-1 depicts the family tree for the Nautel configuration control number. Delete the
subject equipment. It is based on the descending reference designation and then go to the table
order of the reference designation hierarchy and specified in the block with the balance of the
identifies all assemblies that have been assigned a reference designation.
Nautel configuration control number.
Locate the part's reference designation in the
specified table.
MANUFACTURER'S INDEX
7.3 Table 7-1 provides a cross reference from the
original equipment manufacturers (OEM) codes to REFERENCE DESIGNATION INDEXES
the manufacturer's name and address. The listing is 7.5 Individual reference designation indexes are
sorted alpha/numerically by the manufacturers' provided for all assemblies that have been assigned a
codes. Nautel configuration control number. To obtain the
full reference designation for a specific part, the
tabulated designation must be prefixed with the
HOW TO LOCATE INFORMATION FOR A reference designation of the assembly that contains
SPECIFIC PART the part and the reference designation of all higher
7.4 To locate the information for a specific part, level assemblies. Notes at the end of each table
the user must know the reference designation identify possible higher level assemblies. The
assigned to the part. In addition, the user must know reference designation indexes are divided into six
the Nautel configuration control number assigned to columns to aid in locating specific information.
the assembly that contains the part or the full
reference designation, which includes the reference
designation of all higher assemblies. COLUMN CONTENT EXPLANATION
7.6 The following paragraphs provide an
7.4.1 WHEN NAUTEL CONFIGURATION explanation of the purpose and contents of each
CONTROL NUMBER IS KNOWN: Locate the column in the reference designation indexes.
information for a part when the Nautel configuration
control number is known, as follows: 7.6.1 USE CODE COLUMN: This column
contains a symbol/letter code which is part of a
Refer to the table of contents (list of tables), for this configuration control management system. When
manual and identify which table is the reference there is more than one variation of an assembly, each
designation index for that assembly. variation will be assigned a code in this column and
the parts that are unique to a variation will be
Locate the part's reference designation in the assigned the same code. Parts that are common to all
identified table. variations will not have an entry in this column.
Notes at the end of each table explain the code's
significance.
Page 7-1
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
7.6.2 REF DES COLUMN: The ref des 7.6.6 OEM CODE COLUMN: This column
column contains the reference designation for a contains a five digit coded group as the original
specific part. These designations are assigned in equipment manufacturer's (OEM) identifier. The
accordance with the requirements of American code was extracted from Cataloging Handbook
National Standard Specification ANSI Y32.16. Each H4/H8 - Commercial and Government Entity (Cage)
reference designation index is sorted and listed Code. Manufacturers that were not listed in the
alpha/numerically according to the reference catalog when this listing was compiled have been
designations in this column. assigned a unique five letter code. This code is
assigned arbitrarily and has no other significance.
7.6.3 NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION The manufacturers identified for parts that have JAN
COLUMN: This column contains the name and or MIL part numbers are Nautel's normal supply
descriptive information for each part. The key word source for that part.
or noun is presented first, followed by the adjective
identifiers. NOTE
OEM code 37338 is listed for parts manufactured by
7.6.4 NAUTEL'S PART NO. COLUMN: Nautel or to a Nautel control drawing. United
This column contains the Nautel part number States of America customers should refer all
assigned to each part. This number is Nautel's replacement part orders to Nautel Maine
drawing number for Nautel manufactured parts, Incorporated (OEM code 57655).
Nautel's configuration control number for assemblies
that are under configuration control management or
Nautel's inventory management number for pur-
chased parts.
7.6.5 JAN/MIL/OEM PART NO. COLUMN:

This column contains an original equipment
manufacturer's part number for a part. A single part
number is listed for each part, even though there may
be more than one known manufacturer. The listed
number is Nautel's usual or preferred choice. A
JAN/MIL number has been assigned as the
manufacturer's part number, where practical, to
assist the user in finding a suitable replacement part.
The use of this number does not restrict Nautel from
selecting and using commercial equivalents, where
their use will not degrade circuit operation or
reliability, during manufacture.
Page 7-2
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-1 Manufacturers' Code to Address Index
00213 Nytronics Incorporated, 08372 Cutler-Hammer Canada Limited,

Nytronics Components Group, 45 Progress Avenue,
Orange Street, Scarsborough, Ontario, Canada
Darlington, South Carolina 29532 M1P 2T6
USA customers use - 68592
00779 AMP Incorporated,
2800 Fulling Mill, 09482 AMP of Canada Limited,
P O Box 3608, 20 Esna Park Drive,
Harrisburg, Pennsylvania 17105 Markham, Ontario, Canada
L3R 1E1
00809 Croven, USA customers use - 00779
500 Beech Street,
Whitby, Ontario, Canada 09675 Raytheon Canada Limited,
L1N 5S5 400 Phillips Street,
PO Box 1619,
00853 Sangamo Weston Incorporated, Waterloo, Ontario, Canada
Sangamo Capacitor Division, N2J 4K6
PO Box 128,
Route 3, Sangamo Road, 1BH13 Fenwal Electronics Incorporated
Pickens, South Carolina 29671 63 Fountain Street,
Framingham, Massachusetts 01701
01121 Allen-Bradley Company,
1201 South 2nd Street, 13150 Vernitron Electronic Components,
Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53204 Beau Products Division,
PO Box 10,
01295 Texas Instruments Incorporated, Laconia, New Hampshire 03246
US Semiconductor Group,
PO Box 225012, M/S 49, 14433 ITT Semiconductors,
13500 North Central Expressway, PO Box 3049,
Dallas, Texas 75265 3301 Electronics Way,
West Palm Beach, Florida 33402
02111 Spectrol Electronics Corporation,
17070 East Gale Avenue, 14655 Cornell Dubilier Electronics Division,
City of Industry, California 91745 Federal Pacific Electric Company,
150 Avenue L,
02660 Bunker Ramo Corporation, Newark, New Jersey 07101
Amphenol Connector Division,
2801 South 25th Avenue, 14674 Corning Glass Works,
Broadview, Illinois 60153 Electronic Products Division,
Houghton Park,
04713 Motorola Incorporated, Corning, New York 14830
Semiconductor Products Group,
5005 East McDowell Road, 15513 Data Display Products,
Phoenix, Arizona 85008 P O Box 91072,
5428 West 104th St.,
07355 Airpax Electronics Incorporated, Los Angeles, California 90009
Controls Division,
6801 W Sunrise Boulevard, 16902 Simpson Electric Company,
Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33313 853 Dundee Avenue,
Elgin, Illinois 60120
Page 7-3
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-1 Manufacturers' Code to Address Index (Continued)
17856 Siliconix Incorporated, 52769 Sprague-Goodman Electronics Inc.,

2201 Laurelwood Road, 134 Fulton Avenue,
Santa Clara, California 95054 Garden City Park, New York 11040
27014 National Semiconductor Corp, 56289 Sprague Electric Company,

2900 Semiconductor Drive, 87 Marshall Street,
Santa Clara, California 95051 North Adams, Massachusetts 01247
32171 Modutec Incorporated, 56699 Hepco/Electra Inc.,

18 Marshall St., 6071 St. Andrews Rd.,
Norwalk, Connecticut 06854 Columbia, South Carolina 29210
33062 Ferronics Incorporated, 57655 Nautel Maine Incorporated,

60 North Lincoln Road, 201 Target Industrial Circle
East Rochester, New York 14445 Bangor, Maine 04401
34361 Omron Electronics Inc., 59474 Jeffers Electronics Incorporated,

432 Toyama Road, Grand Plaza,
Sunnyvale, California 94086 945 Grand Avenue,
PO Box 730,
35005 Dale Electronics Canada Limited, Nogales, Arizona 85621
18 Howden Road,
Scarborough, Ontario, Canada 61529 Aromat Corporation
M1R 3E6 250 Sheffield Street
USA customers use - 91637 Mountainside, NJ 07092
35104 Bach Simpson Limited 66842 Siemens Energy & Automation

1255 Brydges Street, I-T-E Circuit Protection
London, Ontario, Canada, Division 811 N. Main Street
N6A 4G7 Bellefontaine, Ohio 43311
USA customers use - 16902
68592 EATON Corporation,
37338 Nautical Electronic Laboratories Ltd, Cutler-Hammer Products
Hackett's Cove, Halifax County, Route 1, Box 1-A
Nova Scotia, Canada Arden, North Carolina 28704
B0J 3J0
USA customers use - 57655 70903 Belden Corporation,
200 South Batavia Avenue,
37903 Siemens Electric Ltd., Geneva, Illinois 60134
7300 Trans Canada Highway,
Pointe Clare, Quebec, Canada 71400 Bussman Manufacturing Division,
H9R 107 McGraw-Edison Company,
USA customers use - 66842 502 Earth City Plaza,
Earth City, Missouri 63045
46897 Philips Manufacturing Co.,
7334 N Clark Street, 71785 TRW Incorporated,
Chicago, Illinois 60626 1501 Morse Avenue,
Elk Grove Village, Illinois 60007
50434 Hewlett Packard Company,
640 Page Mill Road,
Palo Alto, California 94304
Page 7-4
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-1 Manufacturers' Code to Address Index (Continued)
73559 Carlingswitch Incorporated, 81073 Grayhill Incorporated

60 Johnson Avenue, PO box 373
Plainview, Connecticut 06062 561 Hillgrove Avenue
La Grange, Illinois 60525
73631 Curtis Instruments Inc.,
Helipot Division. 2500 81483 International Rectifier,
Harbour Blvd., 9220 Sunset Boulevard,
Fullerton, California 92634 Box 2321, Terminal Annex,
Los Angeles, California 90054
73831 Hammond Manufacturing Co. Ltd,
394 Edinburgh Road North, 82877 Rotron Incorporated,
Guelph, Ontario, Canada 7-9 Hasbrouk Lane,
M1H 1E5 Woodstock, New York 12498
73899 JFD Electronics Components Corp, 83003 VARO Incorporated,

112 Mott Street, PO Box 401426,
Oceanside, New York 11572 2203 Walnut Street,
Garland, Texas 75040
73949 Guardian Electric Mfg. Co.,
1550 W Carroll Avenue, 89473 General Electric Distributing Corp.,
Chicago, Illinois 60607 1 River Road,
Schenactady, New York 12305
74970 E F Johnson,
299 10th Avenue SW, 91506 Augat Incorporated,
Waseca, Minnesota 56093 PO Box 779,
633 Perry Avenue,
75042 TRW Electronic Components, Attleboro, Massachusetts 02703
IRC Fixed Resistor Division,
401 North Broad Street, 91637 Dale Electronics Incorporated,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19108 2064 12th Avenue,
Columbus, Nebraska 68601
75263 Keystone Carbon Co.
1935 State Street 94696 Magnecraft Electric Company,
St. Mary's PA 15857 5575 North Lynch Avenue,
Chicago, Illinois 60630
75915 Littlefuse Incorporated,
800 East Northwest Highway, 95146 Alco Electronic Products Inc,
Des Plaines, Illinois 60016 PO Box 1348,
Lawrence, Massachusetts 08142
77342 Potter and Brumfield Division,
AMF Incorporated, 98291 Sealectro Corporation,
200 Richland Creek Drive, 225 Hoyt,
Princeton, Indiana 47670 Mamaroneck, New York 10544
80294 Bourns Incorporated, 99800 American Precision Industries

Instrument Division, Delevan Division,
6135 Magnolia Avenue, 270 Quaker Road,
Riverside, California 92506 East Aurora, New York 14052
Page 7-5
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Figure 7-1A Family Tree - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter (Monaural) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 7-6
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Figure 7-1B Family Tree - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter (Stereo) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 7-7
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Figure 7-1C Family Tree - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 7-8
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-2 Ref Des Index - AMPFET ND5 AM Broadcast Transmitter
USE REF NAME OF PART NAUTEL'S JAN/MIL/OEM OEM

CODE DES AND DESCRIPTION PART NO. PART NO. CODE
V - AM Broadcast Transmitter, 5kW, 208V 3 AMPFET ND5 175-8300-01 37338

V - AM Broadcast Transmitter, 5kW, 360-505V 3 AMPFET ND5 175-8300-02 37338
A1 Control/Monitor Panel, 5kW NAC56 See Table 7-3 37338
A2 RF Power Module NAP16C See NAP16C Manual 37338
A6 Exciter Drawer NAE70 See Table 7-4 37338
V A7 Circuit Breaker Panel, 208 VAC, 3-Phase NAX112/01 See Table 7-5 37338
A8 Interface Panel NAC80 See Table 7-6 37338
c A9 RF Output Filter (530 - 610kHz), 5kW NAF74/01 See Table 7-7 37338
A10 Cable Duct Assembly 175-8050-01 175-8050-01 37338
A10CR1 Diode, General Purpose, 200V, 0.1A QAP29 1N4938 07263
A10K1 Relay, 24 VDC Coil, 1 Form X, 30A KAP19 JH1A-W-DC24V-Q 61529
A10P1 Connector, 2-Pin Contacts 165-6039 165-6039 37338
A10P3 Connector, 2-Socket Contacts 149-1097 149-1097 37338
A11 Cable Duct Assembly 175-8050-01 175-8050-01 37338
A12 RF Drive Distribution Panel NAX153 See Table 7-18 37338
A13 Relay Control Panel NAX103 See Table 7-20 37338
A14 Rectifier Assembly, 3-Phase, 400V 300A QM02 CT300K3AA40 81483
A14CR1 Diode, Power, 300A QL08 IR300U4R 81483
A14CR2 Diode, Power, 300A QL09 IR300U40 81483
Page 7-9
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-2 Ref Des Index - AMPFET ND5 AM Broadcast Transmitter (Continued)


A14RV1 Varistor, 200V RMS, 75 Joules QI15 Z21L331 81483
A15 Fuse Block Assembly 175-8065-01 175-8065-01 37338
A15F1 Fuse, 10A, 250V, Slow, 3AB FB37 MDA10 71400
A15F2 Fuse, 40A, 300V, Slow FC39 SC40 71400
A15XF1 Fuse Block, 1-Pole FA26 357001 75915
CR1 Diode, General Purpose, 200V, 0.1A QAP29 1N4938 07263
K1 Relay, 24 VDC Coil, 4PDT, 5A KC14 MY4-DC24 34361
L1 Inductor, Choke, 0.63mH, 125A TC38 149-8030 37338
P1 MTA, Closed End, 12-Pin, 22 AWG JU03 1-640433-2 09482
P2 MTA, Closed End , 12-Pin, 22 AWG JU03 1-640433-2 09482
P6 Conn, RF Coaxial, BNC, 50 Ohm, Clamp JDP25 69475 02660
P7 Conn, RF Coaxial, BNC, 50 Ohm, Crimp JDP24 225395-7 09482
P10 Conn, Size 17/16, 11 Socket-Contacts 182-5013 182-5013 37338
P17 Conn, Size 17/16, 14 Socket-Contacts 182-5013-01 182-5013-01 37338
P19 Conn, Size 13-9, 2 Socket-Contacts 182-5011 182-5011 37338
Page 7-10
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-2 Ref Des Index - AMPFET ND5 AM Broadcast Transmitter (Continued)


P32 Conn, RF Coaxial, BNC, 50 ohm, Crimp JDP24 225395-7 09482
P33 MTA, Closed End , 4-Pin, 22 AWG JU01 640433-4 09482
R1 Resistor, Wirewound, 100, 5% 130W RWP07 HL130-100 Ohms-5% 35005
R2 Resistor, Current Shunt, 50mV, 150A RT02 06503 35104
V T1 Transformer, Pwr, 3, 208V, 12kVA TF27 159-7090-03 37338
V T1 Transformer, Pwr, 3, 360-505V, 12kVA TG11 159-7080-06 37338
TB1 Mains Strap 159-8115-02 159-8115-02 37338
XK1 Socket, Relay KA19 1310-1ST 73949
NOTE: Duplicated reference designations indicate an option exists for that item. Refer to description to
determine which item/variation is required for a specific installation.
USE CODE EXPLANATION: V - Denotes item is dependent on voltage of AC power source or contains
voltage dependent components. Description identifies variation to be used
for a specific AC power source voltage.
c - Denotes item is frequency dependent or contains frequency dependent

components. Description identifies variation to be used for a specific
frequency or band of frequencies.
Page 7-11
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-3 Ref Des Index - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel

- Control/Monitor Panel, 5kW NAC56 175-2120 37338

A1 Control Interface PWB NAPC95A/03 See NAPC95A/03 Manual 37338
A2 Power Meter Calibration PWB 149-4011-03 149-4011-03 37338
A2R1 Resistor, Metal Film, 12K Ohms, 2% 1/2W RD08 RL20S123G 35005
A2R2 Resistor, Metal Film, 10K Ohms, 2% 1/2W RAP13 RL20S103G 35005
A2R3 Resistor, Variable, Film, 1000 Ohms, 1/2W RW07 63P102 02111
A2R4 Resistor, Metal Film, 560 Ohms, 2% 1/2W RAP08 RL20S561G 35005
DS1 Diode, Light Emitting, Amber QK14 HLMP-3451 50434
J1 Connector, 12 Pin-Contacts 163-4017-02 163-4017-02 37338
M1 Meter, DC SUPPLY CURRENT MD23 T4BA1-DAA-150 32171
M2 Meter, FORWARD POWER MD18 159-4008 37338
M3 Meter, DC SUPPLY VOLTS MD06 T4BA1-DVV-100 32171
M4 Meter, REFLECTED POWER MD20 159-4006 37338
R1 Resistor, Metal Film, 2200 ohms, 2% 1/2W RC41 RL20S222G 35005
S1 Switch, Rotary, Non-shorting 2P6T SA32 T206 75042
S2 Switch, Pushbutton, Momentary, SPST, NO SCP26 8531TCQ 09353
NOTE: Partial reference designation shown. Prefix with A1 (composite ref des prefix, including all higher
assemblies) to obtain complete reference designation.
Page 7-12
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-4 Ref Des Index - NAE70 Exciter Drawer

- Exciter Drawer NAE70 175-3030 37338

A1 Exciter Power Supply (+15VDC/-15VDC) NAS37A See NAS37A Manual 37338
A2 Exciter Power Supply (+15VDC/-15VDC) NAS37A See NAS37A Manual 37338
A3 RF Drive PWB NAPE45C See NAPE45C Manual 37338
A3 Not Used
A4 RF Drive PWB NAPE45C See NAPE45C Manual 37338
A5 Modulator Driver PWB NAPE56/01 See NAPE56 Manual 37338
C1 Capacitor, Ceramic, 0.0022uF 10% 100V CCG02 CKR05BX222KL 56289
DS1 Diode, Light Emitting, Green QK12 HLMP-3554 50434
DS2 Diode, Light Emitting, Green QK12 HLMP-3554 50434
F1 Fuse, 1A, 250V, Slow, 3AG FA08 313.001 75915
J1 Conn, Size 17/16, 15 Pin-Contacts 163-3017 163-3017 37338
J2 Conn, Coaxial, Bulkhead, BNC, 50 Ohm JDP26 UG1094/U 02660
J3 Conn, Size 13/9, 5 Pin-Contacts 163-3018-02 163-3018-02 37338
M1 Meter, TEST MD02 T1BA1-DVV-030 32171
P3 Conn, Coaxial, BNC, 50 Ohm, Crimp JDP24 225395-7 09482
P5 MTA, Closed End, 8-Pin, 22 AWG JU06 640433-8 09482
P7 MTA, Closed End, 8-Pin, 22 AWG JU06 640433-8 09482
R1 Resistor, Metal Film, 1000 Ohms, 2% 1/2W RAP09 RL20S102G 35005
R2 Resistor, Metal Film, 4700 Ohms, 5% 2W RBP17 GS-3, 4700 Ohms 75042
R6 Resistor, Metal Film, 270 Ohms, 2% 1/2W RC30 RL20S271G 35005
Page 7-13
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-4 Ref Des Index - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Continued)

R7 Resistor, Metal Film, 10K Ohms, 2% 1/2W RAP13 RL20S103G 35005

S1 Switch, Rotary, Non-shorting 2P6T SA32 T206 75042
TP1 Jack, Tip, White JN16 105-0201-200 74970
XF1 Fuseholder, (1/4 x 1 1/4 Fuse) BC01 HTB 48I 71400
Duplicated reference designations indicate an option exists for that item. Refer to description or to 'Use
Code' to determine which item/variation is required for a specific installation.
USE CODE EXPLANATION: -Denotes used when Nautel's AM Stereo option is not installed (C-QUAM
AM Stereo exciter PWB is not installed as A8A3).
- Denotes used when Nautel's C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB (A9A3) is

installed as exciter A's RF drive source.
Page 7-14
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-5 Ref Des Index - NAX112 Circuit Breaker Panel Assembly

/1 - Circuit Breaker Panel, 208 VAC, 3-Phase NAX112/01 175-7100-01 37338

/1 CB1 Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole, 50A, 480 VAC SB22 229-3-1-65-5-9-50 07355
/2 CB1 Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole, 30A, 600 VAC SB17 229-3-1-65-7-9-30 07355
/3 CB1 Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole, 25A, 277/480 VAC SB27 229-3-1-65-5-9-25 37338
F1 Fuse, 5A, 250V, Slow, 3AB FB33 MDA5 71400
Duplicated reference designations indicate an option exists for that item. Refer to description to
USE CODE EXPLANATION: /1 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /01 suffix (NAX112/01)
/2 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /02 suffix (NAX112/02)
/3 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /03 suffix (NAX112/03)
Page 7-15
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-6 Ref Des Index - NAC80 Interface Panel

- Interface Panel NAC80 175-2140 37338

A1 Remote Interface PWB NAPC35A See NAPC35A Manual 37338
A2 Modulation Monitor PWB NAPC29 See NAPC29 Manual 37338
A3 C-QUAM AM Stereo Exciter PWB NAPE49C See NAPE49C Manual 37338
A3 Auxilliary Power Control PWB NAPC100 See NAPC100 Manual 37338
A3 Power Programmer NAX91B See NAX91B Manual 37338
L1 Toroid, Ferrite, 38mm LXP38 J-43806-TC 90797
L2 Toroid, Ferrite, 38mm LXP38 J-43806-TC 90797
USE CODE EXPLANATION: - Denotes item is optional and is not installed unless specified.
- Denotes option not available when Nautel's C-QUAM AM stereo exciter

PWB (A8A3) is installed as exciter A's RF drive source.
- Denotes used when Nautel's AM stereo option is installed.
Page 7-16
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-7 Ref Des Index - NAF74/01 5kW RF Output Filter (530-610kHz)

- RF Output Filter (530-610kHz), 5kW NAF74/01 175-6100-01 37338

A1 Forward/Reflected Power Probe, 5kW NAFP19 See Table 7-16 37338
A2 RF Voltage Probe (530-645Hz), 5kW NAFP43/01 See Table 7-17 37338
C1 Capacitor, Cast Mica, 8200pF 5% 4000V CV07 29140B822J00 00853
E1 Spark Gap, Air, Adjustable 159-7076 159-7076 37338
J1 Connector, 2-Pin Contacts 149-1096 149-1096 37338
J5 Connector, RF Coaxial, BNC, Bulkhead JDP26 UG1094/U 02660
J7 Connector, RF Coaxial, Stud 175-8070 175-8070 37338
J7 Connector, RF Coaxial, 7/8 EIA 175-8070-01 175-8070-01 37338
J7 Connector, RF Coaxial, 1 5/8 EIA 175-8070-03 175-8070-03 37338
J7 Connector, RF Coaxial, LC 175-8070-04 175-8070-04 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-01 159-7106-01 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-09 159-7106-09 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-09 159-7106-09 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-01 159-7106-01 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-01 159-7109-01 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-01 159-7112-01 37338
RT1 Not Used - 37338
T1 Transformer, Current, RF 159-7053 159-7053 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
W1P1 Conn, RF Coaxial, BNC, 50 Ohm, Crimp JDP24 225395-7 09482
W1P2 Conn, RF Coaxial, BNC, 50 ohm, Crimp JDP24 225395-7 09482
Page 7-17
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


c A2 RF Voltage Probe (530-645kHz), 5kW NAFP43/01 See Table 7-17 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-01 159-7106-01 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-02 159-7106-02 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-10 159-7106-10 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-10 159-7106-10 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-02 159-7106-02 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-02 159-7109-02 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-01 159-7112-01 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
USE CODE EXPLANATION: c - Denotes item is frequent dependent or contains frequency dependent
components. Description identifies variation used for a specific
Page 7-18
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


A2 RF Voltage Probe (646-912kHz), 5kW NAFP43/02 See Table 7-17 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-03 159-7106-03 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-11 159-7106-11 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-11 159-7106-11 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-03 159-7106-03 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-03 159-7109-03 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-02 159-7112-02 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
Page 7-19
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


C2 Capacitor, Cast Mica, 4700pF 5% 6000V CU05 29160B472J00 00853
L1 Inductor 159-7106-03 159-7106-03 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-04 159-7106-04 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-12 159-7106-12 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-12 159-7106-12 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-04 159-7106-04 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-03 159-7109-03 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-02 159-7112-02 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
USE CODE EXPLANATION: c Denotes item is frequency dependent or contains frequency dependent
components. Description identifies variation used for a specific frequency
or band of frequencies.
Page 7-20
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


L1 Inductor 159-7106-03 159-7106-03 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-05 159-7106-05 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-13 159-7106-13 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-13 159-7106-13 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-05 159-7106-05 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-04 159-7109-04 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-03 159-7112-03 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
Page 7-21
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


L1 Inductor 159-7106-06 159-7106-06 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-14 159-7106-14 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-14 159-7106-14 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-06 159-7106-06 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-05 159-7109-05 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-03 159-7112-03 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
Page 7-22
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


L1 Inductor 159-7106-06 159-7106-06 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-07 159-7106-07 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-15 159-7106-15 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-15 159-7106-15 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-07 159-7106-07 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-06 159-7109-06 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-04 159-7112-04 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
USE CODE EXPLANATION: c - Denotes item is frequency dependent or contains frequency dependent
components. Description identifies variation used for a specific
Page 7-23
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


L1 Inductor 159-7106-06 159-7106-06 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-08 159-7106-08 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-16 159-7106-16 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-16 159-7106-16 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-08 159-7106-08 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-07 159-7109-07 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-04 159-7112-04 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
Page 7-24
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5


L1 Inductor 159-7106-06 159-7106-06 37338
L1 Inductor 159-7106-08 159-7106-08 37338
L2 Inductor 159-7106-16 159-7106-16 37338
L3 Inductor 159-7106-16 159-7106-16 37338
L4 Inductor 159-7106-08 159-7106-08 37338
L5 Inductor 159-7109-07 159-7109-07 37338
L6 Coil, Air Core 175-6009 175-6009 37338
L7 Inductor 159-7112-04 159-7112-04 37338
W1 Cable Assembly 159-7082 159-7082 37338
Page 7-25
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-16 Ref Des Index - NAFP19 5kW Forward/Reflected Power Probe

* - Forward/Reflected Power Probe, 5kW NAFP19 159-047-01 37338

A - Forward/Reflected Power Probe, 5kW NAFP19A 159-047-02 37338
C1 Capacitor, Dipped Mica, 1800pF 2% 500V CB40 CM06FD182G03 14655
* CR1 Diode, General Purpose, 200V, 0.1A QAP29 1N4938 07263
A CR1 Diode, Power Rectifier, 200V, 1.0A QN38 MUR120 04713
L1 Inductor, Moulded, Shielded, 10000uH LAP41 15S103K 59474
R1 Resistor, Metal Film, 220 Ohms, 5% 2W RK31 GS-3, 220 Ohms 75042
R5 Resistor, Metal Film, 4700 Ohms, 2% 1/2W RD03 RL20S472G 35005
R6 Resistor, Metal Film, 6800 Ohms, 2% 1/2W RD05 RL20S682G 35005
T1 Transformer, RF Current, 5kW 139-046-2 139-046-2 37338
NOTE: Partial reference designation shown. Prefix with A9A1 (composite ref des prefix, including all higher
USE CODE EXPLANATION: * - Denotes used when basic nomenclature number has no suffix
(NAFP19).
A - Denotes used when basic nomenclature number has an A suffix
(NAFP19A).
Page 7-26
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-17 Ref Des Index - NAFP43 5kW RF Voltage Probe

/1 - RF Voltage Probe (530-645kHz), 5kW NAFP43/01 159-7141-01 37338

C10 Capacitor, Variable, 1000-2155pF, 500V CY08 GME51301 56289
/1 L1 Inductor, Variable, 28-60uH LA34 9054 76493
R1 Resistor, Metal Film, 6.8 Ohms, 2% 1/2W RC11 CMF606R8T1-2% 35005
USE CODE EXPLANATION: /1 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /01 suffix (NAFP43/01)
/2 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /02 suffix (NAFP43/02)
Page 7-27
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-18 Ref Des Index - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel

- RF Drive Distribution Panel NAX153 175-7070 37338

A1 B- VDC Switching Power Supply NAS35 See NAS35 Manual 37338
A2 RF Drive Amplifier NAA37 See NAA37 Manual 37338
A3 RF Drive Amplifier NAA37 See NAA37 Manual 37338
A4 RF Drive Tuning PWB NAPC71 See Table 7-19 37338
C1 Capacitor, Electrolytic, 6800uF, 40V CCD34 3188BA682U040AM 56699
F1 Fuse, 3A, 250V, Slow, 3AG FA10 313003 75915
K1 Relay, 24 VDC Coil, 10A, 2PDT, 10A KB38 K10P11D15 77342
K2 Relay, 24 VDC, SPDT-NC-NO-(DB-DM), 30A KC01 W389DZCX-3 94696
L1 Inductor, Choke, 2.5mH, 10ADC TZ14 159ZL 73831
L2 Coil, Tuning, RF Drive 159-3035 159-3035 37338
P1 Connector, Size 11/4, 4 Socket-Contacts 182-5010 182-5010 37338
P4 Connector, Coaxial, BNC, 50 Ohm, Crimp JDP24 225395-7 09482
R3 Resistor, Metal Film, 3300 ohms, 2% 1/2W RAP11 RL20S332G 35005
R6 Resistor, Metal Film, 3900 ohms, 2% 1/2W RD02 RL20S392G 35005
TB1 Terminal Block, 24-pos, Single, Ins Tur, 20A JR19 74224 13150
U1 Rect/Assembly, Bridge 400V, 35A UM21 36MT40A 81483
XF1 Fuseholder, Panel, Type 3AG Fuse BAP30 342012A 75915
Page 7-28
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-18 Ref Des Index - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel (Continued)


XK1 Socket, Relay KB39 27E488 77342
XK2 Not Used
Page 7-29
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-19 Ref Des Index - NAPC71 RF Drive Tuning PWB

/5 - RF Drive Tuning PWB 530-810kHz NAPC71/05 175-2035-05 37338

/6 - RF Drive Tuning PWB, 811-965kHz NAPC71/06 175-5035-06 37338
/7 - RF Drive Tuning PWB, 966-1710kHz NAPC71/07 175-2035-07 37338
C1 Capacitor, Dipped Mica, 8200pF 2% 500V CAP13 CM07FD822G03 14655
/5 /6 C2 Capacitor, Dipped Mica, 8200pF 2% 500V CAP13 CM07FD822G03 14655
/7 C2 Not Used
/5 C3 Capacitor, Dipped Mica, 8200pF 2% 500V CAP13 CM07FD822G03 14655
/6 /7 C3 Not Used
/5 C4 Capacitor, Dipped Mica, 8200pF 2% 500V CAP13 CM07FD822G03 14655
/6 /7 C4 Not Used
/5 /6 /7 C5 Not Used
CR1 Diode, Power Rectifier, 4A, Ultra Fast QI10 MUR415 04713
L1 Not Used
L2 Not Used
R1 Resistor, Metal Film, 1500 ohms, 5% 2W RBP14 GS-3, 1500 Ohms 75042
R2 Not Used
R3 Not Used
R4 Resistor, Metal Film, 332K Ohms, 1% 1/4W RAC07 MF55D3323F 59124
R5 Resistor, Variable, Film, 100K ohms, 1/2W RW01 3339P-1-104 80294
T1 Transformer, RF - Not Procurable 37338
TB1 Terminal Block, 10-pos, PWB Mounting JO22 10-176-2 71785
USE CODE EXPLANATION: /5 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /05 suffix (NAPC71/05)
/6 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /06 suffix (NAPC71/06)
/7 - Denotes used when nomenclature number has a /07 suffix (NAPC71/07)
Page 7-30
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-20 Ref Des Index - NAX103 Relay Control Panel

- Relay Control Panel NAX103 175-8000 37338

A1 Relay Control PWB NAPC49C See Table 7-21 37338
C1 Capacitor, Plastic, 0.39uF 10% 250V CNP35 730P394X9250 56289
K1 Relay, 24 VDC Coil, 1 Form X, 30A 159-8041 159-8041 37338
P1 MTA, Closed End 12-pin, 22 AWG JU03 1-640433-2 09482
R1 Resistor, Wirewound, 25 Ohms, 5% 30W RN32 HL24-25 Ohms - 5% 35005
RT1 Thermistor, 2.3 Ohms @25C, PTC RX08 Q63100-P2390-C940 37903
S1 Switch, Toggle, 1PDT SCP29 8282K113 08372
Page 7-31
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-21 Ref Des Index - NAPC49C Relay Control PWB

- Relay Control PWB NAPC49C 175-8020-03 37338

C2 Capacitor, Tantalum, 6.8uF 10% 35V CCP19 CSR13F685KM 56289
J2 MTA, Square Post Header, 12-Pin JU21 1-640383-2 09482
Q1 Transistor, PNP, Switch/Amplifier QA29 2N2907A 04713
Page 7-32
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-21 Ref Des Index - NAPC49C Relay Control PWB (Continued)

Q2 Transistor, NPN, General Purpose QB39 2N6431 04713

Q3 Transistor, Field Effect, N Channel QE19 MPF6661 04713
R6 Resistor, Metal Film, 1800 Ohms, 5% 2W RK30 GS-3, 1800 75042
R7 Resistor, Comp, 1.0M Ohms, 5% 1/2W RF31 RC20GF105J 01121
R23 Resistor, Metal Film, 10K ohms, 2% 1/2W RAP13 RL20S103G 35005
Page 7-33
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 7-21 Ref Des Index - NAPC49C Relay Control PWB (Continued)

TB1 Terminal Block, 8-Pos, PWB Mount JR04 8-176-2 71785
TB2 Terminal Block, 6-Pos, PWB Mount JO38 6-176-2 71785
Page 7-34
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 8
WIRING INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION PRINTED WIRING PATTERNS

8.1 This section contains wiring information for 8.3 The need for printed wiring pattern
hard-wired assemblies of the subject unit. Refer to information is beyond the scope of this manual,
table 8-1 for an itemized listing of assemblies that therefore, detailed printed wiring patterns for printed
have wiring lists. circuit boards are not included.
WIRING LISTS NOT PROVIDED WIRE COLORS

8.2 Separate wiring lists are not provided for 8.4 Every effort is made to manufacture the
some assemblies. These assemblies include: assemblies using wire that is the color tabulated in
the 'Code' column of the wiring list tables. In some
8.2.1 Assemblies that have separate maintenance instances, a white wire will be substituted. In this
manuals are not provided. Refer to the associated case identification must be determined by locating the
maintenance manual for the detailed wiring assigned identification number.
information of these assemblies.
8.2.2 Assemblies that have their wiring WIRING LISTS PROVIDED

information adequately depicted/tabulated on their 8.5 The wiring lists tabulated in table 8-
assembly detail drawings are not provided. Refer to 1 are provided. These lists provide, non-printed
the associated assembly detail drawing for the wiring pattern, point-to-point (source/destination)
detailed wiring information of these assemblies. interconnecting information.
Table 8-1 Wiring Lists Provided
Table 8-2 Wiring List - NAR206 5000 Watt AM Broadcast Transmitter

Table 8-3 Wiring List - 175-8050-01 Cable Duct Assembly
Table 8-4 Wiring List - NAC56 Control/Monitor Panel
Table 8-5 Wiring List - NAE70 Exciter Drawer
Table 8-6 Wiring List - NAF74 RF Output Filter
Table 8-7 Wiring List - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel
Table 8-8 Wiring List - NAX103 Relay Control Panel
Table 8-9 Connector Mating Information - Sorted by Floating Connector
Table 8-10 Connector Mating Information - Sorted by Fixed Connector
Page 8-1
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-2 Wiring List - NAR206 5000 Watt AM Broadcast Transmitter
* SOURCE DESTINATION CODE SIZE REMARKS

XK1-14 (Anode) XK1-13 Diode 1N4938 CR1
P11-5 P2-12 1 White 22
P11-8 P2-10 2 White 22
P11-9 P2-7 3 White 22
P11-3 P5-2 4 White 22
P11-6 P5-7 5 White 22
P11-1 P1-12 6 White 22
P11-2 P1-5 7 White 22
P14-4 P1-4 8 White 22
P14-5 P1-3 9 White 22
P14-6 P4-2 10 White 22
P14-7 P4-12 11 White 22
P14-9 P5-3 12 White 22
P14-8 P13-7 13 White 22
P14-9 A12TB1-7 14 White 22
P14-10 XK1-4 15 White 22 Two Conductor
P14-11 XK1-3 16 Black 22 Shielded
P14-12 TT3 - Shield
P15-Centre P18-Centre 17 Core RG188A/U Coaxial Cable
P15-Body P18-Body - Shield -
P11-10 P5-6 19 White 22
P5-1 P14-8 20 White 22
P5-4 P14-2 21 White 22
P4-10 P12-10 22 White 22
P4-11 P12-12 23 White 22
P3-4 P12-11 24 White 22
P3-5 P14-1 25 White 22
P3-6 P11-11 26 White 22
P3-8 P11-12 27 White 22
P3-1 P13-2 28 White 22
P3-7 P13-1 29 White 22
P2-1 P13-9 30 White 22
P2-4 P13-10 31 White 22
P2-8 P13-5 32 White 22
P1-9 P13-8 33 White 22
P1-9 P17-3 34 White 22
A12TB1-6 P1-6 35 White 22
P1-6 P14-3 36 White 22
P14-3 P10-3 37 White 22
A12A4TB1-9 P12-3 38 White 22 One Conductor
A12A4TB1-8 P12-2 - Shield - Shielded
P19-3 P4-9 39 White 22
P4-9 P3-11 40 White 22
P3-11 P12-1 41 White 22
P24-Centre P12-6 42 White 22 One Conductor
P24-Body P12-5 - Shield - Shielded
Page 8-2
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-2 Wiring List - NAR206 5000 Watt AM Broadcast Transmitter (Continued)

P12-6 P6-Centre 43 White 22 One Conductor
P12-5 P6-Body - Shield - Shielded
P12-7 P10-1 45 White 22 One Conductor
P12-8 P10-2 - Shield - Shielded
R2-2 P10-7 46 White 22
R2-3 P10-8 47 White 22
A12TB1-11 P10-12 48 White 22
A12TB1-11 P17-5 49 White 22
P2-9 P13-4 51 White 22
P19-2 - - Shield - Shielded
P19-3 A12TB1-4 54 White 22
A12TB1-14 P1-2 55 White 22
A12A4TB1-10 P3-10 56 White 22
A12TB1-12 P3-9 57 White 22
A12TB1-5 P3-3 58 White 22
P10-4 P12-9 59 White 22
P10-5 P12-4 60 White 22
P10-6 P2-11 61 White 22
P1-1 A12TB1-16 63 White 22
P1-8 A12TB1-13 64 White 22
P2-5 A12TB1-17 65 White 22
P4-1 P17-15 66 White 22
- E1 - Shield - Shielded
E1 E2 - Shield - Shielded
E2 E3 - Shield - Shielded
E3 P17-2 - Shield - Shielded
P28-11 P29-11 73 White 22
P29-11 P30-11 74 White 22
P30-11 P31-11 75 White 22
P31-11 P17-14 76 White 22
A12TB1-8 P17-4 77 White 22
A12TB1-8 A13A1TB1-1 78 White 22
Page 8-3
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5

P20-Centre A12TB1-18 80 Core RG188A/U Coaxial Cable
P20-Body A12TB1-19 - Shield -
P21-Body A12TB1-19 - Shield -
* A12A4TB1-1 P28-16 82 Core RG58A/U Coaxial Cable
A12A4TB1-2 P28-13 - Shield -
A12A4TB1-4 P29-13 - Shield -
A12A4TB1-6 P30-13 - Shield -
A12A4TB1-8 P31-13 - Shield -
A12TB1-9 P28-8 86 White 20
A12TB1-9 P29-8 87 White 20
A12TB1-9 P30-8 88 White 20
A12TB1-9 P31-8 89 White 20
A12TB1-10 A13A1TB1-3 90 White 20
A13A1TB2-1 P28-9 91 Core RG58A/U Coaxial Cable
A13A1TB2-2 P28-6 - Shield -
A13K1-4 P28-1 95 White 14
A13K1-4 P28-2 96 White 14
A13K1-4 P28-3 97 White 14
A13K2-4 P29-1 98 White 14
A13K2-4 P29-2 99 White 14
A13K2-4 P29-3 100 White 14
A13K3-4 P30-1 101 White 14
A13K3-4 P30-2 102 White 14
A13K3-4 P30-3 103 White 14
A13K4-4 P31-1 104 White 14
A13K4-4 P31-2 105 White 14
A13K4-4 P31-3 106 White 14
Ground 1 P28-4 107 Black 14
Page 8-4
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5

A12TB1-8 P33-1 119 White 22
A12TB1-8 A11K1-5 120 White 20
A11K1-5 A11K2-5 121 White 20
A11K2-5 A10K1-5 122 White 20
A10K1-5 A10K2-5 123 White 20
A13A1TB1-5 A10K1-6 124 White 20
A13A1TB1-6 A10K2-6 125 White 20
A13A1TB1-7 A11K1-6 126 White 20
A13A1TB1-8 A11K2-6 127 White 20
A15-2 A13K1-1 128 White 10
A15-4 A13K2-1 129 White 10
A15-6 A13K3-1 130 White 10
A15-8 A13K4-1 131 White 10
Ground on A13 P28-5 132 Black 20
A12TB1-15 A13A1TB1-2 136 Black 20
TB1-1 A7CB1-A1 137 Black 8
TB1-2 A7CB1-B1 138 Black 8
TB1-3 A7CB1-C1 139 Black 8
A7CB1-A2 T1-H1 140 Black 8
A7CB1-B2 T1-H2 141 Black 8
A7CB1-C2 T1-H3 142 Black 8
T1-A1 A7XF1-C 143 Grey 16
A7XF1-Side A12TB1-1 146 Grey 16
TB1-4 T1-H0 149 Black 8
T1 Ground Ground B 150 Black 6
Tx Ref Ground A9E3 151 Black 2
Tx Ref Ground A9E3 152 Black 2
R2-4 Ground B 153 Black 2
TB1-5 Tx Ref Ground 154 Black 6
A14A1(-) L1-1 155 Black 2
- - 156 Not Used
A14(+) R1-1 157 White 14
A14(-) R1-2 158 White 14
A14(+) R2-1 159 Black 2
T1-X1 A14AC-1 160 Black 2
L1-2 A15-1 163 White 10
L1-2 A15-3 164 White 10
L1-2 A15-5 165 White 10
Page 8-5
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5

L1-2 A15-7 166 White 10
A15XF1-2 A12TB1-10 167 White 14
P10-3 P34-8 168 White 22
P12-1 P33-3 169 White 22
Ground at P2 P34-5 - Shield - Shielded
Ground at P2 P34-5 - Shield - Shielded
P2-11 P34-3 172 White 22
P2-9 P34-7 173 White 22
P19-4 P34-2 174 White 22
P34-1 TT2 175 White 22
TT1 P33-3 176 White 22
- - 177 Not Used
P35-3 XK1-14 179 White 22
A9E3 Ground B 180 Black 2
P35-1 JQ30 181 White 22 One Conductor
P35-2 JQ30 - Shield - Shielded
P35-3 - - Shield - Shielded
P36-Body A12TB1-22 - Shield-
- - 184 Not Used
A6 Ground Stud Ground B 185 Black 14
A7 Ground Ground B 186 Black 8
P1-7 XK1-13 187 White 22
P17-11 XK1-12 188 White 22 Two Conductor
P17-13 XK1-11 189 Black 22 Shielded
P17-12 TT3 - Shield -
A8A2TB1-2 XK1-8 190 White 22 One Conductor
A8A2TB1-1 TT3 - Shield - Shielded
Drss Pnl (L) Ground B 191 White 10
Drss Pnl (R) R Angl 192 White 10
Rear Door Ground B 193 White 10
Cabinet Ground B 194 White 10
Rck Angl(CR) Ground B 195 White 10
TT1 XK1-5 - White 22
TT2 XK1-9 - White 22
A15-1 A15XF1-1 - White 14 Jumper
Interface Panel Rack angle - Black 14 Jumper
Monitor panel Rack angle - Black 14 Jumper
* Denotes wires 82, 83, 84 and 85 must be same length.
Page 8-6
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-3 Wiring List - 175-8050-01 Cable Duct Assembly

K1-6 (Anode) K1-5 Diode 1N4938 CR1
K2-6 (Anode) K2-5 Diode 1N4938 CR2
K1-1 P1-1 1 White 14
K1-1 P3-1 2 White 14
K1-4 P1-4 3 White 14
K1-4 P3-4 4 White 14
K2-1 P2-1 5 White 14
K2-1 P4-1 6 White 14
K2-4 P2-4 7 White 14
K2-4 P4-4 8 White 14
NOTE: There are two identical cable duct assemblies - A10 and A11.
Page 8-7
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-4 Wiring List - NAC56 Control/Monitor Panel
S1-12 (Anode) S1-2 Diode 1N4938 CR1

S1-9 (Anode) S1-10 Diode, LED Amber DS1
S1-10 S1-12 Resistor 2200 Ohms R1
J1-1 A2-1 1 White 22 One Conductor
J1-2 A2-4 - Shield - Shielded
S2-1 A2-3 2 White 22
S2-2 A2-2 3 White 22
J1-3 S1-9 4 White 22
S1-2 J1-4 5 White 22
S1-8 J1-5 6 White 22
S1-7 J1-6 7 White 22
J1-7 M1 (+) 8 White 22
J1-8 M1 (-) 9 White 22
J1-12 M3 (-) 10 White 22
J1-10 M4 (+) 11 White 22 One Conductor
J1-11 M4 (-) - Shield - Shielded
M3 (+) Ground - Black 22
J1-9 Ground - Black 22
S1-W1 Ground - Black 22
S1-W1 S1-W2 - Black 22
A2-4 Ground - Black 22
Page 8-8
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-5 Wiring List - NAE70 Exciter Drawer

E4 Ground Capacitor 0.0022 F C1
E3 Ground Capacitor 0.0022 F C2
E1 E2 Resistor 1000 Ohms R1
E11 Ground Resistor 10K Ohms R7
J1-1 P1-7 1 White 22 One Conductor
J1-2 P1-8 - Shield - Shielded
J2-Center XK1-9 3 White 22 One Conductor
J2-Ground XK1-10 - Shield - Shielded
XK1-1 P1-11 4 White 22 One Conductor
XK1-2 P1-10 - Shield - Shielded
XK1-6 P2-10 - Shield - Shielded
J1-4 XK1-11 6 White 22
E2 XK1-11 7 White 22
E1 DS1-Anode 8 White 22
XK1-3 XF1-Centre 9 White 22
J1-5 XK1-12 11 White 22
E5 XK1-12 12 White 22
E6 DS2-Cathode 13 White 22
XF1-Side A1TB1-2 16 White 22
J1-3 XK1-13 20 White 22
E11 J1-14 21 White 22
J1-8 XK3-9 22 White 22 One Conductor
J1-7 Ground at XK3 - Shield - Shielded
Ground at XK3 P5-4 - Shield - Shielded
Ground at XK3 P7-4 - Shield - Shielded
J1-11 XK3-10 25 White 22 Two Conductor
J1-13 XK3-11 26 Black 22 Shielded
J1-12 Ground at XK3 - Shield -
Page 8-9
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-5 Wiring List - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Continued)

XK3-2 P5-8 27 White 22 Two Conductor
XK3-3 P5-6 28 Black 22 Shielded
Ground at XK3 P5-7 - Shield -
XK3-6 P7-8 29 White 22 Two Conductor
XK3-7 P7-6 30 Black 22 Shielded
Ground at XK3 P7-7 - Shield -
P6-9 XK3-4 31 White 22 One Conductor
P6-10 Ground at XK3 - Shield - Shielded
P8-9 XK3-8 32 White 22 One Conductor
P8-10 Ground at XK3 - Shield - Shielded
XK3-12 J7-Centre 33 White 22 One Conductor
Ground at XK3 J7-Ground - Shield - Shielded
J1-10 P6-1 34 White 22 One Conductor
J1-9 P6-2 - Shield - Shielded
J1-15 P6-5 36 White 22
P8-5 P6-5 37 White 22
E10 P6-7 38 White 22
P8-7 P6-7 39 White 22
E3 P6-3 40 White 22
P6-3 P8-3 41 White 22
P4-Body P10-Body - Shield - Shielded
P1-2 J4-Centre 44 White 22 One Conductor
P1-3 J4-Ground - Shield - Shielded
P1-4 XK2-4 45 White 22
P2-2 J5-Centre 46 White 22 One Conductor
P2-3 J5-Ground - Shield - Shielded
P2-4 XK2-8 47 White 22
XK2-12 J3-1 48 White 22
A1TB2-3 XK2-1 49 White 22
A1TB2-3 P5-5 50 White 22
P1-5 P5-5 51 White 22
A1TB2-1 P6-4 53 White 22
A2TB2-3 P7-5 56 White 22
P2-5 P7-5 57 White 22
A2TB2-1 P8-4 59 White 22
XK2-9 J3-3 61 White 22
XK2-9 S1-3 62 White 22
XK2-10 J3-4 63 White 22
Page 8-10
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-5 Wiring List - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Continued)

XK2-10 S1-7 64 White 22
XK2-11 J3-5 65 White 22
XK2-11 S1-4 66 White 22
S1-W1 M1-(+) 67 White 22
S1-W2 M1-(-) 68 White 22
A1TB1-1 A2TB1-1 69 Black 22
A1TB1-1 J1-6 70 Black 22
A2TB1-1 J3-2 71 Black 22
S1-3 J3-6 72 White 22
S1-3 E9 73 White 22
P2-7 E7 74 White 22
E8 TP1 75 White 22
XK2-13 XK3-13 - White 22
XK3-14 Ground at XK3 - Black 22
S1-10 Ground at S1 - Black 22
DS1-Cathode DS2-Anode - Black 22
DS2-Anode S1-1 - Black 22
P1-6 Ground - Black 22
P2-6 Ground - Black 22
J6-Centre J7-Centre Tinned Copper Wire 22
XK2-7 XK2-13 Tinned Copper Wire 22
S1-1 S1-2 Tinned Copper Wire 22
Page 8-11
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-6 Wiring List - NAF74 RF Output Filter Assembly
J1-1 L1-1 - White 14

J1-4 Ground - White 14
J2-1 L2-1 - White 14
J3-1 L3-1 - White 14
J4-1 L4-1 - White 14
L1-2 T1-Primary - White 14
R5 J5-Center - Core -
Ground at R5 J5-Shell - Shield
J5-Centre J6-Centre Tinned Copper Wire 20
J6-Shell Ground -
C5-A A1T1 Primary B - White 12
C5-A A1T1 Primary B - White 12
Jct C1-C2 L5-1 - White 12
Jct C1-C2 L5-1 - White 12
L5-2 L7-1 - White 12
L5-2 L7-1 - White 12
L6-2 Jct C3,C4 - White 12
L6-2 Jct C3,C4 - White 12
L7-2 A1T1 Primary A - White 12
L7-2 A1T1 Primary A - White 12
C5-A E1 - White 14
C5-B A2-A - White 20
C5-B E2 - White 12
C5-B E2 - White 12
L6-1 L7-1 - White 12
L6-1 L7-1 - White 12
Page 8-12
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-7 Wiring List - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel

TB1-13 TB1-15 Capacitor 0.1uF C2
TT1 (Anode) TB1-1 Diode 1N4938 CR1
TB1-1 (Anode) TT2 Diode 1N4938 CR4
XK1-B (Anode) XK1-A Diode 1N4938 CR7
K2-B (Anode) K2-A Diode 1N4938 CR8
TT3 TT5 Resistor 1000 Ohms R1
TB1-5 TT6 Resistor 1000 Ohms R2
TT7 TP4 Resistor 3300 Ohms R3
TB1-10 TB1-12 Resistor 3300 Ohms R6
TB1-1 U1-AC1 1 Grey 16
TB1-4 P1-1 4 White 20
TB1-5 TP1 5 White 20
TB1-6 XF1-Side 6 White 20
TB1-7 XK1-A 7 White 20
TB1-10 TT7 10 White 20
P2-5 P3-5 12 White 22
TB1-13 K2-A 13 White 22
TB1-14 P2-5 14 White 22
U1 (+) L1-1 15 White 14
TB1-16 P2-3 16 White 22
TB1-17 P3-3 17 White 22
TB1-18 P4-Centre 18 Core RG188A/U Coaxial Cable
TB1-19 P4-Body - Shield-
L1-2 C1 (+) 19 White 14
TB1-19 P5-Body - Shield
TT7 XF4-Centre 21 White 20
P1-2 XF4-Centre 22 White 16
P1-4 XF6-Centre 23 White 16
P2-4 XF5-Side 24 White 20
P3-4 XF6-Side 25 White 20
C1 (+) XK1-5 26 White 16
C1 (+) XF1-Centre 27 White 20
Page 8-13
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-7 Wiring List - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel (Continued)

P1-3 Ground 31 Black 16
TB1-22 P6-Body - Shield-
TT2 TT3 Tinned Copper Wire 20
XF2-Centre XF3-Centre Tinned Copper Wire 20
XF5-Centre XF6-Centre Tinned Copper Wire 20
K2-3 K2-6 Tinned Copper Wire 14
C1-(-) Ground - Black 20
XK1-B Ground - Black 20
XK2-B Ground - Black 20
U1 (-) Ground - Black 14
TB1-15 Ground - Black 14
A2Q2-Drain K2-1 - White 14
A3Q2-Drain K2-4 - White 14
* A4-A L2-4, 3 or 2 - White 14 Teflon Insulated
* K2-3 L2-1, 2 or 3 - White 14 Teflon Insulated
* - Denotes destination at L2 is frequency dependent.

Final selection is determined during initial calibration.
Page 8-14
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-8 Wiring List - NAX103 Relay Control Panel

S1-2 Ground Capacitor 0.39 F C1
TT1 Ground Capacitor 0.39 F C5
S1-2 R1-1 Thermistor 2.3/25C RT1
A1TB1-3 TT1 1 White 20
P1-2 K1-6 2 White 22
P1-4 K2-6 3 White 22
P1-7 K3-6 4 White 22
P1-10 K4-6 5 White 22
P1-1 R1-1 6 White 22
P1-5 R2-1 7 White 22
P1-8 R3-1 8 White 22
P1-11 R4-1 9 White 22
P1-3 R1-2 10 White 22
P1-6 R2-2 11 White 22
P1-9 R3-2 12 White 22
P1-12 R4-2 13 White 22
R1-2 K1-4 - White 20
R2-2 K2-4 - White 20
R3-2 K3-4 - White 20
R4-2 K4-4 - White 20
TT1 S4-1 - White 20
S4-1 S3-1 - White 20
S3-1 S2-1 - White 20
S2-1 S1-1 - White 20
K1-5 K2-5 - Black 20
K2-5 K3-5 - Black 20
K3-5 K4-5 - Black 20
K4-5 Ground at XK4 - Black 20
Page 8-15
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-9 Connector Mating Information - Sorted by Floating Connector
FLOATING CONNECTOR FIXED CONNECTOR
REF DES DESCRIPTION REF DES DESCRIPTION

P1 MTA, 12 Socket-Contacts A1A1J1 MTA, 12 Pin-Contacts
P6 BNC A1A1J6 BNC
P7 BNC A1A1J7 BNC
P8 BNC A1A1J8 BNC
P9 BNC A1A1J9 BNC
P10 11 Socket-Contacts A1J1 12 Pin-Contacts
P15 BNC A8A1J2 BNC
P16 BNC A8A1J3 BNC
P18 BNC A6J2 BNC
P20 BNC A6J4 BNC
P21 BNC A6J5 BNC
P22 BNC A6J6 BNC
P23 BNC A9A1J2 BNC
P24 BNC A9A1J3 BNC
P25 BNC A9A2J2 BNC
P26 BNC A9J5 BNC
P27 BNC A9J6 BNC
P32 BNC A13A1J1 BNC
P34 MTA, 8 Socket-Contacts A8A3J1 MTA 8 Pin-Contacts
P34 MTA, 8 Socket-Contacts A8A3J1 MTA 8 Pin-Contacts
P36 BNC A8A3J3 BNC
A6P1 MTA, 12 Socket-Contacts A6A3J1 MTA, 12 Pin-Contacts
A6P3 BNC A6A3J2 BNC
A6P4 BNC A6A4J2 BNC
A6P9 BNC A6A5J3 BNC
Page 8-16
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-9 Connector Mating Information - Sorted by Floating Connector (Continued)
FLOATING CONNECTOR FIXED CONNECTOR
A6P10 BNC A6A6J3 BNC

A9W1P1 BNC A9A1J1 BNC
A9W1P2 BNC A9A2J1 BNC
A10P1 2 Pin-Contacts A2J2 2 Socket-Contacts
A10P3 2 Socket-Contacts A9J1 2 Pin-Contacts
A12P1 4 Socket-Contacts A12A1J1 4 Pin-Contacts
- Denotes connected only when optional modulation monitor PWB is installed.
- Denotes connected only when optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is installed.
- Denotes connected only when optional auxiliary power control PWB or power programmer is
installed.
Page 8-17
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-10 Connector Mating Information - Sorted by Fixed Connector
FIXED CONNECTOR FLOATING CONNECTOR

A1A1J1 MTA, 12 Pin-Contacts P1 MTA, 12 Socket-Contacts
A1A1J6 BNC P6 BNC
A1A1J7 BNC P7 BNC
A1A1J8 BNC P8 BNC
A1A1J9 BNC P9 BNC
A1J1 12 Pin-Contacts P10 11 Socket-Contacts
A2J2 2 Socket-Contacts A10P1 2 Pin-Contacts
A6A3J1 MTA, 12 Pin-Contacts A6P1 MTA, 12 Socket-Contacts
A6A3J2 BNC A6P3 BNC
A6A4J2 BNC A6P4 BNC
A6A5J3 BNC A6P9 BNC
A6A6J3 BNC A6P10 BNC
A6J2 BNC P18 BNC
A6J4 BNC P20 BNC
A6J5 BNC P21 BNC
A6J6 BNC P22 BNC
A6J7 BNC - Not Used
A8A1J1 BNC - BNC (External RF Drive)
A8A1J2 BNC P15 BNC
A8A1J3 BNC P16 BNC
A8A1J4 BNC - BNC (External RF Monitor)
A8A1J9 BNC - BNC (External Freq Monitor)
Page 8-18
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 8-10 Connector Mating Information - Sorted by Fixed Connector (Continued)
FIXED CONNECTOR FLOATING CONNECTOR

A8A3J2 MTA, 4 Pin-Contacts P35 BNC
A8A3J3 BNC P36 BNC
A9A1J1 BNC A9W1P1 BNC
A9A1J2 BNC P23 BNC
A9A1J3 BNC P24 BNC
A9A2J1 BNC A9W1P2 BNC
A9A2J2 BNC P25 BNC
A9J1 2 Pin-Contacts A10P3 2 Socket-Contacts
A9J5 BNC P26 BNC
A9J6 BNC P27 BNC
A9J7 7/8 EIA Flange - 7/8 EIA (RF Feed Cable) e)
A12A1J1 4 Pin-Contacts A12P1 4 Socket-Contacts
A13A1J1 BNC P32 BNC
- Denotes available only when optional modulation monitor PWB is installed.
- Denotes available only when optional C-QUAM AM stereo exciter PWB is installed.
- Denotes available only when optional auxiliary power control PWB or power programmer is
installed.
Page 8-19
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 9
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS
INTRODUCTION IDENTIFICATION OF SCHEMATIC

9.1 This section contains electrical schematics\ DIAGRAMS
logic diagrams for the subject equipment. Block 9.6 Each illustration in this section is identified
diagrams, simplified electrical schematics and/or by a number that is both the figure number and the
logic diagrams may be included. Refer to table 9-1 page number. The numbers are assigned sequentially
for an itemized listing. and are prefixed by the letters 'SD-'. The electrical
schematics/logic diagrams included in this section are
listed in table 9-1.
COMPONENT VALUES
9.2 Unless otherwise specified on the
logic/schematic diagram: STRUCTURE OF SCHEMATICS
9.7 The electrical schematics have been
- Resistor values are shown in ohms. structured in a hierarchical format that is based on
(K = 1 000 and M = 1 000 000). function and signal flow. Wherever practical, the
signal flow is from left to right. Inputs will normally
- Capacitor values are shown in microfarads (uF). originate on the left-hand side and outputs will be
extended to the right-hand side. Exceptions will be
- Unidentified diodes are part number 1N4938. indicated by an arrow indicating the direction of
signal flow.
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS NOTE

9.3 The graphic symbols used on electrical The physical location of a part/assembly was not
schematics are in accordance with American National necessarily a factor when a schematic was drawn.
Standard ANSI Y32.2-1975 - Graphic Symbols for The full reference designation assigned to a part/
Electrical and Electronic Diagrams. assembly, in conjunction with the family tree in
figure 7-1 and the assembly detail drawings in
LOGIC SYMBOLS section 10, will identify its location.
9.4 The logic symbols used on electrical
schematics and logic diagrams are in accordance with 9.7.1 Figure SD-1 identifies the major functional
American National Standard ANSI Y32.14-1-975 - blocks and their detailed interconnection. Figures
Graphic Symbols for Logic Diagrams. SD-2 thru SD-5 further expand the functional
breakdown of each block and contain cross references
that identify which block is the signal source for
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS inputs or the destination for outputs.
9.5 Reference designations were assigned in
accordance with American National Standard ANSI 9.7.2 When a sub-function is treated as a block in
Y32.-16-1975 - Reference Designations for Electrical figures SD-2 thru SD-5, its detailed circuit
and Electronic Parts and Equipments. Each electrical information will be included in its own schematic
symbol has been identified with its basic reference drawing(s). These schematics may be included in
designation. To obtain the full reference designation this section or in an appended service instruction
for a specific part, this basic identifier must be manual(s).
prefixed with the reference designation assigned to all
higher assemblies.
Page 9-1
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
LOCATING A PART/ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED LOCATING THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM(S)
ON A SCHEMATIC FOR A FUNCTIONAL BLOCK
9.8 The full reference designation assigned to a 9.9 The text inside a functional block, provides
part/assembly is the key to physically locating that the key to locating its schematic diagram(s).
part/assembly.
9.9.1 WHEN FIGURE NUMBER
NOTE IDENTIFIED: In some instances the figure number
Full reference designations contain the assembly of the schematic will be identified. These schematics
hierarchical coding. will be included in this section.
When the end item is divided into units (cabinets)
the first coding is a unit number (1, 2, 3, etc). 9.9.2 WHEN REFERENCE DESIGNATION
When the end item is divided into assemblies, the ASSIGNED TO BLOCK: When a functional
first coding is an assembly number (A1, A2, A3, block has been assigned a reference designation, enter
etc). the family tree depicted in figure 7-1 and follow the
If a unit or an assembly is divided into sub- family tree branches to the block that contains the
assemblies, assembly codings that identify assembly reference designation.
relationship (1A1, A2A1, A2A1A1, etc) are added
9.9.2.1 If the family tree's block references a service
9.8.1 Enter the family tree depicted in figure 7-1 instruction manual that is keyed to a Nautel
with the full reference designation and follow the nomenclature number, the schematic will be included
family tree branches to the appropriate block, noting in the referenced manual.
the name and Nautel nomenclature number of all
higher assemblies in the path. 9.9.2.2 If the family tree's block references a table
in section 7 of this manual, the schematic will be in
NOTE this section. Enter table 9-1 to with the Nautel
The drawings in section 10 depict the assembly nomenclature number and/or the description to
detail of the transmitter and any of its identify the appropriate figure number(s).
modules/assemblies that are not the subject of their
own service instruction manual. If the block in the 9.9.3 TITLE OF BLOCK: When a functional
family tree references a manual that is keyed to a block has not been assigned a reference designation
Nautel nomenclature number, the assembly detail and a figure number has not been referenced, the
for that assembly will be included in the referenced schematic is included in this section. Enter table 9-1
service instruction manual. with the name of the functional block to identify the
appropriate figure number(s).
9.8.2 Enter table 10-1 with the name and Nautel
nomenclature number of each family tree block in the
path, starting at the highest assembly (normally
figure MD-1) and determine the figure number(s) for
that assembly. Refer to the referenced figure and
locate the next lower level assembly. Repeat this
procedure until the location of the required
part/assembly has been identified.
Page 9-2
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 9-1 List of Electrical Schematics
Figure SD-1 Electrical Schematic - 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter

Figure SD-2 Electrical Schematic - 5kW Control/Monitor Functions
Figure SD-3A Electrical Schematic - 5kW Exciter Stage (Monaural)
Figure SD-3B Electrical Schematic - 5kW Exciter Stage (Stereo)
Figure SD-4 Electrical Schematic - 5kW RF Power Stage
Figure SD-5 Electrical Schematic - 5kW AC/DC Power Stage
Figure SD-6 Electrical Schematic - Exciter Drawer (NAE70)
Figure SD-7 Electrical Schematic - Relay Control Panel (NAX103)
Figure SD-8 Electrical Schematic - 5kW RF Output Filter (NAF74)
Page 9-3
15 January 1995
Figure SD-1 Electrical Schematic - 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter
Page SD-1
15 January 1995
Figure SD-2 Electrical Schematic - 5kW Control/Monitor Functions
Page SD-2
15 January 1995
Figure SD-3A Electrical Schematic - 5kW Exciter Stage (Monaural)
Page SD-3A
15 January 1995
Figure SD-3B Electrical Schematic - 5kW Exciter Stage (Stereo)
Page SD-3B
15 January 1995
Figure SD-4 Electrical Schematic - 5kW RF Power Stage
Page SD-4
15 January 1995
Figure SD-5 Electrical Schematic - 5kW AC/DC Power Stage
Page SD-5
15 January 1995
Figure SD-6 Electrical Schematic - Exciter Drawer (NAE70)
Page SD-6
15 January 1995
Figure SD-7 Electrical Schematic - Relay Control Panel (NAX103)
Page SD-7
15 January 1995
Figure SD-8 Electrical Schematic - 5kW RF Output Filter (NAF74)
Page SD-8
15 March 1995
AMPFET ND5
SECTION 10
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
INTRODUCTION CONTENT OF MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

10.1 This section contains mechanical drawings 10.3 Mechanical drawings are illustrations that
for assemblies of the subject equipment. depict the location of electrical components and show
Dimensional drawings may be included. Refer to assembly outline detail. Where appropriate,
table 10-1 for an itemized listing. Assembly detail dimensional information will be included.
drawings for assemblies/modules that have separate
maintenance manuals are not included. Refer to the 10.3.1 When a module/assembly is the subject of its
appropriate maintenance manual for the assembly own assembly detail drawing and it is also shown in a
detail of these assemblies. higher level assembly, the detail depicted in the
higher level assembly may have minor differences
from the module/assembly actually installed. In this
LOCATING ASSEMBLY DETAIL DRAWINGS case, always refer to the assembly detail drawing for
10.2 Each illustration in this section is identified the module/assembly for detailed information.
by a number that is both the figure number and the
page number. The numbers are assigned sequentially
and are prefixed by the letters 'MD-'. Drawings in
this section are listed in table 10-1.
Page 10-1
15 January 1995
AMPFET ND5
Table 10-1 List of Mechanical Drawings
Figure MD-1 Assembly Detail - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter - Front View
Figure MD-2 Assembly Detail - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter - Rear View
Figure MD-3 Assembly Detail - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel - Front View
Figure MD-4 Assembly Detail - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel - Rear View
Figure MD-5 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Front View
Figure MD-6A Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Monaural) - Top View
Figure MD-6B Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Stereo) - Top View
Figure MD-7 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Bottom View
Figure MD-8 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Rear View
Figure MD-9 Assembly Detail - NAX112 Circuit Breaker Panel
Figure MD-10 Assembly Detail - NAC80 Interface Panel
Figure MD-11 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Top View
Figure MD-12 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Front View
Figure MD-13 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Side View
Figure MD-14 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Rear View
Figure MD-15 Assembly Detail - NAFP19 5kW Forward/Reflected Power Probe
Figure MD-16 Assembly Detail - NAFP43 5kW RF Voltage Probe
Figure MD-17 Assembly Detail - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel - Front View
Figure MD-18 Assembly Detail - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel - Rear View
Figure MD-19 Assembly Detail - NAPC71 RF Drive Tuning PWB
Figure MD-20 Assembly Detail - NAX103 Relay Control Panel - Front View
Figure MD-21 Assembly Detail - NAX103 Relay Control Panel - Rear View
Figure MD-22 Assembly Detail - NAPC49C Relay Control PWB
Figure MD-23 Assembly Detail - 3-Phase Rectifier (QM02)
Figure MD-24 Assembly Detail - Fuse Block Assembly (P/N 175-8065-01)
Figure MD-25A Assembly Detail - 208 VAC Power Transformer (P/N 159-7090-03)
Figure MD-25B Assembly Detail - 360-505 VAC Power Transformer (P/N 159-7080-06)
Figure MD-26 Dimensional Information - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter
Page 10-2
15 January 1995
Figure MD-1 Assembly Detail - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter - Front View
Page MD-1
15 January 1995
Figure MD-2 Assembly Detail - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter - Rear View
Page MD-2
15 January 1995
Figure MD-3 Assembly Detail - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel - Front View
Page MD-3
15 January 1995
Figure MD-4 Assembly Detail - NAC56 5kW Control/Monitor Panel - Rear View
Page MD-4
15 January 1995
Figure MD-5 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Front View
Page MD-5
15 January 1995
Figure MD-6A Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Monaural) - Top View
Page MD-6A
15 January 1995
Figure MD-6B Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer (Stereo) - Top View
Page MD-6B
15 January 1995
Figure MD-7 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Bottom View
Page MD-7
15 January 1995
Figure MD-8 Assembly Detail - NAE70 Exciter Drawer - Rear View
Page MD-8
15 January 1995
Figure MD-9 Assembly Detail - NAX112 Circuit Breaker Panel
Page MD-9
15 January 1995
Figure MD-10 Assembly Detail - NAC80 Interface Panel
Page MD-10
15 January 1995
Figure MD-11 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Top View
Page MD-11
15 January 1995
Figure MD-12 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Front View
Page MD-12
15 January 1995
Figure MD-13 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Side View
Page MD-13
15 January 1995
Figure MD-14 Assembly Detail - NAF74 5kW RF Output Filter - Rear View
Page MD-14
15 January 1995
Figure MD-15 Assembly Detail - NAFP19 5kW Forward/Reflected Power Probe
Page MD-15
15 January 1995
Figure MD-16 Assembly Detail - NAFP43 5kW RF Voltage Probe
Page MD-16
15 January 1995
Figure MD-17 Assembly Detail - NAX153 RFDrive Distribution Panel - Front View
Page MD-17
15 January 1995
Figure MD-18 Assembly Detail - NAX153 RF Drive Distribution Panel - Rear View)
Page MD-18
15 January 1995
Figure MD-19 Assembly Detail - NAPC71 RF Drive Tuning PWB
Page MD-19
15 January 1995
Figure MD-20 Assembly Detail - NAX103 Relay Control Panel - Front View
Page MD-20
15 January 1995
Figure MD-21 Assembly Detail - NAX103 Relay Control Panel - Rear View
Page MD-21
15 January 1995
Figure MD-22 Assembly Detail - NAPC49C Relay Control PWB
Page MD-22
15 January 1995
Figure MD-23 Assembly Detail - 3-Phase Rectifier (QM02)
Page MD-23
15 January 1995
Figure MD-24 Assembly Detail - Fuse Block Assembly (P/N 175-8065-01)
Page MD-24
15 January 1995
Figure MD-25A Assembly Detail - 208 VAC Power Transformer (P/N 159-7090-03)
Page MD-25A
15 January 1995
Figure MD-25B Assembly Detail - 360-505 VAC Power Transformer (P/N 159-7080-06)
Page MD-25B
15 January 1995
Figure MD-26 Assembly Detail - AMPFET ND5 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter
Page MD-26
15 March 1995

ND5 Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ND5 Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS

Original Issue ................. 15 January 1995

Copyright 1995 NAUTEL. All rights reserved

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Original ............................................... 15 January 1995

Total number of printed sides in this manual is 233 as listed below:

Title 1 15 March 1995 2-3 0 15 January 1995

Effective Pages (Page 1)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

3-27 0 15 January 1995 5-17 0 15 January 1995

Effective Pages (Page 2)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

7-19 0 15 January 1995 SD-1 0 15 January 1995

Effective Pages (Page 3)

ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION (MOUTH-TO-MOUTH)

(a) START MOUTH-TO-MOUTH BREATHING

(c) IF POSSIBLE, SEND A BYSTANDER TO GET

(e) LAY CASUALTY ON HIS/HER BACK and place any

(g) PINCH CASUALTYS NOSE AND EXHALE TWO SLOW 3

(h) REMOVE YOUR MOUTH and check for breathing

(i) CONTINUE GIVING ONE BREATH EVERY FIVE

(j) IF CHEST DOES NOT RISE CHECK for obstruction in

(k) WHILE MOUTH-TO-MOUTH BREATHING IS 5

(l) DONT GIVE UP. Continue without interruption until the

GENERAL RULES FOR TREATMENT FOR BURNS, BLEEDING, AND SHOCK

1. After casualty has revived, treat for injuries and shock.

3. Try to make him comfortable.

4. Keep him reasonably warm but do not apply heat.

7. Do not apply salves, grease, etc. to burns.

12. Expose wound and apply pressure.

13. Apply dressing, pad and bandage.

15. In all cases, send for medical aid immediately.

ELECTRIC SHOCK - RESCUE METHODS

ACT AT ONCE - DELAY OR INDECISION MAY BE FATAL

1. Turn OFF the electrical source.

2. Commence artificial respiration immediately.

3. Treat for burns, bleeding and shock.

REMOVING A CASUALTY FROM ELECTRICAL CONTACT

LOW VOLTAGE - 0 to 240 volts (household use)

Do not touch any person or equipment in contact with a wire.

Keep as far away as possible.

Do not touch the casualty until he is free.

TOXIC HAZARD WARNING

ON-LINE PART QUOTES

MODULE EXCHANGE SERVICE

EQUIPMENT BEING RETURNED TO NAUTEL

The following information should accompany each request:

* Denotes minimum information required to order spare/replacement parts

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

2 THEORY OF OPERATION (Continued)

3 INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION FOR USE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

3 INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION FOR USE (Continued)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

3 INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION FOR USE (Continued)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

5 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

5 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT (Continued)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

9 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS (Continued)

Number Title Page

1-1 AMPFET ND5- 5kW AM Broadcast Transmitter ....................................................................... 1-5